System overview - Bachmann electronic GmbH

System overview - Bachmann electronic GmbH
System overview
Automation
2012/2013
System overview
2
Content
Welcome to Bachmann
7
M1 controller hardware
26
Processor modules
ME203 series
MX200 series
MPC200 series
MC200 series
MH200 series
27
29
31
34
36
38
Digital input/output modules
Digital input modules DI2xx/xx
Digital output modules DO2xx/xx
Digital relay output modules DOR206/xxx
Digital input / output modules DIO2xx/x
41
43
45
47
49
Analog input/output modules
Analog input modules AI20x/SI
Analog input modules AI208/SI
Analog input modules AI204/x
Analog output module AO202
Analog output module AO208/l
Analog output modules AO20x/SI
Analog input/output modules AIO288/x
Temperature input module PTAI216
Temperature input modules TI214/x
Strain gauge input module DMS202
51
53
55
57
59
60
61
62
65
67
69
Function modules
Counter modules CNT204/x
Encoder interface modules ISI222/x
Pulse width modulation module PWM202
Axis controller module ACR222/2
71
73
75
78
79
Grid measurement module
Grid measurement module GMP232
Grid synchronism and protection module GSP274
81
83
86
System modules
Power supply module NT255
Power supply module NT250/48
Distributor modules VP200/x
Dummy module LM201
Rail adapter S200 series
Backplane BS200 series
Backplanes BS200 series
Backplanes BS200/S series
Bus plane adapter BS200/ET series
93
95
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
Storage media
PC cards PCC201/xx
Compact Flash memory CF200/xx
CFast memory CFA200/xx
Bachmann System Maintenance Stick BSM
105
106
107
108
109
2
3
Networking
112
System networking – interfaces
Interface modules RS204/x
Industrial Ethernet master EM2x3
113
115
117
System networking – Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Switch SWI205
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202
Media convertor – unmanaged switch FCS214/x
119
121
123
125
System networking – bus expansion
Bus expansion modules BEx200 series
127
129
System networking – FASTBUS
FASTBUS module Fx210 series
FASTBUS module Fx220 series
131
133
135
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CANopen master module CM202
CANopen slave modules CS200/x
Digital input/output modules DIOxxx-C
Analog and digital input/output module DA3284-C
Digital I/O modules TCO2xx-C
CANopen configurator
137
141
143
145
147
150
152
Fieldbuses – DeviceNet
DeviceNet master DNM201
153
153
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
EtherCAT ECS200
EtherCAT Master
EtherCAT Konfigurator
155
156
158
159
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP master module DPM200
PROFIBUS configurator
161
162
164
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
PROFINET IO (RT)
PROFINET configurator
165
166
167
Fieldbuses – M-bus
MBUS master
169
169
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Modbus master
Modbus slave
171
172
175
Fieldbuses – SERCOS
SERCOS master module SEM201
177
178
bluecom
bluecom
179
181
Communication – control room networking
M1 OPC standard server
M1 OPC enterprise server
MMS server
MMS client
IEC60870-5-104 server
185
187
191
195
197
199
Integrated safety technology
204
Safety Module & Safety Developer
Safety processor module SLC284
Safety input module SDI208
Safety output modules SDO204
Safety Developer
205
207
210
212
215
Redundancy
220
Redundancy
Hot standby redundancy
Warm standby redundancy
Network redundancy
221
223
227
231
HMI devices
236
Operator terminals
Operator terminal OT100 series
Operator terminal OT200 series
Operator terminal OT1300 series
237
239
241
245
Web terminals
Web terminals WT300 series
251
252
Control terminals
Control terminals CT200 series
255
256
Industrial PC
258
Industrial PC
Industrial PC IPC300 series
Industrial PC IPC1400 series
259
261
265
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Remote displays DD900 series
Remote displays DF900 series
Cabinet PC IPM1400
269
271
273
275
Engineering software
280
The SolutionCenter – overview
Variants M-Base
281
283
Configuration
Device Manager
285
285
Test and diagnostics
Scope (SolutionCenter)
287
287
Programming
M-PLC programming interface
C/C++ Developer
291
292
295
4
5
Visualization
Vis Designer
M-JVIS, M-JSYS tool library
297
299
303
Simulation
M-Target for Simulink®
305
306
Motion Control – standardized drive controller
311
Control
M-SMC software motion control
M-SHAFT shaft controller
M-CNC three-dimensional motions
Drive Middleware
M-TEMP temperature controller
313
315
317
319
321
323
Condition Monitoring
325
Condition Monitoring
Vibration sensor input module AIC212
Ω-Guard®
Remote service via WebLog
OmegaExpert® mobile measuring system
μ-bridge sensor
μ-two sensor
SVM300 series structure vibration monitor
327
329
333
335
336
337
338
339
Directives and certificates – for worldwide implementation
342
Standards and approvals
343
coldclimate
351
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library
3D-CAD model library
353
355
357
Mounting in the control cabinet / housing
358
Dimensions
360
Bachmann training
364
The Bachmann world
365
Impressum
367
Your expert for automation progress
Bachmann electronic is an internationally
active high-tech enterprise that offers
complete systems in the area of automation
technology.
For more than 40 years we have consistently
pursued the goal of bringing progress into
the world of automation.
With success – as the high level of trust and
the enthusiasm of our customers throughout
the world confirms to us again and again.
7
For more than a decade we have been the
number 1 company for wind power automation.
Also in the other renewable energy sectors, as
well as in the business segments, »mechanical
engineering«, and »maritime & offshore«, an
increasing number of well-known customers relay
on the experience, the specific know-how and
the unusual power of innovation of Bachmann
electronic.
Our promise is to think ahead, to set new
standards, and to react flexibly to constantly
changing challenges.
Our desire is not only to meet, but to exceed,
the expectations of our customers. How do we
succeed in this regard? Through collaboration
based on a high-level of trust and a mature
product portfolio that offers a perfect solution for
each individual task.
Experience the extensive selection and the high
quality of Bachmann automation solutions for
yourself.
8
Future-safe automation solutions for every task
Satisfying formal requirements is the
basic prerequisite for a good automation
solution. However, solutions from Bachmann
electronic can do significantly more: They
satisfy requirements today that will only
become relevant for customers
in the future.
Whether hardware product or software product –
full long-term compatibility and absolute future
viability are always integrated automatically at
Bachmann electronic.
We deal intensively with open systems and
the continuous extension of holistic automation
solutions. Thus our broad product spectrum
ranges from the proven M1 controller technology,
to protection and monitoring solutions and
a mature safety technology, via an extensive
offering of visualization hardware and
versatile networking possibilities. In addition,
the Bachmann engineering software,
»SolutionCenter«, is a real milestone in
reducing engineering costs.
Whatever your special automation task looks like,
you are guaranteed to find a suitable solution in
the following section of the catalog.
9
There are many reasons that speak for Bachmann solutions
Hardware systems / software systems
-
Flexible and modular automation system
HMI terminals and industrial PCs
Integrated safety solution: Safety Control
Decentralized I/O stations (connection without configuration of FASTBUS)
Robust multitasking operating system (VxWorks)
“coldclimate” modules for an extended temperature range from -30 °C to +60 °C, condensation-proof
Machine and system diagnostics through integrated Condition Monitoring with teleservice
Openness
-
Programming: C/C++, IEC 61131, Java
Feldbuses: PROFINET, EtherCAT, SERCOS, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU/TCP, CANopen
Interfaces: Ethernet, RS232/422/485, USB
Communication: OPC, IEC61400-25, IEC61850, IEC60870-5-104, web server,
bluecom (Ethernet-based)
- EMC-safe, fibre optic (FO) bus (FASTBUS)
- Simulation: MATLAB® and Simulink®
Highest quality
- 100 % inspection of all modules after production
- 48 h run-in test under realistic conditions
- High Accelerated Life Time Test (sample testing at -60 °C to +90 °C, 25 G shock
vibration-resistance)
- Proofed availability of the hardware > 99.96 %
Investment security
- Investment security through long-term availability
- Compatibility security of systems and applications
Certifications
- UL, CSA, CCC, GL, LR, DNV, ABS, BV
- IEC standards
10
Thanks to integrated Condition Monitoring with teleservice
Service and maintenance of machines and
systems always cause downtimes and
productivity loss, as well as labor costs and
material costs. It is much better if, through
focused increase of functional reliability
and an increase in component availability,
undesired downtimes do not occur at all.
The solution: Condition Monitoring from
Bachmann electronic.
11
Condition Monitoring means condition monitoring
function that is integrated in the control system
and monitors the machine status continuously
or at regular intervals monitored online. Thus
malfunctions or the occurrence of wear can
be detected and corrected early on. With
Condition Monitoring total failures, downtimes,
consequential damage and unnecessary wait
times are things of the past.
In addition, secure web technologies and Our
teleservice form the basis for efficient monitoring
of hundreds of distributed systems, and also
permit external defined access to the overall
system or to individual system parts. Data is
d
accessible at all times for network operators and
s
maintenance personnel, so that optimal process
control and power generation are ensured.
Bachmann Condition Monitoring systems have
proven themselves to be optimally effective,
particularly in the »wind power« segment.
12
Safety control
SERCOS PROFIBUS
Modbus RT/TCP
13
bluecom
OPC IEC61400-25 IEC61850 IEC60870-5-104
PROFINET
C/C++ Java
EtherCAT
IEC61131
FO bus (FASTBUS)
DeviceNet
MATLAB® Simulink®
Open communication and networking solutions
Communication is becoming ever more
complex and is subject to the constant
changing of the times. Consequently,
open and standardized solutions are the
fundamental basis for efficient automation.
Continuous communication must be ensured,
particularly if equipment and systems from
different manufacturers will be interconnected
in an optimally performance-optimized total
concept, or if network operators put successive
additional system parts into operation over a
period of years.
Such is the case with bluecom – a communication
solution especially developed by Bachmann
electronic for intelligent energy grids. It is
based on conventional Ethernet technology
and represents an economical and rapidly
implementable communications technology for
fast and reliable information exchange in real
time.
It is just one of many examples of how Bachmann
electronic connects present and future with open,
innovative communication solutions.
14
Indestructible quality in all life phases
15
Bachmann electronic is known throughout
the entire world for its quality promise –
to only deliver products with the highest
possible reliability.
Our promise and particular commitment to
guarantee the highest quality, enable us to
offer Bachmann customers unique solutions
for demanding environments – such as the
coldclimate modules. They are the ultimate
response to extreme climatic conditions that
demand everything of system availability.
Whether condensation or operating temperatures
from -30 °C to +60 °C (temperature peaks from
-40 °C to +70 °C) coldclimate solutions withstand
everything
g.
everything.
Our quality promise is also based on a number of
extensive test procedures that extend far beyond
the legally prescribed minimum scope – starting
with the 100 % test for all modules in an active
run-in via extreme temperature change phases in
climate chambers, to non-conforming measurements in our in-house absorber chamber.
Bachmann products are also ideally equipped
for other harsh environmental conditions: for
example for the implementation at high
elevations with low air pressure and reduced
thermal capacity. And don't forget: the incredible
mechanical stress due to shock and vibration
that have no effect on Bachmann controllers.
What for others are feared extreme conditions,
we consider as daily challenges that we happily
and easily master.
16
Redundant systems reduce costs and secure productivity
17
Automation solutions from Bachmann are
characterized by the highest level of robustness and availability. As the reliability theory shows, no single system is able to guarantee freedom from failure. With use of the
redundancy systems from Bachmann the risk
of unscheduled downtimes of machines and
plants can again be significantly reduced.
Faults and failures of mission-critical components
reduce productive times of machines and plants.
Moreover they often result in consequential damages and protracted repairs. In this regard, high
costs are incurred and the production downtime
causes economic losses.
Redundancy systems extend automation systems
with the characteristic of single-fault tolerance.
Thus consistent productivity is achieved - even
during maintenance and adaptation of plants - 24
hours a day, 7 days a week.
Redundancy solutions from Bachmann electronic
increase plant availability, specifically and sustainably: Implementation variants that are tailored
to every task reduce downtimes and optimize
productivity and operational reliability. Seamless
embedding in the existing and proven hardware,
engineering, and programming concept, combined with the robustness of proven Bachmann
components, guarantee maximum operational
reliability and maximize profit.
18
The Bachmann SolutionCenter
The Bachmann SolutionCenter represents a
real milestone in reducing engineering costs.
A single, complete software solution covers
all aspects of the engineering process – from
configuration to programming, from testing
to commissioning, to visualization.
Thanks to the highly modular plug-in concept, the tool can be easily expanded, even
for integrated user-specific requirements.
Optimally matched to the devices and systems
of the manufacturer, and designed in collaboration
with experienced users, the software offers
considerable time savings, as well as synergies
and increased usability. Users benefit from the
consistent operating concept and avoid entry of
redundant or unnecessary data. Close coupling to
19
the automation systems of Bachmann electronic
enables facilitation in virtually all processes.
The result: more efficiency and lower engineering
costs.
The Bachmann SolutionCenter was designed as
a modular plug-in system with a flexible GUI
concept based on the established »Eclipse«
framework. Both the structure and use of Java
as the implementation language ensure greater
investment protection as well as the compatibility
with existing controller projects
The Bachmann SolutionCenter – an open and
all-round trendsetting software solution.
Programming
Visualization
- C / C+ +, Java
- IEC 61131 (CoDeSys)
- Safety Editor
- M-JVIS (configured)
- Java (programmed)
Controlling /
regulating
Motion
- Softmotion (SMC)
- Shaft
- CNC
- Temperature
controller
- Injection module
- MATLAB® / Simulink®
Configuring
Test / diagnostics
- Hardware and
software
- PROFINET
- CANopen
- Safety Developer
-
Commissioning
Scope / monitoring
Diagnostic tools
Teleservice
20
Integrated safety for man and machine
21
The pursuit of greater efficiency and
progress applies also to the theme of
“safety”.
The requirements imposed on machines and
plants are constantly increasing and the same
applies for the safety regulations in terms of
personal and occupational safety.
For this reason, Bachmann electronic offers a
safety package that is consistently integrated
in the M1 automation system. Built around
a programmable safety module, digital
decentralized usable I/O modules and the
ground-breaking programming environment
Safety Developer - applications are implemented
simply and efficiently while meeting the highest
safety requirements (PLe / SIL3 / Kat 4). Because
fulfilling individual customer requests has the
absolute priority at Bachmann, naturally our
safety package can be adapted to different
requirements.
Whatever your particular requirements profile
looks like, at Bachmann electronic, you can be
sure that we will not be satisfied until everything
is perfectly matched and maximum convenience
and safety are ensured.
Ethernet
PLC/Soft Motion
Visualization
Ethernet
(FO)
Safety PLC
Distributed safety I/Os
Controllers with integrated safety – Safety Control
22
Efficient systems on all levels.
Networking energy parks
- bluecom (Ethernet)
- OPC
- IEC 61400-25, IEC 61850
- IEC60870-5-104
- Web server
- Grid measurement protection
- Grid synchronization and protection
Condition Monitoring
- Integrated or stand alone solution
- Monitoring / remote diagnosis
- Teleservice
M1 controller system
- Fully modular industrial controller
- Coldclimate modules for an extended
temperature range
- Motion controller
- High-speed communication
Integrated safety engineering
- Fully integrated development,
monitoring and logging
- Open system supports project
- SIL 3 / PLe / Cat 4
M1 controller system
Industrial PC
- Highly modular or compact
- Displays from 6,4" to 19"
- Visualization tools or standard interfaces
Operator terminal
- Extremely robust compact PC
- Visualization tools or standard interfaces
- coldclimate modules for an extended
temperature range
Fieldbuses/connections
- PROFINET
- PROFIBUS
- EtherCAT
- SERCOS
- DeviceNet
- Modus RTU/TCP/UDP
- CANopen
- FO (FASTBUS)
Redundance
- Hot standby, warm standby and network
redundancy
- Tool support for configuration,
programming and monitoring
- Extensive diagnostic options
23
redundancy
Grid synchronization and protection
Central connection
Control Center
OPC
Standardized transmission protocol
IEC61850 / 61400-25
IEC60870-5-104
M1 controller system
Condition Monitoring /
Teleservice
FO (FASTBUS)
Industrial PC
Integrated safety
engineering
bluecom
(Ethernet)
Grid measurement protection
24
25
Scalable. Robust. Versatile.
M1 controller hardware industrial controller with a future.
Individual requirements can be met easily with a wide range of powerful
CPUs based on industrial (Pentium) processors and with an extensive range
of I / O modules. Real-time capable bus systems enable the automation to
be decentralized without any loss of performance.
The M1 controller perfectly combines the openness of a PC-based controller
with the reliability of industrial hardware platforms. Designed for the toughest ambient conditions, they guarantee fault-free operation with a fanless
installation up to an ambient temperature of 60°C.
State of the art system architecture designed for seamless networking capability enables the M1 to be integrated easily in the area of the controller and system peripherals. Real-time Ethernet enables real-time controller
networking and the support of all currently available fieldbus systems enables external components to be connected via standard interfaces.
26
Processor modules
Maximum performance and unrivalled robustness.
The processor modules of the M1 automation system stand out on account of their
optimum performance and unrivalled robustness. Integrated into Bachmann CPU
boards and I/O systems, industrial Pentium processors in an embedded design ensure absolute deterministic real-time behavior.
Even the most rigorous demands in terms
of flexible data exchange and networking
can be met without costly additional modules: M1 processor modules offer the full
range of interfaces already »on-board«.
This offers the automation engineer total freedom and ensures cost efficient and
compact design. Ample power reserves for
networking and communication-intensive
applications are provided as basic features. The mass storage of the device is
also fully scalable.
As Programmable Automation Controllers
(PAC), M1 CPUs combine flexibility, open
standards and the performance of the PC /
IT-world with the industrial robustness of
classical PLC.
The comprehensive scope of Bachmann
electronic software enables it to be used
as a PLC, motion controller or communication and data centre.
Consistent compatibility of the PACs
application software protects the user's
investments for future expansions.
Processor modules
ME203 series
Features
Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
Integrated power supply, 17 W / 24 V
SRAM: 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM: 8 MB
FLASH: 8 MB File-Flash, 2 MB boot Flash
1x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit /s or 1x CAN
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx
27
Processor modules
Processor modules MX200 series
Features
CPU x86 66 MHz / CPU 133 MHz / CPU 200 MHz
Pentium class
Integrated power supply 17 W / 24 V
NVRAM: 512 kB, DRAM: 256 MB,
FLASH: 16 MB internal
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s
1x CAN
1x USB, 1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
Slots: PCC201/xx, CF200/xx
Processor modules MPC200 series
Features
CPU 400 / 650 / 700 / 933 MHz Pentium class
SRAM: to 512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM: 64 or 128 MB, FLASH: 8 MB internal
FRAM: 64 kB (no battery necessary)
1x USB, 1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit / s
Slots: PCC201/xx, CF200/xx
Prozessormodule MC200-Serie
Features
CPU 600 MHz ATOM E620 / 1,6 GHz ATOM E680
DRAM: 1 GB DDR2
NVRAM0 (data memory): 512 kB
1x USB-Host, 1x Service USB interface, 1x RS232, 1x
RS232/422/485
2x Ethernet 10 / 100/1000 Mbit / s with IEEE1588
Slots: CFast200/xx
Processor modules
MH200 series
Features
CPU 1.2 GHz Celeron
NVRAM: 512 kB
FLASH: 16 MB internal
2x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
1x RS232, 1x RS232/422/485
1x USB 2.0
Internal mass memory: CFast card
Slot: CFA200/xx
Integrated power supply
28
Processor modules
Processor modules ME203 series
The processor modules of the ME203 series
extend the range of the M1 controller family
in terms of reduced power consumption and
moderate cycle times. With an extremely slim
design of only one module width, ME203 CPUs
offer all the essential features of larger type
series but with a lower power consumption.
Several networking and power supply options scale
the module ideally for smaller applications. As
fully-fledged M1 CPUs, ME203 processor modules
are not only configured with the same tools as
the high-end families MX and MPC, but are also
fully code and application compatible, although
they have less memory and fewer interfaces.
All modules have two serial interfaces and a
front slot for one PC card. The optional Ethernet
interface allows integration in 10 / 100 Mbit /
s networks at full data rate. With the retentive
program and data storage devices, also larger
projects can be handled without the need for
external media. In addition to the supply of the
processor module, an integrated optional power
supply provides 17 W for extra I/O modules.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
80386 EX processor
2 serial interfaces
Optional integrated power supply, 17 W / 24 V DC
Optional CAN bus interface
or Ethernet 100 Mbit 100 Mbit / s interface
RAM 8 MB DRAM
Data memory 512 kB SRAM, (battery backed)
Integrated program memory
Removable memory:
PC cards with 8 / 16 / 32 / 64 MB
Battery backed real-time clock (RTC)
Status displays for RUN, INIT and ERROR
Watchdog
Item
ME203/EN
ME203/EN
ME203/CN
ME203/CNW
ME203/CN
29
Item No.
00013177-00
00015985-00
00013176-00
00013191-00
00016336-00
Processor modules
ME203 series
Processor + memory
CPU
Intel 80386 EX, 33 MHz
SRAM (data memory)
512 kB (battery backed)
DRAM (working memory)
8 MB
PC card **
PCC201 / xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB
Boot FLASH
2 MB (reserved by system software)
Program FLASH ***
8 MB
Interfaces
Serial (standard)
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485, 64 byte FIFO
Ethernet (optional)
1x 10/100 Mbit / s
CAN (optional)
1x 10 k .. 1 MBaud*
Power supply
External power supply
module**
5 V, ±15 V via backplane
Internal power supply module
(optional)
own supply and 17 W for I/Os
modules: +5 V / 2 A, +15 V / 250 mA, -15 V / 200 mA
supply voltage: 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Galvanic isolation
supply to the system 500V
Additional features
Watchdog
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C fanless
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
Cold weather (W)
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
ME203/EN
CPU 386EX-33MHz; 8 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM;
8 MB file Flash; RTC; watchdog; RS232; RS232/422/485; Eth100;
power supply 17W; PCC slot
ME203/EN
CPU 386EX-33MHz; 8 MB DRAM; 512 kSRAM; 8 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; RS232; RS232/422/485; Eth100; power supply 17 W; PCC slot;
coldclimate design ( )
ME203/CN
CPU 386EX-33MHz; 8 MB DRAM; 512 kSRAM; 8 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; RS232; RS232/422/485; CAN; power supply 17 W; PCC slot;
ME203/CNW
CPU 386EX-33MHz; 8 MB DRAM; 512 kSRAM; 8 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; RS232; RS232/422/485; CAN; power supply 17 W; PCC slot;
cold weather design (W)
ME203/CN
like ME203/CN, in coldclimate design ( )
*
TCP / IP protocol can also be run via CAN
** not included in delivery
*** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
30
Processor modules
Processor modules MX200 series
The processor modules of the MX200 series are
Module based on PC technology for the M1
controller system. Depending on the type, the
modules are equipped with a power supply and an
integrated CAN master, and have 100 Mbit Ethernet ports that allow the simple integration of the
controller in physically separated networks. The
processor module with integrated floating point
unit (FPU) is suitable for control applications. The
MX200 modules are equipped with non-volatile
RAM which provides maximum data security for
more than 10 years without battery back-up.
Depending on type, the following features are:
• 2 serial interfaces
• 2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s
with status displays
• 1 CAN interface
• 1 USB interface
• Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
• Mass storage (Compact Flash)
• RAM 256 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 Kb NVRAM
• Program memory of 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH on
PC card and 16 MB internal FLASH (4 MB for
system software, 12 MB for applications)
• Integrated power supply
Item
MX207
MX213
MX213
MX220
MX220
Item No.
00014445-00
00014444-0x
00014712-0x
00014443-0x
00019210-0x
... -00: no Compact Flash
... -01: equipped with Compact Flash 512 MB
... -02: equipped with Compact Flash 4 GB
31
Processor modules
MX200 series
MX207
MX213/x
MX220/x
Processor + memory
CPU
x86
x86
x86
Performance
(Pentium equivalent)
66 MHz
133 MHz
200 MHz
CF (mass storage)
-
without restriction
NVRAM (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM (working memory)
256 MB
PC card (program memory)**
-
PCC201 / xx with 16 / 32 / 64 MB FLASH
FLASH (program memory)**
16 MB internal
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232
Ethernet
1x 10 / 100 base-Tx
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485
2x 10 / 100 base-Tx
USB
1x USB 2.0
CAN
1x 10 k .. 1 Mbit/s
Power supply for I/O
Supply voltage
24 VDC (18 .. 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W for I/O
Module
+5 V / 2000 mA; +15 V / 250 mA; -15 V / 200 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for Ethernet and fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
coldclimate ( )
Standard
-30 .. +60°C fanless
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
*
not included in delivery
*** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
32
Processor modules
Continuation
MX200 series
MX200 series
Execution variants
33
MX220
CPU LX700-433; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 16 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; 2x Eth100; CAN; 1xRS232; 1x RS232/422/485; USB; power
supply 17 W; PCC slot; CF slot
MX220
CPU LX700-433; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 16 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; 2x Eth100; CAN; 1xRS232; 1x RS232/422/485; USB; power
supply 17 W; PCC slot; CF slot; coldclimate design ( )
MX213
CPU LX700-266 MHz; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 16 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; 2x Eth100; CAN; 1xRS232; 1x RS232/422/485; USB; power
supply 17 W; PCC slot; CF slot
MX213
CPU LX700-266 MHz; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 16 MB file Flash; RTC;
watchdog; 2x Eth100; CAN; 1xRS232; 1x RS232/422/485; USB; power
supply 17 W; PCC slot; CF slot; coldclimate design ( )
MX207
CPU LX700-266MHz; no cache; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 16 MB file
Flash; RTC; watchdog; 1x Eth100; CAN; 1x RS232; USB;
power supply 17 W
Processor modules
Processor modules MPC200 series
The processor modules of the MPC200 series are
modules for the M1 Controller System with Pentium class III processors, based on PC technology.
They are available with various processor clock
rates and in several configurations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Flexibility thanks to PC technology
Pentium III class processors
Various processor clock rates
2 serial interfaces
2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit/s
with status displays
1 USB interface V1.1 functionality
Real time clock, status displays for RUN,
INIT, ERROR
Mass storage Compact Flash type I
RAM 128 MB DRAM
Data memory 512 kB SRAM,
battery backed
Data memory 64 Kb FRAM
Program memory 32 / 64 MB FLASH
on PC card
Item
MPC240
MPC240W
MPC240
MPC265
MPC270
MPC270
MPC293*
MPC293/W*
Item No.
00012711-4x
on request
00016338-44
00012708-4x
00012710-4x
00016180-44
on request
on request
... -x0: no Compact Flash
... -x4: assembled with Compact Flash 512 MB
... -x5: assembled with Compact Flash 4 GB
* equipped with Compact Flash 512 MB
34
Processor modules
MPC200 series
MPC240
MPC265
MPC270
MPC293
Processor + memory
CPU
Celeron / Pentium III architecture (embedded), 400 / 650 / 700 MHz
400 MHz
650 MHz
700 MHz
CF (mass storage)
without restriction
NVRAM-0 (data memory)
512 Kb SRAM, battery backed
NVRAM-1 (data memory)
64 Kb FRAM (no battery necessary)
DRAM (working memory)
128 MB
PC card (program memory)**
PCC201 / xx with 32 / 64 MB FLASH
Internal FLASH (program memory)**
8 MB, 4 MB for system software
933 MHz
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485
Ethernet
2x 10 / 100 base-TX
USB
1x
Power supply
External power supply module
5 V, ±15 V via backplane
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet fieldbus
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Ambient conditions
Standard
Cold weather
Coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C fanless
-30 .. +60°C fanless
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
35
MPC240
CPU Cel400; 128 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 64 kB FRAM;
4 MB file Fash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; USB; PCC slot; CF slot
MPC265
CPU Cel650; 128 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 64 kB FRAM;
4 MB file Fash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; USB; PCC slot; CF slot
MPC270
CPU PIII 700; 128 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 64 kB FRAM;
4 MB file Fash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; USB; PCC slot; CF slot
MPC240W
CPU Cel400; 128 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 64 kB FRAM; 4 MB file
Fash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x RS232/422/485;
USB; PCC slot; CF slot; cold weather design
MPC240
see MPC240, coldclimate design
MPC270
see MPC270, coldclimate design
MPC293
CPU PIII 933; 128 MB DRAM; 512 kB SRAM; 64 kB FRAM;
4 MB file Flash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485; USB; PCC-Slot; CF-Slot
MPC293
see MPC293 in coldclimate design
*
not included in delivery
** depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
Processor modules
Processor module MC200 series
The powerful processor modules of the MC200
series offer maximum performance for demanding
applications of your M1 control system. The
CPUs are based on the latest embedded ATOM
technology, consequently they are ideally suited
for the most demanding regulating tasks,
process control, signal processing and complex
communication protocols. Through the use of stateof-the-art technology in a robust design, a compact
powerhouse with a long service life and a broad
temperature range (-30 to +60°C) is available.
The supplemental integrated, autonomous process
image controller significantly offloads the processor
and the I/O bus. This enables a new dimension in
data transmission speed to the inputs and outputs
for the fastest possible process cycles. Fast single
accesses in the μs range for precise control and
regulating tasks are also available. For efficient
networking and state-of-the-art fieldbuses, two
independent Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, including
IEEE-1588 hardware support, are available. An
internal CFast card enables fastest access speeds
via the modern SATA (Serial Advanced Technology
Attachment). Non-volatile memory of 512 kB is
available as a drive and securely stores machine
data for longer than 10 years, without an external
energy supply or battery.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 serial interfaces
USB 2.0 host interface
USB device service interface
2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
Process image controller
1 GB DRAM DDR2
Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
Internal mass storage CFast card
internal 64 MB program memory
Item
MC210
MC205
MC210
MC205
Item no.
on request
on request
on request
on request
... -x0: no CFast card
... -x2: internal CFast card 4 GB
... -0x: 1 GB DRAM
36
Processor modules
MC200 series
MC210, MC210
MC205, MC205
Processor + memory
CPU
1.6 GHz ATOM E680
I/O bus
CFast (mass storage)
600 MHz ATOM E620
process image controller
1 x integrated (accessible from the side) / > 8 GB
RAM
1 GB DRAM DDR2
NVRAM-0 (data memory)
512 kB
Internal FLASH (program memory)
64 MB, 40 MB free for application program
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet
2x 10 / 100 / 1000 Base-T with IEEE1588
USB host
1x USB V 2.0
Service USB interface
1x USB device
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O bus, fieldbuses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C, fan-free
5 .. 95% without
condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95% with condensation
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95% without
condensation
5 .. 95% with condensation
Design variants
37
MC210
CPU ATOM E680, 1.6 GHz, RTC, watchdog, 1x RS232 +
1x RS232/422/485, 2x Ethernet, 1x USB host, 1x USB device,
1 GB DRAM, 512 kB NV-RAM
MC205
CPU ATOM E620, 600 MHz, RTC, watchdog, 1x RS232 +
1x RS232/422/485, 2x Ethernet, 1x USB host, 1x USB device,
1 GB DRAM, 512 kB NV-RAM
MC210
like MCS210 in coldclimate design ( )
MC205
like MCS205 in coldclimate design ( )
Processor modules
Processor modules MH200 series
The high-performance MH212/S processor
module Celeron M offer maximum performance
for demanding applications with an M1 controller.
The CPU is based on the latest PC technology,
consequently it is ideally suited for demanding
computation tasks, databases, signal processing or
extensive network applications. With integration of
the power supply and the generously dimensioned
passive cooling system, a compact powerhouse
with long service life and an extensive temperature
range (-30°C to +60°C) is ready. The additional
integrated autonomous process image controller
results in a significant offload of the processor
and enables a new speed dimension for data
transmission to the inputs and outputs for the
fastest process cycles. For efficient networking and
the state-of-the-art fieldbusses, two independent
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces including IEEE-1588
hardware support are ready. An internal CFast card
enables fastest access speeds via the modern SATA
(Serial Advanced Technology Attachment). Nonvolatile memory of 512 kB is available as a drive
and stores machine data for longer that 10 years,
without an external energy supply or battery.
• 2 serial interfaces
• USB 2.0 interface
• 2 Ethernet interfaces 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with
IEEE 1588
• Process image controller
• Data memory 512 kB non-volatile
• Program memory intertal 16 MB Flash
• Internal mass storage CFast card
• Power supply 100 watt, power for I/O modules
30 watt
Item
MH212/S
MH212/S
Item No.
00016370-xx
00018652-xx
... -x0: no CFast card
... -x2: internal CFast card 4 GB
... -0x: 2 GB DRAM
38
Processor modules
MH200 series
MH212/S, MH212/S
Processor + memory
CPU
1.2 GHz Celeron M ULV 722
I/O processor
process image controller
CFast (mass storage)
1 x integrated (accessible via side cover)
NVRAM-0 (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM
2 GB
Internal FLASH (program memory)
16 MB
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232 + 1x RS232 / 422 / 485 (SW configurable)
Ethernet
2x 10 / 100 / 1000 base-T
USB
1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Internal power supply module
CPU supply and 30 watt for I/Os
Supply voltage
24 V DC (18 V ... 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W
Module
+5 V / 3 A; +15 V / 500 mA; -15 V / 500 mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronizing pulse also for I/O busses, fieldbusses SERCOS and CAN, Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU-ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Standard
coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Ambient conditions
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Execution variants
39
MH212/S
CPU Celeron M 1.2 GHz; 2 GB DDR; 512 kB NV-RAM; 16 MB
file flash; RTC; watchdog; 2x Eth100/1000; 1x RS232; 1x
RS232/422/485 ins.; USB; power supply 30 W; CFast slot
MH212/S
like MH212/s in coldclimate design ( )
Processor modules
40
Digital input/output modules
Efficiency for all channel types.
The M1 Automation System's wide range
of digital I/O modules means there is a
module for any channel type. A selection
from the standard 6-channel variant up
to the ultra-compact 80-channel module
guarantees the right module for every purpose.
Combined I/O modules allow the operating
mode (DI / DO) of each individual channel
to be configured by the user. As well as
the global standard 24 V DC input signal,
48 V DC modules are also available for the
power station sector.
Bachmann electronic's M1 I /O modules
not only allow the process image access
typical of PLCs but also direct access at
any point in the program. This makes it
possible to configure individual digital inputs and their status changes as interrupt
sources so that programs can respond
to process-controlled inputs. All modules
support transmission via FASTBUS (fiber
optic cable), CAN or PROFINET and offer
a high degree of flexibility in the design of
sophisticated automation solutions.
Digital input modules DI2xx
Features
Number of inputs: 12 / 16 / 32
Input voltage:
nom. 24 V DC / nom. 48 V DC
Separate single groups
Interrupt inputs: max. 2
Sink/source inputs
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel via LED
41
Digital input/output modules
Digital output modules DO2xx
Features
Number of outputs: 16 / 32
Output voltage:
nom. 24 V DC / nom. 48 V DC
Output current: depends on type 2.5 / 1 / 0.5 A
Total current depends on type: 8 / 16 A
Galvanic isolation
Status display for each channel via LED
Digital relay output modules
DOR206/230
Features
6 relays
Standard socket for SIL relays
Electromechanical or solid state relays
Mechanically locked relays
Galvanic isolation measured for system to
chanal 2500 V AC
Status display for each channel via LED
Digital input/output modules
DIO2xx
Features
Total channel number: 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 / 80,
nom. 24 V DC
Number configurable inputs/outputs: 16
Number of inputs: 8 / 16 / 32
Number of outputs: 8 / 16 / 32
Total current depends on type:
max. 8 / 12 / 16 / 20 / 24 A
Configurable interrupt inputs
Galvanic isolation from system
Status display for each channel via LED
42
Digital input/output modules
Digital input modules DI2xx/xx
The digital input modules DI212, DI216, DI232,
DI232 , DI232 /np1 and DI232 /48 are used to
connect up to 12, 16 or 32 digital sensors to the
M1 controller.
• Digital input modules with 12, 16 or
32 inputs
• Current sinking logic > 2 mA acc.
to EN61132 type 1
• DI212, DI216, DI232, DI232 , DI232 / np:
input voltage: nom. 24 V DC (18 .. 34 V DC)
• DI232 /48: input voltage: nom. 48 V DC
(30 .. 58 V DC)
• Inputs 1 and 2 configurable as interrupt
inputs
• Galvanic isolation of inputs from the system
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Sink / source inputs (DI232 /np1)
Item
DI212
DI216
DI232
DI232
DI232/np1
DI232/48
43
Item No.
00010281-00
00009002-00
00008997-00
00016411-00
00011516-00
00012162-00
Digital input/output modules
DI2xx/xx
DI212
DI216
DI232, DI232
Inputs
Number of inputs
12
16
32
Isolated input groups
1 (1-12)
2 (1-8 / 9-16)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Internal resistance
approx. 6 kΩ
approx. 6 kΩ
approx. 6 kΩ
Low level
-34 V .. +5 V
-34 V .. +5 V
-34 V .. +5 V
High level
+15 V .. +34 V
+15 V .. +34 V
+15 V .. +34 V
Input delay (normally via filter)
3 ms
3 ms
3 ms
Interrupt inputs
max. 2
max. 2
max. 2
Input delay (normally)
50 μs
50 μs
50 μs
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
300 V
300 V
Galvanic isolation of groups
-
500 V
500 V
DI2xx/xx
DI232/np1
DI232/48
32
32
Inputs
Number of inputs
Isolated input group
4 (1-8 /9-16), (17-24/25-32)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Input voltage
24 V DC
48 V DC
Internal resistance
< 4,7 kΩ
< 7,5 kΩ
Low level
|UC-UIN| < 5 V
-34 V .. +10 V
High level
|UC-UIN| > 15 V
+30 V .. +58 V
Input delay (normally via filter)
100 μs
3 ms
Interrupt inputs
max. 2
max. 2
Input delay (normally)
50 μs
20 μs
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
500 V
Galvanic isolation of groups
500 V
500 V
Current consumption (via BS2xx)
80 mA at 5 V
88 mA at 5 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DI212
Digital input module 12 x 24 V, 1 group isolated;
2 interrupt channels 3-wire technology
DI216
Digital input module 16 x 24 V, 2 groups; isolated;
2 interrupt channels
DI232
Digital input module 32 x 24 V, 2 groups; isolated;
2 interrupt channels
DI232/
like DI232, in coldclimate design ( )
DI232/np1
Digital input module 32 x 24 V, sink/source; 4 groups; isolated;
2 interrupt channels
DI232/48
Digital input module 32 x 48 V, 2 groups; isolated;
2 interrupt channels
44
Digital input/output modules
Digital output modules
DO2xx/xx
The digital output modules DO216, DO232,
DO232 and DO232/48 are suitable for connecting up to 16 or 32 digital signal receivers (relays,
contactors, signal lamps, valves, etc.) to the M1
controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital output modules with 16 or 32 outputs
Outputs 24 V DC (DO216, DO232, DO232 )
Outputs 48 V DC (DO232 / 48)
16 outputs with 2.5 A or 32 outputs
with 1 A / 0.5 A
Outputs parallel connectable
Monitoring of short circuit, wire break
and overload
Compact design
Status display for each channel via LED
Item
DO216
DO232
DO232
DO232/48
45
Item No.
00009004-00
00009003-00
00016414-00
00012176-00
Digital input/output modules
DO2xx/xx
DO216
DO232, DO232
DO232/48
16
32
32
Description
Number of outputs
Output current / channel*
2.5 A
1A
0.5 A
Groups with different power
supplies
2 (1-8 / 9-16)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
2 (1-16 / 17-32)
Total current / group
max. 8 A
max. 8 A
max. 8 A
0 -> 1
normally 80 μs
(at 1 A)
normally 80 μs
(at 1 A)
normally 25 μs
(at 0.5 A)
1 -> 0
normally 250 μs
(at 1 A)
normally 250 μs
(at 1 A)
normally 25 μs
(at 0.5 A)
500 V
500 V
Switching delay (resistive load)
Galvanic isolation from system
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DO216
Digital output module 16 x 2.5 A / 24 V DC outputs 2 groups;
isolated
DO232
Digital output module 32 x 1 A / 24 V DC outputs 2 groups; isolated
DO232
Digital output module 32 x 1 A / 24 V DC outputs, 2 groups; isolated;
coldclimate design( )
DO232/48
Digital output module 32 x 0.5 A / 48 V DC outputs 2 groups;
isolated
* rated
46
Digital input/output modules
Digital relay output modules
DOR206/230
Relays are the simplest way of controlling galvanically isolated power circuits. The output module’s
direct plugability relays drastically reduce wiring
work, save valuable control cabinet space and
facilicate troubleshooting. The locking mechanism
keeps the relay in place even when subjected to
shocks and vibrations. The relays offer maximum
flexibility for implementation in control cabinets
thanks to possibilities offered by standard relay
types with a voltage range from 24 V/48 V DC or
230 V AC, a broad power range and the selection
of valuable electro-mechanical relays or solid state
for high make-and-break cycles.
Quick and easy serviceability without the use of
tools is won by availability, clear status and error
display (thanks to LED) and a locking/ejecting
mechanism of relays as service parts.
• 6 relays
• Normally open contact (NO), normally closed
contact (NC), change-over contact (CO)
• Standard socket for SIL relays
• Electromechanical or solid state relays
• Mechanically locked relays
• Coil current monitoring
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Galvanic isolation measured for voltages
from system to channel 2500 V AC
• Backplanes BS2xx/S with protection class 1 for
other voltages than SELV are available
• Cost effective and space saving through direct
wiring to the consumer without relay and
terminal
Item
DOR206/230
47
Item No.
00014497-10
Digital input/output modules
DOR206/230
Output relays
Quantity
6 relay outputs; 3 groups with 2 output relays each are together
on an output plug
Relay socket
for SIL relays 28 x 5 x 15 mm
relay coil
coil voltage 24 V DC, power rating 170 mW
Relay contact
230 V AC, 24 V DC depending on relay type
Switching capacity per channel (max.)
ohm resistive load up to 2 A AC
AC 15 230 VA (230 V AC / 1 A AC)
DC 13 12 W (24 V DC / 0.5 A DC)
Status indication (LED)
green
Switching rate (max. load in Ohms)
1 Hz
RC circuit
depending on relay and load complete externally
Input voltage, rated
230 V AC, 24 V DC depending on relay type (current consumption
not allowed)
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation relay outputs to the
system
2500 V AC / 5.5 mm
Galvanic isolation between the groups
1500 V AC / 3 mm (between the three relays output groups and to
the Cabinet)
Galvanic isolation between relay
outputs
800 V AC / 1 mm (between every two relay outputs)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
DOR206/230
digital relay output module 6x socket with relay 24 V/230 V;
changeover contact; BS2xx with protection class 1 necessary
Safety instruction for operation
If higher voltages than safe low voltages are connected, then a backplane with BS2xx/S protective grounding for protection class 1 must be used. Safe low voltages and dangerous voltages may not be connected
together on a relay module. In addition a suitable safeguard against accidental contact must be provided:
for example, installation in a control cabinet. While in operation all sockets must have a relay plugged in.
Cage clamps are the best method for protecting against accidental contact by technicians. It is not permissible to use these relays as safety relays or for safety related applications.
48
Digital input/output modules
Digital input / output modules
DIO2xx/x
The digital input / output modules DIO2xx / x
can be used to operate receivers of digital control
devices such as contactors, relays, pneumatic and
hydraulic valves as well as for reading signals from
digitally operating sources such as sensors, photocells or switches.
• 16 / 32 / 48 / 64 or 80 digital channels
• 16 channels can be configured as input
or output
• Configurable interrupt inputs
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Supply voltage protected against reverse polarity
• Cost effective and space saving
• Full wiring without extra potential rails
(3-wire, only DIO216)
Item
DIO216
DIO216/4
DIO216/4
DIO232
DIO232
DIO248
DIO264
DIO264C
DIO280
DIO280
49
Item No.
00010615-00
00010892-00
00016141-00
00013034-00
00019502-00
00011479-00
00011478-00
00009205-00
00011471-00
00016418-00
Digital input/output modules
DIO2xx/x
DIO216
DIO216/4
DIO232
DIO216/4
DIO232
max. 16
16 .. 32
DIO248
DIO264
DIO280
DIO264C DIO280
Inputs
Quantity
max. 16
Input voltage range (H)
Input voltage range (L)
24 .. 48
32 .. 48
0 .. 5 V DC
Input delay (normally)
600 μs
0 .. 365 ms
Internal resistance
600 μs
6.8 kOhm
Status indication (LED)
Interrupt inputs
16 .. 32
15 .. 34 V DC
green
1
1
8
8
8
8
max. 16
max. 16
max. 16
16 .. 32
24 .. 48
32 .. 48
Output current per channel (max.)
1A
1A
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.5 A
Total current (max.)
12 A
16 A
8A
16 A
20 A
24 A
Outputs
Quantity
Output voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Status indication (LED)
green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
1 kHz
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Galvanic isolation from system
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
500 V
coldclimate ( )
Standard
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95% with
condensation
Execution variants
DIO216
digital input / output modules 16x DIO; 24 V / 1 A; 1 group; isolated;
1 interrupt channel; 3-wire technology
DIO216 / 4
digital input / output modules 16x DIO; 24 V / 1 A; 4 groups;
isolated; 1 interrupt channel; 3-wire technology
DIO216 / 4
like DIO216/4; coldclimate design ( )
DIO232
digital input/output modules 16x DIO / 16x DI / 16x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A,
2 groups, isolated; 8 interrupt channels
DIO232
like DIO232; coldclimate design ( )
DIO248
digital input/output modules 16x DIO / 16x DI / 16x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A,
4 groups, isolated; 8 interrupt channels
DIO264
Digital input / output modules 16x DIO / 24x DI / 24x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A,
5 groups, isolated; 8 interrupt channels, CAN-slave
DIO264C
digital input / output modules 16x DIO / 24x DI / 24x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A,
5 groups, isolated; 8 interrupt channels
DIO280
digital input / output modules 16x DIO / 32x DI / 32x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A,
6 groups, isolated; 8 interrupt channels
DIO280
like DIO280; coldclimate design ( )
50
Analog input / output modules
The appropriate accuracy for each task.
The diverse requirements of industrial and
plant automation in the field of analog signal processing can be ideally covered by
the M1 Automation System's signal modules.
Pt100 temperature sensors or DMS
sensors with perfectly scalable channel
quantities, modules of various standard
levels for general analog transmission
are available. Beside commonly supplied
Analog input
modules AI20x/SI
Features
Number of inputs: 2 / 8
Input current: 0 .. 20 mA
Differential inputs
Resolution: 13...16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog input
modules AI20x/SI
Features
Number of inputs: 8
Input current: 4 .. 20 mA,
0 .. 20 mA, -20 .. +20 mA
Resolution: 13...16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
51
modules, the scope of products also
comprises models with single channel
isolation, wire break detection and much
more. Resolutions from 12-bit to 16-bit
offer perfect accuracy for every task. Fast
sampling times in some cases adjustable
input filters and support of spontaneous
single accesses are also ideally suited for
dynamic applications.
Analog input
modules AI204/x
Features
Number of inputs: 1 / 2 / 4
Input voltage: ±10 V DC
Differential inputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Inputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog output
module AO208/l
Features
Number of outputs: 8
Output current: 0 .. 20 mA or
4 .. 20 mA
Resolution: 13 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog input / output modules
Analog output
module AO202
Features
Number of outputs: 2
Output voltage: ±10 V DC
Differential and short circuit
proof outputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Outputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Analog I/O modules
AIO288/x
Features
Number of inputs:
8 (±10 V DC / ±1 V DC
or 0 .. 20 mA)
Number of outputs:
8 (±10 V DC)
Resolution: 14 bit
Connection:
single-ended or differential
Number of Pt100 sensors: 4
Connection: 2- or 4-wire
technology
Optional galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Temperature recording
modules TI214/x
Features
TI214: 14 inputs for Pt100 /
Pt1000 sensors as well as type
J or K thermocouples
TI214/2: thermal couples type
N or S
Resolution 14 bit (16 bit with
measured value filtering)
Wire break detection on the
measurement inputs
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Analog output
modules AO20x/SI
Features
Number of outputs: 2 / 4
Output current: 0 .. 20 mA
Differential outputs
Short circuit proof outputs
Resolution: 16 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Galvanic isolation of
channels: 500 V
Temperature recording
module PTAI216
Features
Number of inputs: 4
(±10 V DC / ±1 V DC or
0 .. 20 mA)
Connection: single-ended or
differential
Resolution: 14 bit at AI
Number of Pt100/Pt1000 sensors:
12
Connection: 2-wire technology
Resolution: 12 bits with Pt100/
Pt1000
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
Strain gauge module
DMS202
Features
Number of strain gauge (DMS)
measuring inputs: 2 (full bridge)
Industrial connectors (LEMO)
Analog measuring outputs: 2
Automatic measuring range
selection
Wire break detection on
the measurement inputs
Resolution: 12 bit
Galvanic isolation from
system: 500 V
52
Analog input / output modules
Analog input modules
AI20x/SI
The analog input module AI20x / SI offers two or
four high resolution analog 16 bit current input
channels. Single channel isolation, high immunity to interference, as well as integrated signal
filtering (delta-sigma converter) make this module
particularly interesting for process technology.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 or 4 analog inputs
Input current 0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance 75 Ω
Resolution: 16 bit
Refresh cycle time 250 ms / channel
Galvanic isolation of channels
Galvanic isolation from system
Monitoring of internal voltages
Item
AI202/SI
AI204/SI
53
Item No.
00012245-10
00012245-00
Analog input / output modules
AI20x/SI
Current inputs
Quantity
2 (AI202 / SI) or 4 (AI204 / SI)
Input current range
0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance
75 Ω
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
509 nA (Vref = 2.5 V to 75 Ω)
Cross-talk attenuation
> 100 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz
> 60 dB
Error at 25°C
± 0,1%
Error at the entire temperature range
±0.5%
Sample frequency
4 measurements per second / channel
Input filter
fg (3dB) delay time 1ms, Low-pass filter: 1st order
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
AI202/SI
analog input module; 2xIn 20mA; 16 bit; single isolated
AI204/SI
analog input module; 4xIn 20mA; 16 bit; single isolated
54
Analog input / output modules
Analog input modules
AI208/SI
The compact analog input module AI208 / SI
offers eight individual galvanically isolated current
inputs. The measuring range is +/- 24.6 mA and
covers standards 4 .. 20 mA, 0 .. 20 mA and
-20 .. +20 mA.
Via adjustable measuring range limits errors, such
as short circuit, sensor defect or wire break can
be easily detected. Threshold values that can be
configured within the measuring range permit
monitoring of the process factor without having
to sample it. The shunt is protected against short
circuit of the 24 V supply, which can easily occur
with the sensor wiring. Robustness and aboveaverage diagnostic capabilities are the outstanding
characteristics of this input module.
• 8 analog inputs
• Input current 0 .. 20 mA, 4 .. 20 mA,
-20 .. +20mA
• Input impedance approx. 200 Ω
• Resolution: 13 .. 16 bit
• Adjustable input filter 2.5 kHz .. 2.5 Hz
Item
AI208/SI
AI208/SI
55
Item No.
00017772-00
00018843-00
Analog input / output modules
AI208/SI
Current inputs
Quantity
8
Input current range
0 .. 20 mA, 4 .. 20 mA, -20 .. +20 mA
Measuring range
±24.6 mA
Input impedance
normally 200 Ω
Digital resolution
13 bit (2.5 kHz filter) .. 16 bit (10 Hz filter)
Value of the LSB
751,202 nA
Cross-talk attenuation
> 80 dB between the channels
Signal suppression 50 Hz / 60 Hz
75 dB / 80 dB at 2.5 Hz filter
Sample frequency
maximum 10 kHz (filter 2.5 kHz)
Filtering slope
from cutoff frequency (3 dB) with 60 dB/decade
Input filter
adjustable: 2.5 kHz, 1.2 kHz, 640 Hz,
320 Hz, 160 Hz, 80 Hz, 40 Hz, 20 Hz, 10 Hz, 5 Hz, 2.5 Hz
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate( )
Standard
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
AI208/SI
analog input module 8x IN, -20 .. +20 mA,
13 .. 16 bit, single isolated
AI208/SI
like AI208/SI, coldclimate design ( )
56
Analog input / output modules
Analog input modules
AI204/x
The analog input module AI204/x offers two or
four high-resolution 16 bit analog input channels
depending on the model. The extraordinarily high
accuracy with integrated temperature calibration
predestine this unit for demanding measurement
applications for industrial processes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1, 2, or 4 analog inputs
Input voltage -10 V .. +10 V
Resolution: 16 bit
Sample time from 20 μs
Inputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation of channels
Galvanic isolation from system
Temperature calibration
Connection possibility differential
Internal voltage generation is monitored
Item
AI204/1
AI204/2
AI204/4
AI204/4
57
Item No.
00010693-20
00010693-10
00010693-00
00017447-00
Analog input / output modules
AI204/x
Voltage inputs
Quantity
1, 2 or 4
Input voltage
±10 V
Input impedance
> 33 kΩ
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 μV
Allowed common mode voltage
max. ±2 V
Cross-talk attenuation
> 66 dB
Cross-talk attenuation
> 120 dB between the channels
Error at 25°C
±1mV (± 0.005%)
Error at the entire temperature range
±1mV (± 0.005%)
Sample time
20 / 160 / 320 / 640 μs at
1- / 8- / 16- / 32-times sampling
Temperature calibration
normally 500 μs per calibration
Input filter
0.33 kHz / 4 kHz selectable by software
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
coldclimate
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
AI204/1
analog input module; 1x In ±10 V; 16 bit; digital
averaging; single isolated
AI204/2
analog input module; 2x In ±10 V; 16 bit; digital
averaging; single isolated
AI204/4
analog input module; 4x In ±10 V; 16 bit; digital
averaging; single isolated
AI204/4
like AI204/4 in coldclimate design ( )
58
Analog input / output modules
Analog output module
AO202
The analog output module AO202 offers two
high-precision 16 bit analog output channels.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 analog outputs
Output voltage -10 V .. +10 V
Resolution: 16 bit
Outputs can be synchronized
Galvanic isolation of channels
Galvanic isolation from system
Differential connection
Short circuit proof
Monitoring of internal power supply
Item
AO202
Item No.
00010692-00
AO202
Voltage outputs
Quantity
2
Output voltage
±10 V
Output impedance
output is corrected to ±2 mA
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 μV
Cross-talk attenuation
> 120 dB between the channels
Error at 25°C
±2.5 mV (± 0.0125%)
Error in the entire temperature range
±12 mV (± 0.06%)
Refresh cycle time
10 μs per channel
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
AO202
59
analog output module 2x OUT, ±10 V, 16 bit, single isolated
Analog input / output modules
Analog output module
AO208/l
The analog output module AO208/I offers eight
13 bit current outputs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8 analog outputs
Output current 0 .. 20 mA or 4 .. 20 mA
Resolution: 13 bit
Apparent ohmic resistance ≤ 500Ω
Galvanic isolation from system
Monitoring of internal voltages
Short circuit proof
Item
AO208/I
AO208/I
Item No.
00011244-00
00017441-00
AO208/I
Current outputs
Quantity
8
Output current
0 .. 20 mA / 4 .. 20 mA
Digital resolution
13 bit
Apparent ohmic resistance
≤500Ω
Value of the LSB
2.44 μA
Cross-talk attenuation
> 70 dB between the channels
Error at 25°C
± 100 μA (± 0.5%)
Error at the entire temperature range
± 160 μA (± 0.8%)
Setting time of 1% of the output current range
max. 500 μs
Refresh cycle time
500 μs
Galvanic isolation of channels
no isolation
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation 5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
AO208/I
analog output module; 8x Out 20 mA; 13 bit; isolated
AO208/I
analog output module; 8x Out 20 mA; 13 bit; isolated;
coldclimate design ( )
60
Analog input / output modules
Analog output modules
AO20x/SI
The analog input module AO20x / SI
offers two or four high resolution analog
16 bit current output channels.
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 or 4 analog outputs
Output current 0 .. 20 mA
Resolution: 16 bit
Galvanic isolation of channels
Galvanic isolation from system
Short circuit proof outputs
Item
AO202/SI
AO204/SI
Item No.
00012246-10
00012246-00
AO20x/SI
Analog outputs
Quantity
2 (AO202 / SI) or 4 (AO204 / SI)
Output current
0 .. 20 mA
Apparent ohmic resistance
up to 500 Ω
Digital resolution
16 bit
Value of the LSB
305 nA
Cross-talk attenuation
> 100 dB between the channels (50 .. 60 Hz)
Error at 25°C
± 0,2%
Error at the entire temperature range
± 0,6%
Setting time of 0.1 % of the output current
range
max. 3 ms
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
61
AO202 / SI
analog input module; 2xOut 20 mA; 16 bit;
single insulated
AO204 / SI
analog input module; 4xOut 20 mA; 16 bit;
single insulated
Analog input / output modules
Analog input / output modules
AIO288/x
The analog input/output module AIO288/x
offers eight analog input channels as well as eight
analog output channels.
• 8 analog inputs
• 8 analog outputs
• Connection possibility single-ended
or differential
• Power supply for up to 4 potentiometers
• Temperature inputs for up to
4 Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• 2-wire or 4-wire inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• Wire break detection for the inputs (for
voltage and temperature)
• Short circuit proof outputs
• Overload detection for
potentiometer power supplies
• Monitoring of the external
supply voltage
Item
AIO288
AIO288
AIO288/1
Item No.
00014470-00
00016157-00
00014470-10
AIO288/x
Voltage inputs
Quantity
max. 8
Input voltage
±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance
> 100 kΩ
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode
voltage
max. ±1 V
Basic accuracy at 25°C
max. ±0.05% of input voltage range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Sample time
200 μs
62
Analog input / output modules
Continuation
Analog input / output modules AIO288/x
AIO288/x
Voltage outputs
Quantity
max. 8
Output voltage
±10 V
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage
max. ±1 V
Basic accuracy at 25°C
max. ±0.025 % of output voltage range
Settling time of 1% of the
output current range
max. 400 μs
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Refresh cycle time
200 μs
Current inputs
Quantity
max. 8
Input current
0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance
243 Ω
Digital resolution
14 bit
Max. input current
35 mA (destruction limit)
Basic accuracy at 25°C
max. ±0.1% of input current range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Sample time
200 μs
Temperature inputs
Temperature inputs
Pt100, Pt1000 selectable
Quantity
max. 4
Connection type
2- or 4-wire, optional
Temperature range
-100 .. +500°C
Input impedance
> 100 kΩ
Basic accuracy at 25°C
max. ±0.1% of input current range
Input cutoff frequency
1.5 kHz (3 dB)
Value of the LSB
0.1 K
Sample time
200 μs
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Potentiometer power supply
Quantity
63
max. 4
Voltage range
±10 V
Error at 25°C
max. ±100 mV
Load
max. 40 mA
External power supply
voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
current consumption 230 mA at +5 V DC
galvanic isolation from system 500 V (only AIO288)
Analog input / output modules
Continuation
Analog input / output modules AIO288/x
AIO288/x
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
Execution variants
AIO288
analog input / output module; 8xIn ±10 V ±1 V 20 mA; 14 bit;
8xOut ±10 V; 4xPt100/1000; 4x potentiometer supply; isolated;
AIO288
like AIO288 in coldclimate design ( )
AIO288/1
analog input / output module; 8xIn ±10 V ±1 V 20 mA; 14 bit;
8xOut ±10 V; 4xPt100/1000; 4x potentiometer supply; NOT isolated;
64
Analog input / output modules
Temperature input module
PTAI216
The temperature recording module PTAI216 has
four analog input channels and 12 inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 sensors.
• 4 analog inputs ±10 V / ±1 V / 0 .. 20 mA
• 12 inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• Single-ended or differential inputs
for analog signals
• 2-wire inputs for Pt100/Pt1000 sensors
• Resolution 14 bit (AI) / 12 bit (Pt100/Pt1000)
• Sample time 2.5 ms (AI) / 480 ms (Pt100/
Pt1000)
• Channels galvanically isolated from system
• wire break detection for the inputs
• Monitoring of the external power
supply
Item
PTAI216
PTAI216
65
Item No.
00010708-00
00017456-00
Analog input / output modules
PTAI216
Voltage inputs
Quantity
max. 4
Input type
single-ended or differential
Input voltage
±1 V or ±10 V
Input impedance
> 33 kΩ
Input filter
170 Hz (low pass 1st order)
Digital resolution
14 bit
Allowed common mode voltage
max. ±1 V
Cross-talk attenuation
> 60 dB
Sample time
2.5 ms
Current inputs
Quantity
max. 4
Input current
0 .. 20 mA
Input impedance
243 Ω
Digital resolution
14 bit
Max. input current
35 mA (destruction limit)
Error at operating temperature
-30 ... +60oC -> ±0.3%*
Sample time
2.5 ms
Pt100/Pt1000* inputs
Quantity
12
Input type
2-wire technology
Temperature range
-100 .. +300°C
Constant current via sensor
Pt100: 3 mA
Pt1000: 0.3 mA
Digital resolution
12 bit
Value of the LSB
0.1 K
Averaging
over 16 values per 480 ms
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal
normally 70 mA at 24 V DC
Ambient conditions
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
5 .. 95 % with
condensation
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
PTAI216
temp. recording module; 12x Pt100; 4x analog In; 14 bit; isolated
PTAI216
temp. recording module; 12x Pt100/1000; 4x analog In; 14 bit;
isolated, coldclimate design ( )
* only applies for DC in the input current range 20 mA
66
Analog input / output modules
Temperature input modules
TI214/x
The temperature recording modules TI214/x provide 14 temperature measuring channels in a single
module width. With the TI214 either Pt100/Pt1000
sensors in 2 and 3 wire technology or type J or K
thermocouples can be connected to each measuring
channel. The TI214/2 module allows for the connection of type N or S thermocouples. The sensor
type can be individually selected for each channel.
In this way, the most effective and cost-efficient
solution can be implemented for the application.
The average determination of the measured
value can be set between 16 fold and 64 fold
for easy an reliable interference suppression.
With the module version TI214 the temperature of the switching cabinet can be measured
on the same module with an inexpensive Pt100
sensor, while for example the temperature control systems are fitted with thermocouples.
The new 3-wire measuring evaluation of the
Pt100/Pt1000 sensor compensates the voltage error of both symmetrical cable runs and enables the
precision of complex 4-wire measuring technology to be implemented in inexpensive 3-wire technology. The Pt sensors can also be connected in
simple 2-wire technology and this is sufficient for
many applications with short measuring lines.
TI214/x
• Resolution 14 bit (16 bit measured value averaging)
• Averaging of measured values for interference suppression
• Wire break detection the inputs
• Channels isolated against the system
• Monitoring of the external power supply
• Cold junction temperature compensated
TI214
• 14 inputs for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors as well as type
J or K thermocouples
• 2-wire or 3-wire input for Pt100 / Pt1000 sensors
TI214/2
• 14 inputs for thermocouplers type N or S
Item
TI214
TI214/2
TI214
67
Item No.
00014008-00
00014008-20
00018808-00
Analog input / output modules
TI214/x
TI214 / TI214
TI214/2
Quantity
14
14
Connection type Pt100/Pt1000
3-wire or 2-wire technology
-
Input filter
Low pass filter 1st order
cutoff frequency (3 dB) 17 kHz
Low pass filter 1st order
cutoff frequency (3 dB) 8Hz
Sensor types thermocouples
J or K in insulated or uninsulated
design in accordance with
DIN IEC584 each input can be
programmed for different types
N or S in insulated or uninsulated
design in accordance with
DIN IEC584 each input can be programmed for different types
Temperature range Pt100/Pt1000
-100 .. +800°C
-
Temperature range thermocouples
J/K: -30 .. +1000°C
N: -30 .. +1300°C
S: -30 .. +1600°C
Constant current Pt sensor
2 mA (Pt100), 200 μA (Pt1000)
-
Temperature measuring inputs
Digital resolution
14 bits (16 bits representation with measured value averaging)
Value of the LSB
0.055 K (Pt100 / Pt1000)
0.062 K
(thermocouple -30 .. +1000°C)
0.08 K
(thermocouple N -30 .. +1300°C)
0.098 K
(thermocouple S -30 .. +1600°C)
Base accuracy
0.1 % of measuring range at
25°C (Pt100 / Pt1000)*
0.15 % of measuring range at
+25°C (thermocouples J / K)**
0.15% for type N and
0.25% for type S of measuring
range at +25°C (thermocouples
N / S)**
Conversion time
80 ms at 16 fold averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging
1 ms without averaging
80 ms at 16 fold averaging
320 ms at 64 fold averaging
Thermocouples linearization
Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1,
for sensor types J or K
Polynomial to IEC60584 part 1,
for sensor types N or S
Error detection
Wire break
Interference voltage strength
-36 V .. +36 V
External power supply
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal
normally 160 mA at + 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
Ambient conditions
Yes
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Models
TI214
temp. recording module; 14x TE type J,K (FeCo/NiCrNi);
PT100/1000; isolated; 14 bit
TI214/2
temp. recording module; 14x TE type J,K (FeCo/NiCrNi);
PT100/1000; isolated; 14 bit
TI214
like TI214, coldclimate design ( )
* only applies for 3-conductor technology
** without consideration of cold point compensation
68
Analog input / output modules
Strain gauge input module
DMS202
The strain gauge module DMS202 is a two-channel, micro controller operated measuring module
to read quickly changing DMS signals up approx.
1 kHz with a sample time of only 12.5 μs.
•
•
•
•
2 DMS measurement inputs
High-quality plug-in connector
2 analog measurement outputs
Automatic measuring range selection
(input)
• Wire break detection on the measurement inputs
• Monitoring of the external
supply voltage
Item
DMS202
69
Item No.
00009884-00
Analog input / output modules
DMS202
Bridge supply
Carrier frequency
5 kHz ±2 %
Amplitude
4 Veff ±2 %
Synchronization of the carrier frequency
optional
Synchronization range
5 kHz ±2 %
DMS amplifier input
Input resistance
> 5 MΩ
Desired signal bandwidth
1 kHz
Resolution
12 bit
max. input common mode voltage
10 V (no overdrive)
CMRR (0 .. 5 kHz)
> 80 dB
Wire break monitoring
yes, error message
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Monitoring of the ext. voltage
yes, power-fail signal
Conversion time
12.5 μs for one channel, 25 μs for two-channel operation
Measurement range selection
2.0 / 4.0 / 8.0 / 16.0 mV or Auto Range
Measurement range switchover
automatic or via software
Measurement outputs
Output voltage
0 .. 10 V
Internal resistance
<2Ω
Load resistor
> 2.5 kΩ
Special functions
peak value capture
electronic capacity comparison
carrier frequency synchronization
External power supply
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption external
100 mA at 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
DMS202
DMS module 2 channel; 2/4/8/16 mV; 25 μs sampling time;
5 kHz carrier frequency; 12 bit; isolated
70
Function modules
Flexibility and precision in soft motion control.
As the leading provider in the field of soft
motion control, Bachmann electronic offers
a flexible line of modules for directly wired
motion control.
face). The possibility of controlling the drives
with analog signals (voltage), step motor outputs or PWM output channels allows
flexible configuration.
Bachmann modules cover all types of data
acquisition, from fast pulse and incremental encoder cards with bandwidths up to
8 MHz to SSI (Serial Synchronous Inter-
All encoder interface modules of the M1
system offer precise synchronizability as
well as comprehensive functional support
for the programmer.
Counter modules
CNT204 / x
Features
Number of counter inputs: 4
(for single-channel pulse encoders, zero initiators, triggers)
Number of incremental encoders: 2 input channels
(HTL and / or RS422)
Encoder power supply direct from the module via the
connectors
Inputs can be synchronized
Encoder interface modules
ISI222 / x
Features
Input channels for incremental or SSI encoder: 2
Output channels analog: 2 (±10 V DC)
Input channels digital: 4 (reference, trigger)
Encoder power supply directly from the module via the
connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
max. input frequency: 1 MHz / 8 MHz
71
Function modules
Pulse width modulation
module PWM202
Features
Pulse width modulated output channels: 2
18 .. 48 V DC external supply TTL
Integrated current control
Output current: to 2 A
Resolution: 10 / 16 bit
Monitoring of the load current
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Axis controller module
ACR222 / 2
Features
Interfaces for stepping motor output stages up to
150 kHz: 2
Interfaces for incremental encoders to 1 MHz: 2
Encoder power supply direct from the module via the
connectors
Monitoring of all external supply voltages
Linear or sine shaped acceleration profiles
External set or integrated profiles
72
Function modules
Counter modules CNT204 / x
The counter module CNT204 / x contains four
counters for single line pulse generators. Two of
the channels can optionally be used as inputs for
incremental encoders.
• 4 counter inputs for single line pulse generators
• Status indication: LED (green) per counter/
initiator input
• 2 input channels for incremental encoders
• Encoder power supply directly from the module
via the connectors
• Inputs can be synchronized
• Monitoring of all supply voltages
• Period measurement with 42 ns resolution
• Differential measurement (phase shift between
C1 and C3 or C2 and C4) with 42 ns resolution
Item
CNT204/ H
CNT204/H
CNT204/R
73
Item No.
00010709-10
00016407-10
00010709-20
Function modules
CNT204 / xx
Incremental encoder inputs
Quantity
2
Counter resolution
32 bit
Input signals
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
max. input frequency
1 MHz (RS422) / 300 kHz (HTL)
Counter inputs
Quantity
4 (2 if INC inputs are used)
Counter resolution
32 bit
max. input frequency
5 kHz
min. pulse length
100 μs
Input filter
fg = 100 kHz
Encoder power supply
+5 V
voltage
+5 V
Uext -1 V
Tolerance
±5 %
like Uext
+24 V
max. current / encoder
200 mA
300 mA
Ripple
< 150 mVss
like Uext
Short circuit proof
yes, permanent
yes, permanent
External power supply
Power supply
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal
40 mA at 24 V + 1.2x current consumption of the encoders
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
Standard
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
CNT204/H
counter module, 2x INC HTL + 2x counter HTL or 4x counter HTL,
isolated
CNT204/H
like CNT204/H, coldclimate design ( )
CNT204/R
counter module, 2x INC RS422 + 2x counter HTL or 4x counter HTL,
isolated
74
Function modules
Positioning modules ISI222/x
Especially designed for sophisticated motion control applications the ISI222 module offers compact
equipment and optimum precision. Equipped for
the total control of two motion axes, the module
features a number of encoder interfaces for position acquisition, analog outputs for the application
of manipulated variables, as well as digital inputs
for the initiator or trigger. Furthermore, due to the
central communication concept, all I / Os of the remaining M1 system can also be incorporated into
the motion control (limit switches, etc.).
Input frequencies up to 8 MHz and the integrated
synchronization (IO-Bus-Sync) with the total system allow highly dynamic and precise movements.
Beside the full compatibility to the well proven
controller modules M-SMC, M-CNC and M-SHAFT,
also the user own programs and individually
designed control tasks can utilize the extensive
integrated functions of the module simply via
the known standard interfaces (SVI, MIO). The
extensive integrated error monitoring with ongoing checking of the encoder resolution identifies
hard-to-see wiring or ESD problems and allows
the application especially under difficult environmental conditions.
• 2 input channels for incremental and SSI
encoders
• Full 32 bit counter
• 2 analog outputs (14 bit)
• 4 fast digital input channels for initiator and
trigger
• Position measurement / position storage can be
initiated via triggers
• Virtual for use in applications: zero pulse, speed,
etc.
• Synchronization via SYNC / PreSYNC
• Encoder supply via module
• Monitoring of the encoder voltage
• Wire break monitoring (encoder)
Item
ISI222
ISI222
ISI222 / 8
75
Item No.
00013737-00
00016421-00
00014127-00
Function modules
ISI222 / x
Encoder interface module
Quantity
2
Counter resolution
32 bit
Input signals
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Signal evaluation
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation or pulse direction mode
Input frequency
max. 1 MHz (ISI222), max. 8 MHz (ISI222 / 8)
Synchronization
by means of SYNC signal
Modes
reference value monitoring
conditional storage of counter value
conditional load / rest of counter value
speed measurement
Error detection
wire break, encoder resolution monitoring
Galvanic isolation of channels* 500 V
SSI encoder interface*
Quantity
2
Data word length
programmable up to 32 bits
Input signals
D-, D+
Output signals
T-, T+
Data format
graycode and binary format, others can be evaluated by SW
Transfer clock rate
100 kHz .. 2 MHz
Synchronization
via preSYNC function
Encoder power supply
Output voltage ranges
+5 V and +15 V selectable with jumper, 24 V looped through
Output voltage
+5 V
+15 V
-1 V
Tolerance
±5 %
±3 %
like Uext
max. current / encoder
250 mA
100 mA
300 mA
Short circuit proof
yes, permanent
yes, permanent
yes, permanent (PTC)
Ripple
< 150 mVss at +5 V and +15 V
Galvanic isolation of channels
500 V
Analog outputs
Quantity
2
Output voltage
±10 V
Resolution
14 bit
Output current
max. ±2 mA
Conversion time
<40 μs
Basic accuracy at 25°C
0.025 %
Error at the entire
Temperature range
±0.1%
Setting time of 1% of the
output current range
max. 500 μs
Error detection
wire break
Short circuit proof
yes, permanent
Synchronization
by means of SYNC signal
* only for ISI222
76
Function modules
Continuation
Encoder interface modules ISI222 / x
ISI222 / x
Digital inputs
Quantity
4 (2 INIT, 2 TRIG)
voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Input delay
30 μs default, filter adjustable
Acc. to IEC 61131
type 1
Function
INIT: initiator, trigger for strobe register, digital input
TRIG: trigger for strobe register, digital input
Connection type
Connection for analog and
digital I / O
Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 3.5 with flange
Connection type
screw clamp, spring tension clamp
plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Supply voltage
Mounting
Mounting position
Ambient conditions
18 .. 34 V DC
mountable on backplane BS2xx
horizontal (vertical at -20 .. +55°C
operating temperature)
Standard
coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
horizontal (vertical at -30 .. +55°C
operating temperature)
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
77
ISI222
encoder interface module, 2x INC / SSI 1 MHz, interrupt, RS422 level,
2x Out / ±10 V / 14 bit, sync.
ISI222
like ISI222, in coldclimate design ( )
ISI222 / 8
like ISI222, max. 8 MHz, no SSI encoder possible
Function modules
Pulse Width Modulation Module
PWM202
The pulse width modulation module PWM202 has two
power outputs for direct activation of inductive or
ohmic loads, such as DC motors, immersion coils, etc.
with pulse width modulated signals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 pulse-width modulated output channels
2 shielded DSub connectors for output channels
Status indication: LED (green) per output
Choice of high-power or TTL output level
Monitoring of the load current
Monitoring of the external supply voltage
Monitoring of the internal temperature
Item
PWM202
Item No.
00011056-00
PWM202
Outputs
Quantity
2
State indicating LEDs
RDY yellow, OUT-1 / OUT-2 green
Output voltage
18 .. 48 V (= Uexternal) or TTL level
Output current
0 .. 2 A at f ≤ 40 kHz and Uout ≤ 48 V (TA = +60°C)
Channel 1: 3 Hz .. 40 kHz adjustable
Channel 2: 155 Hz .. 40 kHz adjustable
Frequency
Duty cycle
0 .. 100% individually adjustable for each channel
Resolution channel 1
16 bit, edge aligned or center aligned
Resolution channel 2
10 bit, edge aligned
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Load resistor
normally 20 Ω
External power supply
Voltage range
18 .. 48 V DC
Power consumption
max. 10 W + load
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Monitoring
External power supply
yes, power-fail signal + interrupt
Overvoltage
yes
Undervoltage
yes
Overcurrent (channel)
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
PWM202
pulse width modulation module; 2 channels each 2A/48V or TTL;
actuator or current regulation; isolated
78
Function modules
Axis controller module
ACR222 / 2
The axis controller module ACR222 / 2 is a encoder
interface module to operate one / two (micro)
stepping motor output stages with stepper
frequencies of up to 150 kHz.
• 2 interfaces for stepping motor output stages
to 150 kHz
• 2 interfaces for incremental encoders up to 1 MHz
• Encoder power supply directly from the module
via the connectors
• Inputs for home, abort and
2 limit switches per channel
• Monitoring of the external supply voltage
2
• Linear, sine or parabolic acceleration
• Two-step linear speed profiles
Item
ACR222 / 2
79
Item No.
00009928-10
Function modules
ACR222 / 2
Encoder interface
Counter resolution
24 bit
Counter modes
1- / 2- / 4-edge evaluation
Encoder frequency
max. 1 MHz
Inputs
HEDL (HP / AVAGO interface) / RS422
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Encoder power supply
+5 V or +15 V selectable with jumper
Motor controller interface
Stepper frequency
max. 150 kHz
Number of steps (range)
1 .. 16 777 215
Acceleration type
linear, sin2- or parabolic
Acceleration time / braking time
8 ms .. 131 s
Output voltage
Input voltage
low: 0 .. 2 V, high: 3 .. 34 V, Imax = 10 mA
low: 0 .. 3 V, high: 4 .. 30 V
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption internal
normally 400 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption of
the encoders and sensors
Galvanic isolation from system
500 V
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
ACR222 / 2
axis controller module; linear/sinus; 2x Out 150kHz;
2x In INC 1MHz; encoder supply isolated
maximum frequency [kHz]
Start ramp
[ms]
maximum frequency [kHz]
breaking ramp
[ms]
Start ramp
[ms]
middle frequency [kHz]
breaking ramp
[ms]
position
or SW-trigger
80
Grid measurement module
Safely comply with defined grid codes.
In times of »SmartGrids« grid measurement as in integral component of every energy automation is becoming more and
more significant. Because the energy generating unit and the electricity supply grid
reciprocally influence each other, grid operators are defining the so-called grid connection conditions (grid codes).
These grid codes specify the ranges in
which grid variables may move. The
GMP232 module offers all relevant grid
variables and monitoring functions that are
required by the operational management
of the energy supply unit, in order to comply precisely and trouble-free with the grid
connection conditions.
Grid measurement module GMP232
Features
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power and
power quality
Input voltage up to 690 VL-L, RMS
Numerous monitoring functions
Measurement data analysis via module scope
Integrated into modular PLC
Controller architecture
2 relays directly mounted on the module
Reliable and robust hardware
Autonomic (independent of status of the PLC)
81
Grid measurement module
Grid synchronization and monitoring
module GSP274
Features
Measures current, voltage frequency, power and
power quality
Synchronism-check relay
Monitoring functions to ensure safe generator
operations
Controls two circuit breakers
Integrated fault recorder
Provides grid simulation
82
Grid measurement module
Grid measurement module GMP232
The GMP module is used in energy supply systems
for measuring and monitoring the grid.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Measures current, voltage, frequency, power
and power quality
Input voltage up to 690 VL-L, RMS
Numerous monitoring functions
Measurement data analysis via module scope
Integrated into modular PLC
controller architecture
Two integrated relays
Reliable and robust hardware
Independent of PLC status
Item
GMP232
GMP232
GMP232
Current measurement/voltage measurement
Measurement method
True RMS (incl. harmonics)
Sampling rate
50 us
Update
50 Hz: every 20 ms
60 Hz: every 16.67 ms
Voltage measurement
Precision
± 0.1% Full Scale
Maximum rated voltage
UL-L, RMS: 690 VAC
Continuous overload
Short-term overload
UL-L, RMS: 830 VAC
(10x10s, interval 10s)
UL-L, RMS: 1040 VAC
Current measurement
Precision
± 0.1% Full Scale
Rated current, current converter
1 .. 5 AAC
Continuous overload
10 AAC
Short-term overload
(5x1s, interval 300s)
100 AAC
Frequency measurement
83
Precision
±0.01 Hz
Rated frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Measuring range
50 Hz: 40 .. 60 Hz
60 Hz: 50 .. 70 Hz
Maximum frequency variation
± 1 Hz/s
Item No.
00017829-00
00019063-00
Grid measurement module
Continuation
Grid measurement module GMP232
GMP232
Grid measurement
Active, reactive and apparent power
Precision
± 0.2% Full Scale
Standard
DIN 40110-2
Energy
Effective energy
drawn, supplied
Reactive energy
drawn, supplied
Precision
± 0.2% full scale
Power Quality
voltage
total harmonic distortion (THD)
Current
total harmonic distortion (THD)
Voltage harmonics
up to the 50th harmonic
Current harmonics
up to the 50th harmonic
Standard
EN 61000-4-7
Sampling values
50 Hz: every 10 periods
60 Hz: every 12 periods
Module Scope
Number of channels
15
Channel size
40,960 samples (4 sec @ 100 us)
Sampling rate
100 μs
Module Logbook
Type of memory
nonvolatile
Size
1000 entries
Time synchronization
Synchronous with the CPU
precision Time Protocol-capable
Output relays
Quantity
2
Type
changeover contact
Relay contact
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 230 VAC
Switching capacity per channel
2 A (ohmic load)
Overload per channel
4 A (ohmic load)
Typical switching time
5 ms
Monitoring functions
Fault Ride Through, Under Voltage / Over Voltage, Under Frequency / Over Frequency,
Voltage Asymmetry / Current Asymmetry, Rate of Change of Frequency, Vector Jump
Power supply
Logic
200 mA, 5 V
Relay
50 mA, ±15 V
84
Grid measurement module
Continuation
Grid measurement module GMP232
GMP232
Electrical safety
Designs
IEC/EN 61131-2
Basic technical standard
IEC/EN 60664-1
Pollution degree
2
Overvoltage category
3
Test surge voltage
6 kV
Protection class
2
Approvals / certifications
UL/cUL, GL, CE
Ambient conditions
Standard
coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
85
GMP232
current, voltage, and grid measurement, integrated protective
functions
GMP232
like GMP232, in coldclimate design ( )
Grid measurement module
Grid synchronization and monitoring
module GSP274
The GSP274 grid synchronization and monitoring
module enables the safe, reliable and automated
synchronization of generators on the energy
supply grid. The module here monitors the
synchronization of distribution grids and
generators by taking measurements at four
points. Once this is established, the connection
switch is actuated from a relay output, in
accordance with the defined switch delay, and the
generator is connected to the distribution grid.
In addition to this, a large number of protection
functions are integrated in the module.
The GSP274 is fully incorporated in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter. The module comes with an
integrated data recorder for the high precision
recording of up to 16 measuring channels. All
r.m.s. values are also transferred via the Service
Variable Interface at the end of a grid period. This
then simplifies the analysis of all measured values
in the SolutionCenter.
Fault events are also permanently logged and
stored with a highly accurate time entry based in
the Precision Time Protocol (PTP). This data can
also be exported as a file in .csv format. Thanks
to PTP, it is also possible to access geographically
separated measuring stations using a central time
base. This enables both the chronological and
geographical tracing of fault events.
• Measures current, voltage frequency, power
and power quality
• Synchronism-check relay
• Monitoring functions to ensure safe generator
operations
• Controls two circuit breakers
• Integrated fault recorder
• Provides grid simulation
Item
GSP274
Item No.
00019756-00
86
Grid measurement module
Measurement
GSP274 - measurement
Current measurement / Voltage measurement
Measurement method
True RMS (incl. harmonics)
Sampling rate
50 μs (20 kHz)
Measurement interval
50 Hz: 10 ms
60 Hz: 8.33 ms
Voltage measurement
Amount
7
Accuracy
± 0.1% full scale
Maximum rated voltage
UL-L, RMS: 480 VAC
Continuous overload
UL-L, RMS: 580 VAC
Short-term overload
(10x10s, interval 10s)
UL-L, RMS: 720 VAC
Current measurement
Amount
4
Accuracy
± 0.1% full scale
Maximum rated current
1 or 5 AAC
Continuous overload
10 AAC
Short-term overload
(5x1s, interval 300s)
100 AAC
Frequency measurement
Accuracy
± 10 mHz
Resolution
1 mHz
Rated frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Measuring range
50 Hz: 35 .. 70 Hz
60 Hz: 45 .. 75 Hz
Calculation method
Zero-Cross Detection
Measurement interval
Between two zero crossings
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.86 ms
Voltages
Four wire three phase: Phase-To-Neutral
Three wire three phase: Phase-To-Virtual Neutral
Maximum frequency variation
± 1 Hz/s
Power Measurement – Real, Reactive and Apparent Power
87
Accuracy
± 0.2%
Calculation method
DIN 40110-2, IEC 61400-21
Measurement interval
Calculation over one period;
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.86 ms
Grid measurement module
Measurement
GSP274 - measurement
Energy
Accuracy
± 0.2%
Real energy
Received, delivered
Reactive energy
Received, delivered
Type of memory
Nonvolatile
Measurement interval
Calculation over one period
50 Hz: 20 ms
60 Hz: 16.86 ms
Power Quality
Voltage
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Current
Total Demand Distortion (TDD)
Voltage harmonics
Up to the 50th harmonic
Current harmonics
Up to the 50th harmonic
Calculation method
EN 61000-4-7
Measurement interval
50 Hz: calculation over 10 periods
60 Hz: calculation over 12 periods
88
Grid measurement module
Limits monitoring
GSP274
MP 1
IL1, IL2, IL3
50TD
46
V12, V23, V31
V1N, V2N, V3N
74
59
27
81
Q(U)
47
78
• Over-/Under
• Rate
V12 or V1N
52
74
59
27
PQM
25
• THD
• H2-H50
81
25
• Over-/Under
• Rate
V12, V23, V31
V1N, V2N, V3N
MP 3
FRT
• TDD
• H2-H50
52
MP 2
PQM
59
27
81
47
G
• Over/Under
• Rate
MP 4
IN
• Via PLC
50TD
SER
DFR
TCM
Figure 1: Available protection elements acc. to ANSI IEEE Std C37.2 - 2008 - Overview
GSP274 - limits monitoring
Under/overvoltage (ANSI 27/59)
Accuracy
± 0.1% full scale
Resolution
0.1% of URated
Delay
0 .. 65535 ms
Evaluated potentials
Phase-To-Phase or Phase-To-Neutral
Protection elements
U<
U<<
U>
U>>
Undervoltage warning
Undervoltage error
Overvoltage warning
Overvoltage error
Under/overfrequency (ANSI 81 U/O)
89
Accuracy
± 10 mHz
Delay
0 .. 65535 ms
Protection elements
f<
f<<
f<<<
f>
f>>
f>>>
Underfrequency inner band
Underfrequency middle band
Underfrequency outer band
Overfrequency inner band
Overfrequency middle band
Overfrequency outer band
Grid measurement module
Limits monitoring
GSP274 - limits monitoring
Q(U)
Description
Voltage dependent directional reactive power protection. Used to
support the voltage during grid faults. Trips, if all three evaluated
voltages are below a certain limit (e.g. 0.85 URated) and inductive
reactive power is drawn from the utility grid.
Rate of change of frequency - ROCOF (ANSI 81 R)
Description
To calculate the frequency change over time the last 10 (50 Hz) or 12
(60 Hz) frequency samples are linearly interpolated.
Vector jump (ANSI 78)
Description
A vector jump, aka phase shift, is used to indicate sudden load
changes.
Overcurrent (ANSI 50TD)
Accuracy
± 0.1% full scale
Resolution
0.1 % of IRated
Delay
0 .. 65535 ms
Protection elements
I>
I>>
Overcurrent warning
Overcurrent error
Fault Ride Through - FRT
Description
Time dependent undervoltage monitoring. Trips, if one of three evaluated voltages falls below a customer defined curve.
Curve Defintion
Up to 10 time/voltage pairs are available to define a grid code dependent limit curve
Voltage asymmetry (ANSI 47)
Calculation method
EN 50160: Asymmetry is defined as the ratio between the positive
sequence components to the negative sequence components.
Evaluated input signals
The fundamental wave is filtered out of the measurement signal
Current asymmetry (ANSI 46)
Description
Current asymmetry is calculated in the same manner as the voltage
asymmetry.
Power quality - PQM
Description
Monitors voltage and current harmonics up to the 50th harmonic.
Trips, if one of the pre-defined limits gets exceeded.
Protection elements
THD
TDD
H2 .. H50
H2 .. H50
Total Harmonics Distortion
Total Demand Distortion
Voltage Harmonics
Current Harmonics
90
Grid measurement module
Limits monitoring - continued
GSP274 - limits monitoring
Alarm relay (ANSI 74)
Description
Relays right on the module are assigned to indicate an alarm
Quantity
2
Type
Changeover contact
Relay contact
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 230 VAC
Switching capacity per channel
2 A (ohmic load)
Overload per channel
4 A (ohmic load)
Synchronism-check relay (ANSI 25)
Description
Relays right on the module are assigned to control up to two circuit
breakers. They are tripped by the GSP if the synchronism criteria’s
are fulfilled.
Quantity
2
Type
Changeover contact
Relay contact
24 VDC, 48 VDC, 230 VAC
Switching capacity per channel
2 A (ohmic load)
Overload per channel
4 A (ohmic load)
Sequence of events recorder - SER
Description
Events are recorded with a precise time reference from the main PLC
Type of memory
Nonvolatile
Size
1000 entries
Time synchronization
Time is synchronized with the main PLC which is capable to handle
precision time protocol (PTP).
Digital fault recorder - DFR
Description
Up to 16 channels can be recorded
Size
40,960 samples (4 sec at 100 μs)
Sampling rate
100 μs
Trip circuit monitor - TCM
91
Description
The module provides all information regarding the trip circuit to the
main PLC. There, an alarm can be set by a PLC application.
Available circuit breaker feedback
2
Grid measurement module
Module properties
GSP274 - module properties
Electrical safety
Designs
IEC/EN 61131-2
Basic technical standard
IEC/EN 60664-1
Pollution degree
2
Overvoltage category
3
Protection class
2
Approvals / certifications
CE, UL/cUL, CCC
Medium-voltage directive
FGW TR3
Low-voltage directive
VDE AR-N-4105
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60oC
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85oC
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Design variants
GSP274
Grid synchronism and monitoring module
92
System modules
Systematic perfection.
The M1 automation system is based on an
ingenious and field-tested modular concept. Precisely matched to the respective
requirements, automation engineers can
assemble the technically and economically
optimized configuration from a broad selection of modules.
Power supply module
NT255
Power supply module
NT250 / 48
Features
Power supply of modules via
backplane
Supply voltage:
18 .. 34 V DC
Monitoring of supply voltage
Power-fail signal for processor
module
Galvanic isolation
Output power: 45 W (55 W)
Buffer time: 18 ms
Features
Power supply of modules via
backplane
Supply voltage:
38 .. 58 V DC
Monitoring of supply voltage
Power-fail signal for processor
module
Galvanic isolation
Output power: 45 W
Buffer time: 10 ms
Distribution modules
VP200 / x
Features
Distributor module for
backplanes
2 potentials up to 24 V or 48 V
with 23 pins each
12 A per pin
93
Extremely space-saving standardized module
sizes, robust and absolutely maintenance-free
mechanical design as well as immunity to external influences particularly characterize the
M1 system concept from Bachmann electronics.
Dummy module
LM201
Features
Placeholder for one module
slot as a reserve for future
extension
No electronics
Used to protect the backplane
Backplanes BS2xx
Features
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
Backplane BS2xx/
Features
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
Coldclimate design (protected against
temporary condensation)
Rail adapter S202
Features
2 module slots
Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Backplanes BS2xx/S
Features
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection possible
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Snappable on backplane
Stabile mechanical design
For protection class 1
Grounding tab for protective conductor
connection
Bus bar Adapters BS200/ET
Features
2 .. 8 module slots
Optimized thermal connection
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
94
System modules
Power supply module NT255
With the NT255 Bachmann electronic sets new
standards for the power supplies of CPUs and
backplane-supplied modules. As a result of intensive development work and in consideration
of field experiences with several thousand supply
modules, the NT255 combines long term knowledge with the latest technologies.
Best possible, selected components and lifetime
optimized design form the reliable base for the
module. Recent planar transformer technologies
ensure a significantly increased efficiency, the
integrated heat dissipation in the circuit board
(»coolPCB technology«) prevents even minimal local warming and thus the early ageing of
components. Moreover, because of the extremely
reduced weight of the parts, the module is even
more robust against shock and vibrations.
In spite of the primary design focus on a long service life and robust design, the NT255 also offers
outstanding technical features: up to 80% longer
buffer time at short voltage drops and generous
power reserves (55 W peak power) for temporary
overload ensure safety and reliability in every
respect.
• Input voltage range 18 .. 34 V DC
• Provides all the necessary CPU voltages as well
as supply for modules on backplanes
• 45 W output power (55 W peak power)
• Galvanic isolation input / ground
• Galvanic isolation input / system
• Electronic reverse polarity protection
• 2 state indicators allow differentiation between
supply failures and internal errors
• Monitored supply voltage
• Monitored output voltages
• Power-fail signal and state information for CPU
module (processable from application)
Item
NT255
NT255
95
Item No.
00013251-00
00016158-00
System modules
NT255
Input
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage, peak value
+40 V at t < 1 s / min
Power consumption
max. 68 W
Reverse polarity protection
electronic
Starting current limitation
max. 8 A after 0.5 ms
Fuse
SMD wire fuse 7 A at device defect
Input voltage monitoring
yes, for power fail message
Output
Output power
45 W (55 W)
Output voltage / output current
+5 V/ 6 A (8 A peak)
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Power-fail bypass
18 ms, power-fail message after 3 ms
Monitoring
State indication
power-fail on processor
State display
LEDs (Power, Error, Ready)
Galvanic isolation
500 V (input / system), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
coldclimate ( )
Standard
5 .. 95 % with condensation
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without
condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
NT255
power supply 45 W (55 W); 24 V; 5 V/6 A; ±15 V / 0.5 A
NT255
power supply 45 W (55 W); 24 V; 5 V/6 A; ±15 V / 0.5 A;
coldclimate design ( )
96
System modules
Power supply module NT250/48
The power supply module NT250 / 48 is suitable
for operation on 48 V DC input voltage. It supplies
all M1 modules with all voltages required.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power supply for M1 controller systems
State indicating LED
Supply voltage 38 .. 58 V DC
Monitoring of supply voltage
Power fail signal for processor module
Galvanic isolation input / bus
Galvanic isolation input / ground
Item
NT250 / 48
Item No.
00012754-00
NT250 / 48
Power supply unit
Voltage range
38 .. 58 V DC
Input voltage, peak value
+60 V at t < 1 s / min
Inrush current
max. 7 A after < 0.5 s
Output voltage / output current
+5 V / 6.0 A
+15 V / 0.5 A
-15 V / 0.5 A
Output power
42 W
Galvanic isolation
500 V (input / bus), 100 V (input / ground)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
NT250 / 48
97
power supply 42 W (55 W); 48 V; 5 V/6 A; ±15 V / 0.5 A
System modules
Distribution module VP200 / x
The distribution module VP200 / x is used as backplane to distribute the supply voltage to sensors,
switches etc.
•
•
•
•
Distributor module for backplanes
2 potentials up to 24 V with 23 pins each
12 A per pin
Can be snapped on backplanes as stand-alone
module or can be integrated on an M1 backplane
Item
VP200
VP200 / S
Item No.
00009496-00
00009498-00
VP200 / x
Distribution modules
Quantity of potentials
2
Quantity of pins
23 per common potential
Current
max. 12 A per pin
voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
VP200
distribution modules
VP200 / S
distributor module (potential rails) mounted on fastening rail
98
System modules
Dummy module LM201
The dummy module LM201 is used as fill-in for
later extensions and does not contain any electronic components. Used to protect the backplane.
• Placeholder for one module slot
• No electronics
• Used to protect the backplane
Item
LM201
Item No.
00009494-00
LM201
Execution variants
LM201
99
Dummy module (cover)
System modules
Rail adapter S200-Series
The DIN rail adapter on the S200-Series serve as a
mounting element for individual modules on a top-hat
rail per DIN 60715.
• 2 module slots
• Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
• Vibration proof fixing of modules
Item
S202
Item No.
00021588-00
S200-Series
Dimensions
Number of module slots
2
Width
110 mm
Depth
15 mm
Height
119 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
corresponding to the combined M200-module
Rel. humidity operation
corresponding to the combined M200-module
Storage temperature
corresponding to the combined M200-module
Rel. humidity storage
corresponding to the combined M200-module
Design variants
S202
Rail adapter with 2 module slots
100
System modules
Backplanes BS2xx
The backplanes BS201 to BS216 interconnect the
M1 controller hardware modules, such as power
supplies, CPU modules and input / output modules,
mechanically and electrically.
They are the backbone of the controller.
•
•
•
•
•
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection / possible
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
Item
S201
BS201
BS202
BS203
BS204
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS208
BS209
BS210
BS211
BS212
BS213
BS214
BS215
BS216
Item No.
00009542-00
00010507-00
00009802-00
00009313-00
00009752-00
00009206-00
00009792-00
00009207-00
00009793-00
00009634-00
00009794-00
00009795-00
00009796-00
00009797-00
00009798-00
00009799-00
00009800-00
BS2xx
Dimensions
Number of module slots
1 .. 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C (vertical: -30 .. +55°C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
101
BS201
backplane with 1 module slot
BS202
backplane with 2 module slots
..
..
BS216
backplane with 16 module slots
S201
backplane with 1 module slot, without print
System modules
Backplanes BS2xx/S series
The backplanes of the series BS2xx/S for protection class 1 interconnect the M1 controller hardware
modules, such as power supplies, CPU modules and
input / output modules, mechanically and electrically.
They are the backbone of the controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection / possible
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
For protection class 1
Grounding tab (item no. 00016115-00) for
protective conductor connection, necessary for use
of voltages other than SELV
Item
BS203/S
BS204/S
BS205/S
BS206/S
BS207/S
BS208/S
BS209/S
BS210/S
BS211/S
BS212/S
BS213/S
BS214/S
BS215/S
BS216/S
Protective conductor
connection set
Item No.
00016785-00
00016786-00
00016787-00
00016788-00
00016789-00
00016790-00
00016791-00
00016792-00
00016793-00
00016794-00
00016795-00
00016796-00
00016797-00
00016798-00
00016115-00
BS2xx/S
Dimensions
Number of module slots
3 .. 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm without protective conductor connection
137 mm with protective conductor connection
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C (vertical: -30 .. +55°C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
BS203/S
backplane with 3 module slots, protection class 1
BS204/S
backplane with 4 module slots, protection class 1
..
..
BS216/S
backplane with 16 module slots, protection class 1
102
System modules
Backplanes BS2xx
series
The backplanes for BS2xx/W for cold weather and
protection class 1 interconnect the M1 controller hardware modules, such as power supplies, CPU modules
and I / O modules, mechanically and electrically. They
are the backbone of the controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 .. 16 module slots
Seamless connection / possible
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Can be snapped on EN 60715 DIN rail
Coldclimate design (protected against temporary
condensation)
Item
BS203
BS204
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS208
BS209
BS210
BS211
BS212
BS213
BS214
BS215
BS216
Item No.
00015947-00
00015948-00
00015949-00
00015950-00
00015951-00
00015952-00
00015953-00
00015954-00
00015955-00
00015956-00
00015957-00
00015958-00
00018623-00
00018624-00
BS2xx
Dimensions
Number of module slots
3 .. 16
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
23 mm incl. connector
Height
119 mm
Ambient conditions
coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C (vertical: -30 .. +55°C)
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Execution variants
103
BS203/
backplane with 3 module slots, coldclimate ( )
BS204/
backplane with 4 module slots, coldclimate ( )
..
..
BS216/
backplane with 16 module slots, coldclimate ( )
System modules
Bus bar Adapters BS200/ET
The busbar adapters of the BS200/ET family are used
to optimize thermal and robust Controller connection
to e.g. the cabinet back panel. Through this application-specific coupling, the heat can be specifically
removed through the rear wall of the cabinet housing,
in which the cooling of the interior becomes much
easier. Frequently, a maintenance-intensive active
cooling of the components in the interior can therefore be avoided.
This adapter also allows for direct mounting without a
top-hat rail, if this is beneficial for structural reasons,
like in the case of a vertical mount or increased mechanical loads.
These accessories can be used for the bus bar-series
BS200.
Bus bar adapter with fitted M1 controller
•
•
•
•
2 .. 8 module slots
Optimized thermal connection
Stabile mechanics / compact design
Vibration proof fixing of modules
Item
Item No.
BS202/ET
on request
BS203/ET
on request
BS204/ET
00021791-00
BS205/ET
00021558-00
BS206/ET
00021792-00
BS207/ET
00021793-00
BS208/ET
00021794-00
BS200/ET
Dimensions
Number of module slots
2 .. 8
Width
55 mm x number of module slots
Depth
10 mm
Height
150 mm
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Rel. humidity operation
corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Storage temperature
corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Rel. humidity storage
corresponding to the installed bus bar family
Design variants
BS202/ET
Bus bar adapters with 2 module spots
BS203/ET
Bus bar adapters with 3 module spots
..
..
BS208/ET
Bus bar adapters with 8 module spots
104
Storage media
Robust in every detail.
To safely satisfy the high availability requirements imposed on the entire automation system, program memory and data
memory should also be selected with the
utmost care. The PCC201, CF200, as well
as the latest CFA200 families are specially selected industrial types that meet the
special requirements imposed by the harsh
everyday conditions.
Due to the extended ambient conditions, the
high number of supported write cycles and the
exchange of experience with suppliers these
memory cards are strongly recommended for
use both in the controller system as well as in
the operating and monitoring devices, and in
industrial PCs.
PC cards PCC201/xx
Features
Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB
Access width 16 bits
Designed as 5 V card
Program voltage of 12 Vpp
Write protection via
operating software
CFast Memory CFA200/xx
Features
CFast type I
Memory capacity 4/8 GB
Fast data transfer with SATA
Write protection via
operating software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF
105
Compact Flash
Memory CF200/xx
Features
Compact Flash type I
according to Compact Flash
specification
Memory capacity 512 MB,
4 GB, 8 GB
Fast data transfer with ATA
Write protection via
operating software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF
Bachmann System
Maintenance Stick
Features
USB stick with backup and restore program
for operator terminals and
industrial PCs with Linux and
Windows
Memory capacity 8 GB
Storage media
PC cards PCC201/xx
The PCC201/xx PC cards serve as a storage
medium of the M1 controller. Depending on the
memory extension, the PC cards may contain
source codes and pieces of documentation in addition to the operating system, the drivers and the
application software.
The PCC201 cards can directly be written to and
formatted in all processor modules of the M1 controller. With an A-PCC200 adapter it is possible to
use the PC cards in the PCMCIA slots of PCs and
notebooks.
Item
PCC201/32
PCC201/64
A-PCC200
The PCC201 series is produced entirely in-house
and therefore long-term supply is guaranteed.
Item No.
00012081-30
00012081-40
00009540-00
•
•
•
•
•
Memory capacity 32 / 64 MB
Access width 16 bits
Designed as 5 V card
Program voltage of 12 Vss
Write protection via operating software
PCC201/xx
Basic data
Register
no CMR (Component Management Register)
Powerdown mode
not possible
Information
all information is stored in CIS
(Card Information Structure)
Operating voltages
Operating voltage
5 V (min. 3 V for FLASH memory)
Program voltage
12 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
0 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
PCC201/32
PC card with 32 MB FLASH program memory
PCC201/64
PC card with 64 MB FLASH program memory
A-PCC200
PC card adapter
106
Storage media
Compact Flash memory CF200/xx
Given the high availability demands placed
on automation systems, program and data
memory must be selected with particular care. The Compact Flash memory cards
CF200/xx are therefore especially selected
industrial types that can cope with the requirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CF200/xx both in CPUs of the M1
family and in CT and WT devices is strongly
recommended due to the extreme environmental conditions, the large number of supported write cycles and the many years
of lasting experience with suppliers.
Item
CF200/512
CF200/4GB
CF200/8GB
Item No.
00012759-00
00013556-00
00014321-00
• Compact Flash type I
according to Compact Flash specification
• Memory capacity 512 MB, 2 / 4 GB
• Fast data transfer
• Write protection via operating software
• Extended temperature range
• Long service life / MTTF
CF200/xx
Technical data
Memory type
Compact Flash type I
Memory capacity
512 MB, 4 GB, 8 GB
Data transfer rate
up to 8 MB/s
Operating voltage
3.3 V / 5 V (automatic adaptation)
Read / write cycles
2,000,000
MTBF at 25°C
> 4,000,000 h (depending on free memory)
Data retention
10 years
Data reliability
< 1 unrecoverable errors in 1014 bits read accesses
Vibration
2G
Shock
2000 G
10 Hz .. 2 kHz
half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
107
CF200 / 512
Compact-Flash 512 MB
CF200 / 4GB
Compact-Flash 4 GB
CF200 / 8GB
Compact-Flash 8 GB
Storage media
CFast memory CFA200/xx
The full speed of the SATA interface is available
with the CFAST Flash memory card for powerful controllers. Up to 30x the transmission rates
of the CF cards can be reached. Given the high
availability demands placed on automation
systems, program and data memory must be
selected with particular care. The CFast memory cards CFA200 / xx are therefore especially
selected industrial types that can cope with the
requirements of harsh daily working routines.
Use of the CFA200/xx both in CPUs of the M1
family as well as in our visualization devices
is strongly recommended due to the extreme
environmental conditions, the large number of
supported write cycles and the many years of
lasting experience with suppliers. The robustness was significantly increased in comparison
with a CF card via a stable edge connector.
Item
CFA200/4GB
CFA200/8GB
•
•
•
•
•
•
Item No.
00017355-00
on request
CFast type I
Memory capacity 4/8 GB
Fast data transfer
Write protection via software
Extended temperature range
Long service life / MTTF
CFA200/xx
Technical data
Memory type
CFast type I
Memory capacity
4 / 8 GB
Data transfer rate
up to 100 MB / s
Operating voltage
3.3
Read / write cycles
> 3,000,000
MTBF at 25°C
> 2,500,000 h (depending on free memory)
Data retention
10 years
Vibration
20 G
10 Hz .. 2 kHz
Shock
1500 G
half cycle 0.5 ms
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Execution variants
CFA200 / 4GB
CFast memory with 4 GB FLASH data memory
CFA200 / 8GB
CFast memory with 8 GB FLASH data memory
108
Storage media
Bachmann System Maintenance Stick
for Linux and Windows devices
The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick (BSM
Stick) is a combination of an 8 GB USB stick and
an easy-to-operate, graphic backup and restore
program for operator terminals and industrial PCs
with Linux and Windows. Using the BSM Stick
you can conveniently create complete backups of
the operating system on a USB stick, or restore a
complete backup from the stick.
The operating philosophy of the Bachmann System
Maintenance Utility is based on the easiest possible
operation via a standard PC keyboard, so that a
corrupt operating system of an operator terminal
or IPC can be quickly restored in the field, even
by unexperienced operating personnel (one-click
recovery). With the aid of the BSM Stick the
end customer can keep machine downtimes to a
minimum; this makes "repairs" of the visualization
hardware, due to an operating system defect,
unnecessary. Also the end customer can save the
high expenses associated with keeping a pool
of replacement devices on hand for these kinds
of service cases. Thus the BSM Stick directly
helps to reduce costs and optimizes availability
of the terminal or of the IPC, and thus it helps to
optimize availability of the system or machine, and
contributes to increased acceptance of a machine
on the part of the end customer.
The Bachmann System Maintenance Stick supports
all series OT200, and series OT1300 operator
terminals, as well as the series IPC1400 and
IPC300 IPCs.
System prerequisites
• Free USB port
• System BIOS that supports booting from the USB
port
• External standard PC keyboard
Scope of delivery
• 8 GB USB with pre-installed Bachmann System
Maintenance Utility
Item Item no.
BSM Stick
on request
109
Storage media
110
111
Independent. Powerful. Open.
Networking – the backbone
of the automation solution.
As an automation specialist in the area of distributed energy generation
plants, we know the significance of a powerful, scalable, and absolutely
reliable networking solution. Networking as the backbone of every
automation solution has the task of connecting different sub-components
according to their requirements in terms of signaling. In this regard
rigorous requirements are imposed on real-time capability, manipulation
security, as well as availability.
To meet these high requirements, Bachmann electronic provides an
extensive offering of different networking components. For example,
our offering enables a central control room connection adapted to the
particular customer requirements via Ethernet, or a machine-internal,
flexible connection of the individual machine components on the controller
via real-time capable fieldbuses. You decide which of the networking
possibilities established on the market best fits your automation task.
Bachmann electronic is guaranteed to have a suitable solution in its
product line.
112
System networking – interfaces
Numerous upgrade possibilities.
The M1-CPU already offers hardware
interfaces for Ethernet and serial
connections. If needed the number of
these interfaces can be increased by
placement of appropriate hardware
modules on the backplane. The RS204
module offers additional serial ports with
9-pin D-Sub connectors. In addition the
EM203 module extends the system by
additional network adapters with three
RJ45 ports. This means that the interface
extensions can also be used on Fastbus
substations.
Topology: Interface
M1-CPU
EM203
RS204
RS485
SERVICE INSTALLER
WIND
SENSOR
RS232, RS422
PITCH
CONTROL
Modbus RTU
CMS
SYSTEM
113
CONVERTERS
Industrial Ethernet master
EM203, EM213, EM213
Features
Additional Ethernet port (separate IP address)
Cable length to 100 m per line
RJ45 connections: 3
Status display via LED
Integrated switch
Transfer rate to M1 CPU:
max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch: max. 100 Mbit / s
Interface modules
RS204
Features
4 interfaces on one module
Several interface modules per controller possible
RS232 / RS422 / RS485 can be combined
High-speed interfaces up to 1.5 Mbit / s
Switchable terminating resistors
114
Interface modules
Industrial Ethernet master EM2x3
The module EM2x3 extends the control
system with an additional Ethernet adapter
with 3 ports for 10/100 MBit. Thus Ethernet
ports for connection of a service laptop or
for other Ethernet-based networking are
also available on FASTBUS substations.
•
•
•
•
Cable length to 100 m per line
Status display via LED
3xRJ45 connections
Integrated switch
Item
EM203
EM213
EM213
Item no.
00012671-00
00017321-00
00017470-00
VISUALIZATION
CMS
FS
EM
FO (FASTBUS)
M1-CPU
115
INTERNET
FM
System networking – interface modules
EM2x3
Ethernet master
Number of transceivers
3x 10 / 100BaseT
Connectors
3x RJ45 / crossed and uncrossed cables can be used
(autocross detection)
Line length
max. 100 m / line
Transfer rate to M1 CPU
max. 2.4 Mbit / s user data
Transfer rate as switch
max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance
100 Ω
Status display
LEDs for power, collision + 4x LinkPuls, 3x speed (10 / 100 Mbit / s)
Ambient conditions
Standard EM203
Standard EM213
Operating temperature
0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
-30 .. +60 °C
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 %
with condensation
-40 .. +85 °C
5 .. 95 %
without condensation
5 .. 95 %
with condensation
5 .. 95 %
with condensation
Model variants
EM203
Ethernet master; 10/100; RJ45; 3 ports
EM213
Ethernet master; 10/100; RJ45; 3 ports
EM213
like EM213 as coldclimate model ( )
116
Interface modules
Interface modules RS204
The interface module RS204 is used to
connect four asynchronous serial interfaces
to the M1 controller.
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 interfaces on one module
Any number of interfaces possible per controller
RS232 / RS422 / RS485 can be combined
High speed interfaces with up to 1.5 Mbaud
Auto-flow control for automatic handshake
Integrated terminating resistors
(connect/disconnect)
• Interfaces galvanically isolated
Item
RS204
RS204
117
Item no.
00021235-00
00021674-00
System networking – interface modules
RS204
Description
RS232
RS422
Transfer rate* (max.)
115.2 Kbaud
921.6 Kbaud
Signal level
RS232
RS422
Terminating resistance
-
yes, adjustable via DIP switch
Operating mode
Full duplex
Full duplex
Description
RS422
Transfer rate* (max.)
1.5 Mbaud
Signal level
RS422
Terminating resistance
yes, adjustable via DIP switch
Operating mode
Full duplex
Description
RS485
Transfer rate* (max.)
1.5 Mbaud
Signal level
RS485
Terminating resistance
yes, adjustable via DIP switch
Operating mode
Half duplex
External power supply
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
120 mA at 24 V DC
Galvanic isolation from system
and between interfaces
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
RS204
Serial interface, 4x RS232 / 422 / 485, 128 byte FIFO, individually isolated
RS204
like RS204 as coldclimate model ( )
* The following transfer rates [bit / s] can be set via software: 300; 1200; 2400; 4800;
9600; 19,2k; 28,8k;38,4k; 57,6k; 76,8k; 115,2k; 153,6k; 230,4k; 460,8k; 921,6k or
250k; 300k; 375k; 500k; 750k; 1,5Mbit/s
118
System networking – Ethernet
For the safest connections.
A secure, powerful and robust Ethernet
connection is gaining ever greater
significance. Whether as a simple switch
like the SWl205, or as a media converter
with switch functionality, like the FCS214,
Bachmann electronic offers Ethernet
networking components in recognized
and proven quality. In addition, with the
FCS additional diagnostic functions are
available. This means that the states of
the optical components and of the fiber
optic cable can be constantly monitored
in diagnostic tools, as well as in the
controller-side software. Thus deficient
connection quality due to installation
errors or due to aging of the components
can be detected and corrected in a timely
manner – even before a failure occurs.
Topology: Ethernet
VISUALIZATION
CMS
FCS
FS
FO MULTIMODE CABLE
M1-CPU
FCS
FM
CONVERTERS
INTERNET
119
System networking – Ethernet modules
Industrial Ethernet switch
SWI205
Features
Cable length to 100 m per line
RJ45 connections: 5
Status display via LED
Transfer rate: max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance: 100 Ω
QoS (IEEE 802.1Q,p)
Ethernet Remote Station
ERS202
Features
1 serial interface
2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s with status
displays
1 USB interface
RAM 256 MB DRAM
Data memory 512 kB NVRAM
Integrated power supply
Media converter unmanaged switch
FCS214
Features
Implementation copper – FO
Up to 1 Gbit/s throughput
Unmanaged – easy commissioning
Reliable hardware
Detailed, integrated diagnostic possibilities
120
System networking – Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet switch SWI205
The module SWI205 is a powerful and industry
compliant Ethernet switch and is used to connect
M1 control systems, laptops and networks
with the Ethernet 10 / /100BaseT technology.
• Cable length to 100 m per line
• Status display via LED
• 5xRJ45 connections
Item Item no.
SWI205 / S
00012672-00
121
System networking – Ethernet modules
SWI205
Ethernet switch
Number of transceivers
5x 10 / 100BaseT
Connectors
5x RJ45 / crossed and uncrossed cables can be used
(autocross detection)
Line length
max. 100 m / line
Transfer rate
max. 100 Mbit / s
Line impedance
100 Ω
Status display
LEDs for power, collision + 5x LinkPuls, 5x speed (10 / 100 Mbit / s)
External power supply
Supply voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
normally 100 mA at 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
SWI205/S
Ethernet switch RJ45, 5 ports, mounted on DIN rail
122
System networking – Ethernet
Ethernet Remote Station ERS202
The module ERS202 serves as a remote slave module for sub-stations (e.g. redundant networks).
It manages the local data and the exchange
of two Ethernet ports to the for example redundant master controllers. Easy configuration
and efficient data exchange allows for safe operation with the fastest possible switchover.
The robust design as a cold climate version provides protection even under hard environmental conditions. An integrated power supply simplifies the construction.
The module offers the following features:
• 1 Serial interface
• 2 Ethernet-interfaces 10 / 100 Mbit / s
with status displays
• 1 USB interface
• Status indicating LEDs for RUN, INIT and ERROR
• RAM 256 MB DRAM
• Data memory 512 Kb NVRAM
• Program memory of 16 MB and internal FLASH (4 MB for system software,
12 MB for redundancy configuration)
• Integrated power supply
Item Item no.
ERS202
00021244-00
123
System networking – Ethernet modules
ERS202
Processor + memory
CPU
x86
NVRAM (data memory)
512 kB
DRAM (working memory)
256 MB
FLASH (program memory)*
16 MB internal
Interfaces
Serial
1x RS232
Ethernet
2x 10 / 100 base-Tx
USB
1x USB 2.0
Power supply
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Nominal power
17 W
Current consumption at +
5V
2000mA
Current consumption at +
15 V
250mA
Current consumption at - 15
V
200mA
Additional features
Watchdog
Synchronization pulse for Ethernet
Real-time clock with battery
Status indication via 3 LEDs
CPU ID selectable with rotary hexadecimal switches
Operating system VxWorks with Bachmann system extensions on internal FLASH
Ambient conditions
coldclimate ( )
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C, fan-free
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95% with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95% with condensation
Model
ERS202
Ethernet Remote Station CPU LX700-266 MHz; 256 MB DRAM; 512 kB
SRAM; 16 MB File-Flash; RTC; Watchdog; 2x Eth100; 1x RS232; 1x USB2.0;
power supply 17 W; coldclimate model ( )
* depending on the configuration, a part of the program memory is reserved for the system software
124
System networking – Ethernet
Media convertor – unmanaged
switch FCS214 series
The FCS214/x combines media convertor and
gigabit switch in a single module. With a fiber
optic connection and four RJ45 ports, it is
optimally suited for data transmission over long
distances. Selected diagnostic capabilities for
the fiber optic link and the Ethernet data traffic
can be directly integrated into existing PLC
applications. The flexible connector concept allows
easy connection via a patch cable or an industrial
grade push-pull plug connection via an adapter.
•
•
•
•
•
4x RJ45, 1x FO-connection
Up to 1 Gbit/s throughput
Unmanaged – easy commissioning
Reliable hardware
Connection via Harting PushPull® connector or
LC patch cable
• Integrated FO and Ethernet diagnostis
Item
FCS214/F
FCS214/G
FSC214/F
FSC214/G
Item no.
00017192-10
00017192-00
00019104-10
00019104-00
Screwable adapter for using PushPull connector
Item
Adapter
125
Item no.
00016682-00
System networking – Ethernet modules
FCS214
FCS214/F
FCS214/G
RJ45
4x 10/100/1000 MBit/s
4x 10/100/1000 MBit/s
Fiber optic cable
1x 100 MBit/s
1x 1000 MBit/s
Ports
FOC transmission medium Multimode Fibre (50/125 μm
and 62,5/125 μm) max. 2000 m
FOC connector type LC
FOC guide wavelength 1310 nm
Diagnostic possibilities
Fiber optic cable – received light output
HW: three-color status LED
SW: 0 – 100 %
Ethernet – throughput
number of data packets
Ethernet – quality of communication
good/bad frames, bad size, CRC error,…
Ethernet – mirror port
configurable
Ambient conditions
coldclimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 %
without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
FCS214/F
100 Mbit/s
FCS214/G
1000 Mbit/s
FCS214/F
like FCS214/F, in coldclimate model ( )
FCS214/G
like FCS214/G, in coldclimate model ( )
Accessories*
Item
Order designation
Manufacturer
Description
LC connector
SXLC-DK0-56-0010
LEONI
LC connector duplex
uniboot multimode type 2
for multimode fibers with 125 μm cladding
Harting connectors
09 57 402 0500 020
HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex plastic Multi
Mode SFP
Harting connectors
09 57 409 0500 020
HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex metal Multi
Mode SFP
*Information without guarantee, order directly from the manufacturer
126
System networking – bus expansion
Standardized performance.
With the bus expansion modules from
Bachmann electronic for the CPU station,
additional backplanes with I/O modules
can be added. A configuration is not
required to do this; at system start all
stations and modules will be automatically
detected and initialized. All I/O modules
can be reached transparently; the physical
structure of the control system does not
need to be considered. Organization of
the controller in multiple stations permits
both spatial adaptation to the control
cabinet, as well as wide-area distribution
of I/O modules for extended machines and
plants. There is no restriction for the user
in terms of performance and convenience.
The interconnected backplanes behave as
if they were connected on a single, large
backplane.
Topology: bus expansion
M1
BEM
<3m
BES
BES
127
Bus extension modules
BEx200 series
Features
Bus expansion master module:
1 interface
Bus expansion slave module:
2 interfaces (cascadable)
Up to 6 local substations
Minimal signal delay
Distances of up to 3 m between stations
Integrated watchdog on slave modules
128
System networking – bus expansion
Bus expansion modules
BEx200 series
With the bus extension modules BEM21x and
BES21x a »high speed« connection up to 3 m
away is possible with less than 1.5 μs access time
to distributed I / O units. Up to six distributed
substations can be directly interconnected in
a daisy chain topology. Each substation can in
turn handle up to 15 M1 standard modules.
The wiring using RJ45 connectors is
one advantage of this new technology.
Thus wiring is significantly facilitated.
A special protocol is not required to use the I / Os
with the bus expansion. The user can access
these modules directly: As if they were local.
The bus expansion module BES21x / N with
integrated 24 V power supply provides power
for the substation. If more than six substations
are required, BES222 / x can be used, which
enables a special signal conditioning for up to
15 substations.
• Bus expansion master module with 1 interface
• Bus expansion slave module with 2 interfaces
• Bus expansion slave module optionally
with integrated power supply
• Up to 6 or 15 local substations
• Minimal signal delay
• Distances of up to 3 m between 2 stations
• Integrated watchdog on slave modules
Item
BEM211
BES212
BES212 / N
BES222
BES222 / N
129
Item no.
00012846-00
00012847-00
00012848-00
00013502-00
00013503-00
System networking – bus expansion
BEx200 series
Bus expansion interface
Line length
3m
Transmission medium
CAT7 special cable
Max. number of stations
6 (BES212 / x) or
15 (BES222 / x)
Integrated power supply (optional)
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
BEM211
Bus expansion master with 1 interface
BES212
Bus expansion slave with 2 interfaces (up to 6 stations)
BES212 / N
Bus extension slave with 2 interfaces and integr.
Power supply 17 W (up to 6 stations)
BES222
Bus expansion slave with 2 interfaces (up to 15 stations)
BES222 / N
Bus extension slave with 2 interfaces and integr. P
ower supply 17 W (up to 15 stations)
130
System networking – FASTBUS
Extensive networking possibilities.
With the aid of FO-based FASTBUS
solutions numerous distributed tasks can
be executed easily and reliably. FASTBUS
permits a mixed topology of star and
linear networking. In order to design
distributed stations even more compact,
FASTBUS slaves with integrated power
supplies are available. These stations are
capable of supplying the I/O modules on
the substations. Between the individual
stations distances of up to 2000 m can be
bridged with no problems, in this regard
the galvanic separation is ensured by the
fiber optic connection. Use of the FASTBUS
does not require a configuration, or other
special handling in the software, but
rather functions in accordance with the
»plug and play« principle.
Topology: FASTBUS
CONTROL CABINET
MOTOR
SPEED SENSOR
T
MPC
FM21x
FS212
131
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
FS211
T
FASTBUS modules Fx210 series
Features
Fast, fail-safe distribution via fibre optic cables
(up to 200 m)
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Group isolation: 500 V
FASTBUS modules Fx220 series
Features
Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
Master modules with 1 or 2 FO interfaces
Slave modules with integrated power supply
Up to 15 remote substations, cascadable
Connection technology via robust Harting PushPull®
connector or LC patch cable
132
System networking – FASTBUS
FASTBUS modules Fx210 series
The FASTBUS modules, FM211, FM212, FS211,
and FS212 are designed to enable distribution of
substations over long distances with a very low
signal delay. The power supply integrated in the
FASTBUS slave modules, FS211 / N and FS212 / N
can supply the I / O modules of a substation.
• FASTBUS master modules with
1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules with
1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules with
integrated power supply
• Up to 15 distributed substations
• Distances to 50 m for POF cable,
150 m for HCS cables or 200 m for special
HCS cables between 2 stations
• Minimal signal delay
Item
FM211
FM212
FFS211 / N
FS212 / N
133
Item no.
00010495-00
00010496-00
00010498-00
00010500-00
System networking – FASTBUS
Fx210 series
FASTBUS interface
Line length
50 / 150 / 200 m between the stations,
Total length max: 1000 m
Transmission medium
Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) max. 50 m
Hard Cladded Silica (HCS) max. 150 m
HCS sometimes also referred to as Plastic Silica Fiber (PCF),
Special HCS cable 200 m
Number of stations
max. 16
Integrated power supply
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption
max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Galvanic isolation from the system
500 V
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
FM211
FM212
FASTBUS master with 1 FO interface, HCS/PCF 150 m
or PMMA 50 m
FASTBUS master with 2 FO interfaces, HCS/PCF 150 m
or PMMA 50 m
FS211 / N
FASTBUS master with 1 FO interface, HCS/PCF 150 m
or PMMA 50 m, integrated power supply 17 W
FS212 / N
FASTBUS master with 2 FO interfaces, HCS/PCF 150 m
or PMMA 50 m, integrated power supply 17 W
134
System networking – FASTBUS
FASTBUS modules Fx220 series
The FASTBUS modules FM221, FM222, FS221
and FS222 are designed to enable distribution
of substations over long distances with a very
low signal delay. The power supply integrated
in the FASTBUS slave modules FS221/N and
FS222/N can supply the I/O modules of
a substation. The flexible connector concept
allows easy connection via a patch cable or
an industrial grade push-pull plug connection
via an adapter.
• FASTBUS master modules with
1 or 2 FO interfaces
• FASTBUS slave modules
with integrated power supply
• Up to 15 distributed substations
• Connection technology via robust Harting
PushPull® connector or LC patch cable
• Distances to 2000 m via multimode cable
• Minimal signal delay
• coldclimate models ( )
Item
FM221
FM221
FM222
FS221/N
FS221/N
FS222/N
Item no.
00016747-10
00018091-10
00016747-00
00016749-10
00018092-10
00016749-00
Screwable adapter for using PushPull connector
Item
Item no.
Adapter
00016682-00
135
System networking – FASTBUS
Fx220 series
FASTBUS interface
Line length
2000 m between the stations,
Total length max: 2300 m
Transmission medium
Multimode fiber (50/125 μm and 62.5/125 μm) max. 2000 m
FOC connector type LC
FOC guide wavelength 1310 nm
Number of stations
max. 16 (max. 10 per line)
Link budget
> 8 dB (3 dB Reserve)
Diagnostic possibilities
Fiber optic cable – received light
output
HW: three-color status LED
SW: 0 – 100 %
Integrated power supply
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Nominal power
17 W
Output current at +5 V
2A
Output current at +15 V
250 mA
Output current at -15 V
200 mA
Ambient conditions
Standard
coldclimate
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Models
FM221
FASTBUS master with FO interface
FM221
like FM221, coldclimate design ( )
FM222
FASTBUS master with 2 FO interfaces
FS221/N
FASTBUS slave with FO interface
and integr. power supply 17 W
FS221/N
like FS221/N, coldclimate design ( )
FS222/N
FASTBUS slave with 2 FO interfaces
and integrated power supply 17 W
Accessories*
Item
Order designation
Manufacturer
Description
LC connector
SXLC-DK0-56-0010
LEONI
LC connector duplex uniboot
multimode type2
for multimode fibers with 125 μm
outer diameter
Harting connectors
09 57 402 0500 020
HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex plastic Multi
Mode SFP
Harting connectors
09 57 409 0500 020
HARTING
HARTING PushPull LC duplex metal Multi
Mode SFP
*Information without guarantee, order directly from the manufacturer
136
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Proven millions of times over.
The Controller Area Network (CAN) in the
CANopen specification has now developed
to become the leading fieldbus system for
industrial automation. Proven millions of
times over and perfectly mature, it offers
the ideal basis for safe, easy, and yet
flexible networking tasks. By using only
one fieldbus, the compact CAN I / O
modules from Bachmann electronic
facilitate the homogeneous design of an
automation system with high efficiency
and packing density. Galvanic separation
from the main station, the scalable range,
and the extremely low-cost wiring make
the modules particularly attractive for
the users.
Possible topology: CANopen
137
M1 CONTROLLER WITH CAN MASTER
CAN SLAVE
MX2xx WITH INTEGRATED
CAN INTERFACE
CAN SLAVE WITH CS200 HEAD
CAN SLAVE
CAN SLAVE
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CAN master CM202
Features
Up to 4 CM202 modules
per M1 controller
2 independent CAN buses per
CANopen master module
Can be used either as NMT
master or NMT slave
Transfer rate:
10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s
CAN slave CS200 / x
Features
Head module for CANopen slave
stations
Up to 30 I / O modules per slave
station
Optional integrated power supply
Transfer rate:
10 kbit / s to 1 Mbit / s
138
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Analog/digital I/O module
DA3284-C
Features
Compact CAN slave I / O module
8 analog inputs:
±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100, Pt1000, 0 (4) .. 20 mA
4 analog outputs ±10 V,
either ±10 V, 0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
16 digital inputs
16 digital inputs or outputs (can be configured
individually), 2 integrated counter inputs
Digital I/O modules
DIOxxx-C
Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
16 / 32 / 48 input channels, of which 16 / 32 / 32 free
can be configured as output (DIO)
Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
Supply voltage: 18 .. 34 V DC
3-wire connection technology
139
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Digital I/O modules
TCO2xx-C
Features
Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
8 / 16 temperature sensor inputs
for temperature sensor types J and K
Measuring range: 0 .. 500 / 800 °C
12 / 24 digital each with max. 1 A
CANopen configurator
Features
Graphic configurator
Easy integration of the DCF files
Multiple networks
(up to 8 CAN networks per CPU)
CANSync for synchronization of drives*
CAN monitor for commissioning
and diagnostics
IP-based access to CAN nodes
with »IP over CAN« in accordance with
CiA Draft 301 / 405
* CANSync synchronization also via
the SYNC mechanism of the CPU
Note: There are processor modules
with integrated CAN interface
(see the processor modules section)
140
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CANopen master module CM202
The CAN master module CM202 can operate either
one or two separated networks. Both connections
can be configured independently as NMT master or
slave. In an M1 controller up to four CANopen
master modules CM202 can be operated.
• Up to 4 CANopen master modules
per M1 controller
• 2 independent CAN buses per
CANopen master module
• Can be used as NMT master or slave
• Transfer rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
• Bus length to 5000 m (signal repeater required)
• Galvanic isolation
• Short circuit proof
Item
CM202
CM202
141
Item no.
00009698-00
00016404-00
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CM202
CANopen master
Max. number of masters
4 per M1 controller
Number of CAN buses
2 per module
Max. number of nodes
64 per CAN bus
Protocol
CANopen to CiA DS 301
Device profile
in accordance with CiA DS 405
Firmware
reloadable (FLASH technology)
Current consumption
320 mA / 5 V DC
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Bus length
max. 5000 m
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level
in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Galvanic isolation,
interfaces to the system
500 V
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master
yes
CANopen slave
yes
Extended boot-up
no
Minimum boot-up
yes
COB ID distribution
per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution
yes (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs
128
No. of RxPDOs
128
PDO modes
sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping
yes
Emergency message
yes client (master), server (slave)
Life guarding
yes (heartbeat and / or node guarding)
No. of SDOs
4 server, 64 client
Device profile
301, 302, 405
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
CM202
CAN bus master; 2 lines, 1 Mbit/s, processor system, isolated
CM202
CAN bus master; 2 lines; 1 Mbit/s, processor system;
isolated; coldclimate model ( )
142
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CANopen slave modules
CS200 / x
The CANopen slave module CS200 / x is the
head module for CANopen slave stations. The
CANopen slave module CS200 / x allows modular
CANopen slave stations to be set up from the
M1 modules. The same modules that are used
for local stations can be used to design a slave
station, which simplifies stock-keeping and
consistently ensures the same technical data.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Head module for CANopen slave stations
Up to 30 I / O modules per slave station
Optional integrated power supply
Transfer rate 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud
Bus length to 5000 m (signal repeater required)
Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
Galvanic isolation between CAN
interfaces and control electronics
Node address can be set via rotary switch
2 serial interfaces (COM 1/2)
External 24 V power supply (CS200/N)
Item
CS200
CS200 / N
Item no.
00013178-00
00013179-00
CS200 / x
CANopen slave
143
Node ID
1 .. 254 selectable via rotary switch
Protocol
CANopen to CiA DS 301 V3.0
Device profile
in accordance with CiA DS 401 for I / O, in accordance with CiA DS 402
for ACR
Firmware
reloadable (FLASH technology)
Number of I / O modules
15 per station, 30 using bus extension modules BES / BEM or FASTBUS
Current consumption
600 mA / 5 V, 15 mA / + 15 V, 40 mA / - 15 V
Serial interfaces
COM1: RS232, COM2: RS232 / 422 / 485
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Continuation
CANopen slave modules CS200 / x
CS200 / x
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Bus length
max. 5000 m
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Signal level
in accordance with CiA DS 102 / 4
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Galvanic isolation,
Interfaces to the system
500 V
CANopen features in compliance with CiA Product Guide
CANopen master
N
CANopen slave
Y
Extended boot-up
N
Minimum boot-up
Y
COB ID distribution
per SDO, no DBT
Node ID distribution
N, (no LMT)
No. of TxPDOs / RxPDOs
128 / 128
PDO modes
sync, async, RTR, event
Variable PDO mapping
Y
Emergency message
Y
Life guarding
yes (heartbeat / node guarding)
No. of SDOs
4 servers
Device profile
301, 401, 402
Optional integrated power supply (optional) CS200 / N
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
max. 1.2 A at 24 V
Nominal power
17 W
Current consumption at + 5 V
2000 mA
Current consumption at + 15 V
250 mA
Current consumption at – 15 V
200 mA
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
CS200
CAN bus master 1 line 1 Mbit/s, processor system, isolated
CS200 / N
CAN bus slave 1 line 1 Mbit/s, processor system, isolated;
integrated power supply 17 W
144
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Digital input/output modules
DIOxxx-C
The digital I / O modules DIO16-C, DIO32-C, DIO48C or DIO264-C are stand-alone CAN slave modules
with 16, 32, 48 or 64 digital input / output channels.
• Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
• 16 / 32 channels can be freely
configured as input or output
• Digital outputs each with 1 A continuous current
• Two internally connected CAN interfaces for
loop-through of the cable
• Galvanic isolation between CAN interfaces
and control electronics
• Baud rate and node ID can be set via rotary switch
• Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Operating range 0 .. +60 °C without additional cooling
• Full wiring without additional backplanes
• Snappable on EN 50022 backplanes
Item
DIO16-C
DIO16-C
DIO32-C
DIO48-C
DIO264-C
145
Item no.
00010285-00
00017453-00
00010129-00
00010526-00
00009205-00
Fieldbuses – CANopen
DIO16-C
DIO16-C
DIO32-C
DIO48-C
DIO264-C
Quantity
max. 16
max. 32
max. 48
max. 64
Input delay
< 3.5 ms
< 3.5 ms
< 3.5 ms
< 3.5 ms
Internal resistance
6 kΩ
6 kΩ
6 kΩ
6 kΩ
Status display
green LED
green LED
green LED
green LED
max. 16
max. 32
max. 32
max. 32
DIOxxx-C
Inputs
Outputs
Quantity
Supply voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
18 .. 34 V DC
18 .. 34 V DC
18 .. 34 V DC
Isolated output blocks
1-16
1-16, 17-32
1-16, 17-32
1-16, 17-32
Nominal output current
1A
1A
1A
1A
Output current (sum / block)
max. 12 A
max. 12 A
max. 12 A
max. 12 A
Switching frequency
max. 500 Hz
max. 500 Hz
max. 500 Hz
max. 500 Hz
Short-circuit proof
yes
yes
yes
yes
Status display
green LED
green LED
green LED
green LED
Transfer rate (Kbaud)
10 .. 1000
10 .. 1000
10 .. 1000
10 .. 1000
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub
2x 9-pin D-Sub
2x 9-pin D-Sub
2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID
1 .. 254
1 .. 254
1 .. 254
1 .. 254
Galvanic isolation
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
Terminating resistance
123 Ω, external
123 Ω, external
123 Ω, external
123 Ω, external
CAN interface
External power supply
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
(without I / O)
normally 100 mA at 24 V DC
Reverse polarity protection
yes
CAN protocols
CAL / CANopen
DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
coldclimate ( )
Standard
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
DIO16-C
CAN slave – digital input/output module 16x DIO, 24 V / 1 A, 1 group,
isolated
DIO16-C
like DIO16-C, in coldclimate model ( )
DIO32-C
CAN slave – digital input/output module 32x DIO, 24 V / 1 A;
2 groups, isolated
DIO48-C
CAN slave – dig. input/output module; 16x DI, 32 DIO, 24 V / 1 A;
2 groups
DIO264-C
CAN slave – dig. input/output module; 32 DI, 32 DIO, 24 V / 1 A;
2 groups
146
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Analog and digital input/output
module DA3284-C
Noteworthy compactness and a clever mix of
possible signal types are offered by the CAN bus
compact module DA3284-C. As a stand-alone
fieldbus module (CANopen), the module offers
the complete I /O spectrum already integrated for
small applications or distributed signal connection
points. It is the ideal addition to the familiar
family of CAN digital modules and is an optimum
»all-in-one« peripheral for small applications,
e. g. such as those based on the control terminals
CT300 / CT200 from Bachmann electronic.
The channel-specific programmable mode (on / off
or applied standard signal) enables the unit to be
adapted ideally to a wide range of applications
without any interface converter. The robust design
and processing quality, its outstanding technical
specifications, seldom available from the usual
fieldbus peripherals, are very impressive.
• Compact CAN slave I /O module
• 8 analog inputs ±10 V, ±1 V, Pt100,
Pt1000, 0 (4) .. 20 mA
• 4 analog outputs ±10 V or
0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
• 16 digital inputs
• 16 digital inputs or outputs
(individually configurable)
• 2 integrated counter inputs
• Digital outputs each with 0.5 A
continuous current
• Error detection for digital and analog channels
• Full wiring without additional backplanes
• Powerful 32-bit processor for fast cycle times
Item
DA3284-C
DA3284-C
147
Item no.
00013597-00
00017450-00
Fieldbuses – CANopen
DA3284-C
Analog inputs
Quantity
8
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel
±10 V, ±1V
Pt100, Pt1000: -100 °C .. +500 °C
0 (4) .. 20 mA
Resolution
14 bit
Sampling rate
< 1 ms for all channels (500 μs)
Input cutoff frequency
750 Hz (3 dB)
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
voltage 0.05 %
current / Pt100 / Pt1000 0.1 %
Error at the entire temperature
range
voltage 0.2 %
current/Pt100/Pt1000 0.2 %
Error detection
cable break (at voltage), current or temperature error
Analog outputs
Quantity
4
Measuring ranges, selectable by channel
±10 V, 0 (4) .. 20 mA configurable
Resolution
14 bit
Conversion time
depends on CAN protocol
Basic accuracy at 25 °C
voltage 0.05 %
current 0.2 %
Error at the entire temperature range
voltage 0.1 %
current 0.4 %
Error detection
Load error
Digital inputs
Quantity
16 (max. 32)
Input delay
500 μs default value, filter adjustable
Input current
normally 3 mA at +24 V DC
Input type
current consumption, type 1 in accordance with IEC61131
Status display
green LED
Connection technology
3-wire (+ / - / signal)
Counter
Counting channels
2 (digital input channels 1 and 2)
Counter frequency
max. 5 kHz
Counter functions
counting, speed measurement (period duration, gate time)
measurement)
Counting modes
- infinite up / down
- one-time up / down to / from reference value
- periodic up / down to / from reference value
Digital outputs
Quantity
16
Supply voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Isolated output blocks
1 .. 12, 13 .. 24
Nominal output voltage
0.5 A
Output current sum / block
max. 8 A / 4 A per block
Switching frequency
500 Hz (with purely resistive load)
Short-circuit proof
yes
148
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Continuation
Analog and digital input/output module DA3284-C
DA3284-C
Digital outputs
Error detection
short circuit / excess temperature by block
power supply per block ≤ 16.5 V
Status display
green LED
Connection technology
3-wire (+ / - / signal)
CAN interface
CANopen
DS 301 communication profile, DS 401 device profile
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Transfer rate (Kbaud)
10 .. 1000 (adjustable via rotary switch)
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub
Module ID
1 .. 127 (configurable via rotary switch or SW)
Galvanic isolation
500
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Input / output connection technology
Connection for digital inputs / outputs
and supply
Phoenix Contact MINICOMBICON connector RM 5.8 with flange
Connection technology for digital
inputs / outputs and supply
screw clamp, spring tension clamp, crimp
Connection for analog inputs / outputs
Phoenix Contact MINI COMBICON RM 3.5 connector with flange
Connection technology for analog
inputs / outputs
screw clamp, spring tension clamp
Connection general
plug codable, labeling by channels
Operating conditions
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
≤ 270 mA at +24 VDC for module supply + load
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Galvanic isolation CAN bus module
500 VRMS
Galvanic isolation I / O channels
none
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
149
DA3284-C
CAN Slave – universal input / output module, 16xDI; 16xDIO;
24V/0,5A; 4xAO; ±10V 20 mA; 8xAI; ±10V ±1V 20 mA
Pt100/1000
DA3284-C
like DA3284-C, in coldclimate design ( )
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Temperature I/ O modules
TCO2xx-C
The temperature I / O modules, TCO204-C,
TCO208-C and TCO216-C are stand-alone
CAN slave modules with 8 or 16 thermocouple inputs and 12 or 24 digital outputs.
• Stand-alone, compact CAN slave module
• Thermocouple inputs for thermocouple
types J and K
• Measuring range 0 ..
+500 °C / +800 °C configurable
• Sensor break detection
• Digital outputs each with 1 A
• Supply voltage 18 .. 34 V DC
• Operating range 0 .. +60 °C
• Snappable on
EN 50022 backplanes
• CAN node ID can be set (hex switch)
• Baud rate is adjustable (hex switch)
Item
TCO208-C
TCO216-C
Item no.
00010850-00
00008673-00
TCO2xx-C
Temperature sensor inputs
Quantity
8 / 16
Sensor types
J or K, selectable per input
Measuring range
0 .. +500 °C / +800 °C configurable
Resolution
12 bit
Linearization
Polynomial in accordance with DIN IEC 584
Cold junction compensation
0 .. +133 °C (K)
Sampling period
16 ms
Sensor break detection
yes
Digital outputs
Quantity
12 / 24
Supply voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel
0.5 A (max. 1 A)
Output current (sum)
max. 12 A
Switching frequency
max. 500 Hz at 1 kOhm ohmic load
Short-circuit proof
yes
Status display
green LEDs
150
Fieldbuses – CANopen
Continuation
Digital I/O modules TCO2xx-C
TCO2xx-C
CAN interface
Transfer rate
10 k .. 1 Mbaud
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Module ID
1 .. 254
Galvanic isolation via interfaces
500 V
Terminating resistance
123 ohm, external
Status LEDs
RUN (guarding), INIT, ERROR
Communication profile
CiA DS 301
Device profile
CiA DS 401
External power supply
Supply voltage
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption (without I / O)
normally 105 / 110 / 120 mA at 24 V DC
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
151
TCO208-C
CAN bus module 8 temperature In, 12 digital Out 24 V, NT,
casing, isolated
TCO216-C
CAN slave – temp. input / dig. output module; 16x temperature TE
type J,K; 24x DO, 24 V / 0.5 A; isolated
Fieldbuses – CANopen
CANopen configurator
The Bachmann SolutionCenter supports the
commissioning and diagnostics of CAN and
CANopen networks with integrated tools. With
a few mouse clicks a network can be configured
from standard EDS files and transferred to the
controller. Thanks to the easy interface to the
application and to the commissioning tools a
signal test can be executed immediately.
• Managing EDS files in the device catalog
• Online and offline configuration of networks
• Bus scan of online networks for convenient
creation of a configuration
• Graphic network presentation
• Graphic presentation of the PDO mapping
• Tabular editor for network parameters
• Editors for specific device parameters
• Tabular editor for the object directory
enables adding, changing, and
deleting of network variables
• Fast workflow for the creation of
standard configurations
The CAN monitor in the SolutionCenter enables
more extensive diagnostics. It offers dialogs for:
• Direct SDO access
• NMT and LSS commands
• PDO triggering
• Access to emergency lists
152
Fieldbuses – DeviceNet
Proven basis, new view.
DeviceNet is based on the same physical
layer as CAN, however it has an objectoriented view of the process data and uses
monitored point-to-point connections.
The bus system is standardized through
the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association).
The DeviceNet master module and its
software equipment enable operation of
the M1 controller as DeviceNet master
and DeviceNet slave, as well as simultaneous
operation in two networks in combined
master/slave mode.
The cyclic data is available to the application
program via the process image. Acyclic
accesses and status commands are possible
via libraries for M-PLC and C/C++. The
configuration is executed via the Bachmann
SolutionCenter.
DeviceNet master DNM201
The DNM201 fieldbus master module allows
the M1 controller to be used as bus master in
DeviceNet networks. The DNM201 module is used
to connect drives and input / output interfaces. The
system bus of an M1 supports up to 8 separate
networks, each with a maximum of 64 nodes that
can be operated with different cycle times. Thus
the bus architecture allows up to 512 DeviceNet
stations (nodes) to be controlled individually.
Item
DNM201
153
Item no.
00012696-00
• 1 DeviceNet module for up to 64 nodes
• 8 separate networks with max. 512 nodes
(requires 8 DNM201 modules in one M1 system)
• Support of »Multi-Master« mode
• 5-pin connector (in acc. with open
DeviceNet standard)
• Isolation voltage from DNM201 to case 100 V
• Isolation voltage from DeviceNet bus to
system voltages of the controller 500 V
• Baud rates 125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
• Extensive status LEDs
• Modes: Master (multi-master capable),
slave, master / slave
• Module and network status LEDs (MS / NS)
• Error detection: Duplicate MAC-ID check,
device heartbeat, device shutdown message
• Automatic resumption of communication after failure
Fieldbuses – DeviceNet
DNM201
Technical data
Maximum number of stations
64 nodes
Number of independent DeviceNet lines
up to 8 DNM201 modules per M1 system (equals 512 nodes)
Bus connection
5-pin DeviceNet connector
Galvanic isolation via interfaces
500 V
Baud rates
125 / 250 / 500 kbit / s
DPRAM size
4 or 8 kByte
Protocol conformity
ODVA specification release 2.0
Access libraries
for C or IEC 61131
Modes
master (multi-master ability – multiple masters on the same
CAN bus possible), slave, master / slave
Supported communication services
I / O communication bit-strobe, polling, change of state, cyclic
to 448 byte connection size, support of »Group2Server« as
slaves, no multicast polling, explicit message, fragmentation
protocol, UCMM, message forwarding
LEDs
RDY
yellow off: Controller cannot initialize the DNM module
yellow on: Controller has successfully initialized the module
MS RUN (MS=Module State)
green on: DNM ready
green flashing: DNM is being configured
MS ERR (MS=Module State)
red on: DNM not ready
NS RUN (NS=Net State)
green on: DNM online and connected
green flashing: DNM online, but not connected / not completely configured
NS ERR (NS=Net State)
red on: no network connection possible
green flashing: Connection in timeout
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model
DNM201
DeviceNet master; 1 line; 500 kBit/s; processor system;
isolated
154
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
The fast communication path.
The EtherCAT bus system is outstandingly
suited for activation of servo-electric
drives. As a pure software solution,
the EtherCAT master from Bachmann
electronic uses the available Ethernet
ports on the controller CPU.
Possible topology: EtherCAT
SOLUTIONCENTER
M1-CPU
155
FM
The configurator for EtherCAT networks
is integrated in the SolutionCenter and
generates an operable configuration on the
controller based on the XML description files
of the various slave manufacturers.
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
ECS200 EtherCAT Slave Module
The EtherCAT-Slave-Module ECS200 allows you to
connect M1 controllers as slave devices to a higher
level EtherCAT network. The goal is to use the M1
as an autonomous intelligent controller within an
individual component of a system or machine.
The application programs (PLC, C/C++) have
total access to the incoming and outgoing cyclic
process data via the MIO and SVI interfaces and
process image. You can even query the slave
status of the station set by the EtherCAT master.
The application programs at the slave station synchronize themselves with the external EtherCAT bus
for closed-loop control operations and, even when
there are network interruptions, they automatically
resume operations in the same interval. You can
view the status of the connection to the master as
a variable, which allows you to respond as desired
to network interruptions in the application program.
You can define the number, size and direction of
the cyclic process
data that the ECS200 transmits to the EtherCAT bus by configuring these in the SolutionCenter. You can then use a corresponding ESI
file to design the EtherCAT master system.
As EtherCAT slave, the M1 is a "complex device" with object directory that does not need
to be further configured by the master.
Extra LEDs displaying slave status and faults at
both EtherCAT ports make local diagnosis easier.
• 2 EtherCAT connections for easy loopthrough of the EtherCAT network
• Data exchange memory 8 kB
• Data rate, maximum 50 bytes in 125 μs
• LED displays for status of the EtherCAT network
• EtherCAT analysis and diagnostics data can be evaluated
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Condensation-proof coldclimate design on request
Item
ECS200
ECS200
Item no.
00018548-00
00019206-00
156
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
ECS200
Ports
Inputs/outputs
2 EtherCAT connections 100 Mbit/s (100baseTx)
Data register + RAM
12 kB + 128 bytes
EtherCAT controller
ET1100 ASIC
Compatibility
from M-BASE V. 3.80R
Supported processor modules
At least MX207 or better
Internal power supply
Supply internal
via backplane BS2xx
Current consumption internal
270 mA
Galvanic isolation from the
system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
coldclimate ( )
Standard
-30 .. +60°C
5 .. 95% without condensation
5 .. 95% with condensation
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95% without condensation
5 .. 95% with condensation
Design variants
157
ECS200
EtherCAT Slave Module, 2 x EtherCAT connections (100 Mbit/s)
ECS200
like ECS200 in coldclimate design ( )
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
EtherCAT master
The EtherCAT master is a pure software solution
and uses an Ethernet port of the controller CPU.
The motion software packages from Bachmann
electronic and any other application programs
can be synchronized precisely to the timing of
the EtherCAT bus, to ensure the synchronization
of setpoint calculation and transmission. The
SolutionCenter supports commissioning and
diagnostics through a configurator and monitor.
The Drive Middleware as the connecting
link between motion software and fieldbus
directly operates the functions and the
status model of the drive, so that the user
no longer needs to program out the specific
sequences in the application software.
• Software solution for operation on standard
controller CPUs
• Supports slaves with distributed clock
• Configuration of dynamic slaves
• Synchronization of application
programs and fieldbus is possible
• Bus scan for easy configuration creation
• Cyclic data exchange via PDO mapping
• Presentation of the process values as logical
I/O modules
• Acyclic data exchange for application
via SDO function interface is available
• Extensive diagnostics via system variables
• Includes RAS server for access to bus data
through external tools
• Quality is ensured through regular participation
in Plug-Fests of the ETG
158
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
EtherCAT configurator
The Device Manager includes its own EtherCAT
configurator that creates a complete network
configuration (ENI – EtherCAT Network
Information) from the standardized slave
description files (ESI – EtherCAT Slave
Information). For access to the process data,
in addition, logical I/O modules are generated
on the master that enable an immediate
diagnosis and signal test in the Device Manager.
A configuration project will be automatically
stored on the controller, so that even without
manual transmission of project files, opening,
testing, and changing the existing configuration
is possible in the service PC.
• Managing the slaves in the catalog
• Online and offline creation of
network configurations
• Bus scan of the online controller for fast
creation of a configuration
• Object browser for convenient PDO
configuration
• Automatic generation of logical I/O modules
for access to cyclic process data
• Immediate wiring test without user
software is possible
• Monitor for SDO read and write access
for the running network
• Browser for object directory of the slave
(if supported by the slave)
159
Fieldbuses – EtherCAT
160
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
Widely used, esteemed everywhere.
PROFIBUS is a field bus that is widely
used, particularly in the area of
mechanical engineering and plant
engineering and even today – in spite
of all Ethernet-based fieldbuses – it
continues to show increasing quantities.
A broad palette of peripheral components
and an active user organization will also
ensure long-term availability of
PROFIBUS components in the future.
Bachmann electronic offers a fieldbus
interface module for the backplane that
can be used both as master,
as well as slave. The SolutionCenter
contains a complete configurator that
enables interfaces to the engineering
tools of other manufacturers through
the consistent application of standards.
PROFIBUS DP master DPM200
Features
Fast ASIC technology
Transfer rate:
9.6 kbit / s .. 12 Mbit / s
Up to 3 masters per M1 controller
Maximum 125 slave stations (with repeater)
Features
Multiple networks (multiple networks per CPU)
Convenient integration of the GSD files
PROFIBUS DP class 1 master
Support of all baud rates (9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud)
defined in the standard
Transparent access to IO and process variables
161
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS DP master module
DPM200
The interface module for Profibus DP (Distributed
Peripherals) can be operated as DP master, DP slave
or as combined master/slave, which in a multi-master
network offers variables for another master. The
process data is available to the application program
as logical I/O module and thus can be reached via
the process image or via the function interface.
•
•
•
•
Up to 3 DPM200 modules per M1 controller
Transfer rate 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud
8 kByte shared memory for process data image
Consistency lock for data blocks
is configurable
• Two internal bridged connections for
loop-through of the cable
• Galvanic isolation between fieldbus
and controller
Item
DPM200
DPM200
Item no.
00010555-00
00018032-00
162
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
DPM200
PROFIBUS DP master
Large process image
8 Kb x 16 DPM
Firmware
update via SolutionCenter is possible
Max. number of masters
3 per M1 controller
Max. number of slaves
32 without repeater, 125 with repeater
PROFIBUS Standard
V0
Data length in the DPM
732 bytes per slave
Current consumption
400 mA / 5 V DC
Interface
Transfer rate
9.6 k .. 12 Mbaud
Connection
2x 9-pin D-Sub female connectors
Pin assignment
in accordance with EN 50170
Signal level
in accordance with RS485 standard
Galvanic isolation,
Interfaces to the system
500 V
Ambient conditions
Standard
coldclimate
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C
-30 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
163
DPM200
Profibus fieldbus module master/slave; 12 Mbaud; Profibus V0;
isolated
DPM200
like DPM200, in coldclimate design ( )
Fieldbuses – PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS configurator
The Device Manager contains a complete
configuration tool for creation of PROFIBUS
configurations for master and slave applications
of the M1 system. Devices from any manufacturer
can be added to the catalog via their standardized
device description file in GSD format, and
integrated in the configuration.
The PROFIBUS configurator enables creation of
networks with an M1 controller as master station
and multiple slave stations. Likewise, M1 DP slave
stations can either be configured together with
an M1 master, or a pure slave configuration can
be created for an M1.
In this regard the slaves can be additional M1
controllers or also standard-conformant slave devices
from other manufacturers. For an M1 controller
a pure slave configuration can also be created.
For this station a GSD file can be exported that
facilitates integration in a different configuration tool.
On the master and slave station the configurator
automatically generates logical I/O modules for
access to the process data that permit an immediate
diagnosis and signal test via the Device Manager
and enable easy integration into the process image.
Bit-coded values can in this manner be conveniently
split into the individual DI or DO signals and given
symbolic channel names, without the necessity of
masking out the bits in the application program.
• Graphic network configuration
• Catalog for managing device descriptions
files in GSD format
• Generates complete network configurations for
applications with M1 as master
• Generates reduced configuration for applications
with M1 as slave, if a master from a different
manufacturer is used
• Exports GSD files for configured M1 slaves
for use in other tools
• Flexible creation of access channels that organize
the byte stream of the PROFIBUS in handy process
values
164
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
More flexibility, a more efficient network.
The Ethernet-based fieldbus system,
PROFINET IO RT, is the technical successor
of PROFIBUS DP. The advantages of
Ethernet as medium are the significantly
more flexible network technology – as the
wide-area networking of stations
is executed in this case via popular
Features
Mode controller (master) and device (slave)
Transmission of I/O channel values of the device
to and from the controller
Transmission of process values (SVI) of the device
to and from the controller via data blocks
Configuration data for I/O channels on the device
(measuring range, signal direction, etc.) are stored
on the master and transmitted when the system
boots
Standardized GSDML file available for configuration
in other project planning tools
Minimum bus cycle 1 ms
Data rate 10/100 Mbit
Other data traffic on the same network is possible
165
Ethernet switches – as well as the concurrent
usability of the infrastructure for other data
traffic without real time request. Thanks to
the prioritized transmission of PROFINET,
other protocols, such as FTP, HTML,
visualization, etc. can be operated on the
same physical network.
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
PROFINET IO (RT)
At Bachmann electronic PROFINET RT is a
pure software solution that can be started on
the available Ethernet ports of the controller.
The control system can be operated as
PROFINET controller (master) and as PROFINET
device (slave). For the PROFINET device the
channel values of the I/O modules can be
made available to the PROFINET controller
to form pure I/O slave stations. In this
process each module on the device can be
assigned to a different PROFINET controller.
In addition, on the PROFINET device program
variables from the application software can
also be transferred to and from the PROFINET
controller. Thus not only I/O slaves, but
intelligent stations as well can be created with
local application software. These evaluate their
local I/O signals and synchronize themselves
only with a higher-level sequence program.
• Transmission of the channel values for
I/O networking
• Transmission of process variables (SVI)
for coupling between CPUs
(intelligent device)
• Modules of the same devices can
be assigned to different controllers
• Handling of transmission errors,
different switch-on sequences,
and network interruptions
• Extensive diagnostics
• Parallel operation with other Ethernet
traffic in the same network
• Cycle times >= 1 ms
• Adjustable (»reduction ratio«) for
individual process values that should
be transmitted less frequently,
e.g. for analog inputs
166
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
PROFINET configurator
The graphic configurator for PROFINET
networks is part of the Device Manager in the
SolutionCenter. It allows presentation of the
complete topology of a network, including all
components, such as switches and connecting
cable. The devices are managed via the
standardized GSDML files in the PROFINET
catalog. The individual slots of the devices
are populated with the module that can be
used according to the GSDML file. On the
controller the process values are presented
in the form of logical I/O modules that
enable convenient access to the process data
through the diagnostics tools and through
the application program. As an extension of
the PROFINET principles, not only I/O signals
but also process values from the application
programs of intelligent M1 devices can be
exchanged with the PROFINET controller.
Network parameters, such as timeout
limits, optional stations, the assignment of
process values to communication relations,
and additional detail setting can also be
made in parameter tables as needed.
The configuration is transmitted automatically
to the participating M1 controllers when saving.
The configuration project is also compressed
for storage on the controller, so that it can
be reopened, checked, and changed on a
case-by-case basis on a different PC without
manual transmission of project files.
• Complete network configurations
for the controller
• Partial configurations for M1 slaves in
different networks
• Device catalog for managing
GSDML description files
• Free graphic placement of the
devices in the layout presentation
• Assignment of the modules to the slots
on the device
• Convenient processing of network
and device parameters in tables
• Generation of logical I/O modules
on the controller
• Direct opening of the existing
configuration from the controller
167
Fieldbuses – PROFINET
168
Fieldbus - M-Bus
Standardized basis, integrated solution.
Energy meters (gas, heat, output,
water,..) are required in power plants, and
in combined heat and power generation
in particular, for regulation, as well as
accounting. The M-Bus standardized in EN
61334-4-1 is highly prevalent in Europe
for the connection of these meters. The
OSI model, if M-Bus is the physical layer,
the data link according to IEC 870 and the
application layer according to EN 1434-3
are specified for this protocol.
An integrated solution is provided by a
rugged and easily installable M-Bus adapter
and its convenient integration as a fieldbus in
software communication.
MBUS201 master
The MBUS201 master enables easy connection of
a serial RS232 interface on M-Bus via an adapter.
The M-Bus is a widely used fieldbus in accordance
with EN 13757 for reading out consumption
data from meters (electricity, water, gas,
heat). Transmission is serial via voltage and
current modulation on a two-wire line that
is protected against polarity reversal.
The M-Bus protocol is integrated as an intuitively
configurable fieldbus, and is addressed via the
UFB (Unified FieldBus ) software interface.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
max. 4 MBUS201 masters per M1 controller
M-Bus protocol implemented as fieldbus
max. 5 meters (slaves) per master
Adapter can be inserted directly
on the DSUB connector
Integrated M-Bus power supply
Interfaces M-Bus and RS232 are galvanic isolated
LED display for collision detection
and power supply
Data transmission at 300 to 9600 bps
Item
MBUS201
169
Item no.
00019766-00
Fieldbus - M-Bus
MBUS201
Interfaces
M-Bus
In accordance with DIN EN 13757-2
Connection
Spring-force terminal in housing, shield support
Number of nodes
max. 5 counters (slaves) per master
Data rate
300 to 9600 bps
RS232
In accordance with EIA-232, D-Sub 9-pin, socket, no hardware handshake
Power supply
24 V ( 20 .. 30 V DC)
Current consumption
max. 0.25 A
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Status displays
Power supply
LED green
Collision detection- M-Bus
LED yellow
Housing
Dimensions (W x H x D)
32 x 60 x 15 mm
Nickel-plated zinc die-cast
Mounting
Hex socket (size 2.5) with ball head
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60°C
Rel. humidity, operation
5 .. 95% without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. Humidity, storage
5 .. 95% without condensation
Models
MBUS201
M-Bus adapter
170
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Simply proven, proven simple.
Modbus is a very simple, but proven
fieldbus system. In principle it only knows
the two data types, bool and integer, and
a set of queries that are always posed by
the master and answered by the slaves.
Modbus RTU was originally developed for
serial interfaces, later the principles were
then extended to Ethernet with Modbus
TCP and Modbus UPD.
Modbus master / Modbus slave
Features
Modbus master and slave available
Supported protocols: Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP and
Modbus RTU
Multiple protocols can be used simultaneously
Uses existing interfaces of the controller, special
hardware is not required
Interfaces can be spatially distributed on FASTBUS
or BES substations.
Configuration via Device Manager
171
Thanks to its simplicity and its inter
operability, Modbus is widely used in older,
as well as in new applications.
Bachmann electronic offers Modbus master
and slave as a pure software solution. Special
hardware is not required. Both the Ethernet
ports and COM ports of all controller CPUs,
as well as the ports of the corresponding bus
modules EM203 and RS204 can be used.
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Modbus master
With the Bachmann M1 Modbus master read/write
access to the data from any external standardconformant Modbus slave device is possible.
The registers, coils and discrete inputs of the
external device are mapped to logical hardware
modules of the control system per hardware
modules. The cyclic update is executed automatically, the values remain available in the process
image. Queries to the slaves are summarized
automatically in this process to reduce the load.
In addition, the Modbus master offers a function interface via which any Modbus requests
can be sent to the slaves. The error messages
of the Modbus system (Modbus exceptions) are
passed through to the application software.
All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP, as
well as all serial interfaces for Modbus TCP, are
available. These can also be distributed spatially to substations of the control system.
• Supported protocols:
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP and Modbus RTU
• Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
• Possibility of spatial distribution of the
interfaces via FAST substations and EM203
or RS204 module
• Mapping of the contents of the »Modbus Primary
Tables« to virtual channel values
• Multiple networks parallel
(also for different modes)
• Gateway functionality
(also to other bus systems)
• Investment protection thanks to extremely
wide distribution
• Compatibility and openness
• Easy handling
172
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
network,
connection
Modbus
Slave
UFB module 1
Modbus
Channel 1
master
Channel 2
Channel 3
Configuration
Channel 4
Request
»Output
Registers«<
Channel 5
1
»Input
Registers«>
2
Channel 6
1
2
Channel 7
»Coils« <
3
1
»Input Discrete«>
3 4
2
...
1
4
3
n
2
...
4
3
n
...
4
n
...
Cyclic
Functions
(Polling
engine)
Response
Channel 8
UFB module n
Modbus
protocol
engine
n
Channel 1
Data
Mapping
Interface &
transformation
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Modbus TCP master
RS232
Modbus
Network 2
Station 1
Modbus slave
Ethernet
Station 1
Modbus slave
173
Station 2
Modbus slave
Modbus
Network 3
Station 1
Modbus slave
10 / 100 Mbit / s
Station 3
Modbus slave
Station ...
Modbus slave
Station n
Modbus slave
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Technical data – Modbus master
Protocol
Protocols
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP
Protocol version
Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1a
Supported function codes
1, 2, 3, 4, 15, 16 (are used automatically purely through
configuration). Via a function interface any function codes
can be called directly from the application program.
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU
RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU
serial interfaces to M1-CPUs, CT300 series, CT200 series
Distributability – Modbus RTU
yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with RS204 module)*
Physical layer – Modbus TCP
Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP
ETH0 and ETH1 to M1-CPUs, CT200 series
Distributability – Modbus TCP
yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with EM203 module)*
Performance data
Multiple Modbus networks
simultaneously
yes (up to 8 networks per CPU)
Nominal transfer rates
serial (RTU)
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits / s (gross)
Nominal transfer rates
Ethernet (TCP)
10 / 100 Mbit / s (gross)
Parallel traffic to Modbus TCP
yes (normal IP traffic via the same interface)
Word order
configurable
Optimization
automatic summary of requests
Diagnostics and safety
Log book support
yes (with adjustable debug level)
Online diagnostics
yes
Implementation
Form of delivery
IO driver (modbus.m)
Interface to the application
virtual modules in accordance with the »Unified Fieldbus Model«
for access via MIO or process image
Configuration data format
mconfig.ini (ASCII)
System prerequisites
Supported devices
all controller CPUs
* Substation operation via RS204 at reduced data rate / overall performance depends on overall application
174
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Modbus slave
The Modbus slave can be installed as a software
module on every controller CPU. Controlled
through a mapping table, it reads variables
of the system and makes them available on
Modbus registers, where they can be read by
every standard-conformant Modbus master.
Write accesses of the master are appropriately
forwarded by the Modbus slave to the mapped
variables. In this manner process variables of
the user software, direct I/O signals, as well as
system variables, such as time of the controller,
can be transparently presented for the external
Modbus master.
All Ethernet ports for Modbus TCP and UDP, as
well as all serial interfaces for Modbus TCP, are
available. These can also be distributed spatially
to substations of the control system.
• Supported protocols: Modbus TCP/UDP/RTU
• Use of the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
• Possibility of spatial distribution of the interfaces
via FASTBUS substations and EM203 or
RS204 module
• Mapping of any SVI variables in the
Modbus Primary Tables
• Mapping of any I / O channels in the
Modbus Primary Tables
• Easy data access through applications
(bidirectional)
SVI interface
network,
connection
Symbolic_Var_1
Task 1
Symbolic_Var_2
config.
Symbolic_Var_n
Request
SVI interface
Symbolic_Var_A
Task 2
Symbolic_Var_B
Symbolic_Var_Z
SVI interface
Symbolic_Var_I
Task n
Symbolic_Var_II
Symbolic_Var_X
SVI interface
I/O
system
Symbolic_Var_1
Symbolic_Var_2
Symbolic_Var_n
175
»Output Registers«<
Data
Mapping
Interface
&
Transformation
1
»Input Registers«>
2
1
»Coils« <
3
2
1
»Input Discrete«>4
3
2
...
1
4
3
n
2
...
4
3
n
...
4
n
...
n
Virtual Modbus data tables
Modbus
Control
engine
Response
Modbus
master
Fieldbuses – MODBUS TCP/UDP/RTU
Technical data – Modbus slave
Protocol
Protocols
Modbus RTU, Modbus UDP, Modbus TCP
Protocol version
Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1a
Data direction
bidirectional
Supported function codes
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16
Interfaces
Physical layer – Modbus RTU
RS232, RS422, RS485
Interfaces – Modbus RTU
serial interfaces on controller CPUs
Distributability – Modbus RTU
yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with RS204 module)*
Physical layer – Modbus UDP
Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit in accordance with IEEE 802.b
Interfaces – Modbus TCP
all Ethernet interfaces of the controller CPUs
Distributability – Modbus TCP
yes (FASTBUS or BEM / BES substation with EM203 module)*
TCP / IP Port
adjustable, preset: 502
Performance data
Multiple slave instances
simultaneously
yes up to 4 instances per CPU for concurrent operation
in multiple Modbus networks.
Nominal transfer rates
serial (RTU)
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 bits / s (gross)
Nominal transfer rates
Ethernet (TCP)
10 / 100 Mbit / s (gross)
Multiple master connections
simultaneously
yes, for Modbus TCP configurable, number of simultaneous
master connections (default 10). For UDP no limitation.
Parallel traffic to Modbus TCP
yes (normal IP traffic via the same interface)
Diagnostics and safety
Log book support
yes (with adjustable debug level)
Online diagnostics
yes
Online connection statistics
yes
Access limitation
yes (configurable list of allowed IP addresses)
Implementation
Form of delivery
Software module (modus.m)
Connection to process data
SVI variables, flags and I/O signals
Configuration data format
mconfig.ini (ASCII)
System prerequisites
Supported devices
all controller CPUs
* Substation operation via RS204 at reduced data rate / overall performance depends on overall application
176
Fieldbuses – SERCOS
Specialized for rigorous requirements.
SERCOS (SErial Realtime COmmunication
System) is a dedicated bus system for
activation of high-quality electric drives
and servo amplifiers. Communication
is configured on the controller and
distributed to the drives when the system
boots. The process data of the drive is
available in standardized form and makes
not only the numeric values available
via appropriate services, but it also makes
meta information, such as symbolic names,
input limits and units, available. Via service
channel accesses, in addition to the cyclic
process data, acyclic parameters at runtime
from the application program can also be
changed or transferred from a list of initial
parameters at system start.
Possible topology: SERCOS
ENGINEERING PC
ETHERNET
SERCOS DRIVE
NT250
MPC240
DI216
DO216
AIO288
SEM201
SERCOS DRIVE
177
Fieldbuses – SERCOS
SERCOS master module SEM201
The SERCOS (Serial Real-time Communication
System) master module SEM201 is capable of
controlling up to 32 drives. The bus has a ring
structure and offers a high level of interference
immunity thanks to the fibre optic technology.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SERCOS 2 Standard IEC 61491
Fiber optic technology
Bus with ring structure
2 Kb x 32 DPRAM
Transfer rates: 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
Cycle times: 62.5 μs .. 65 ms
Multiple masters can be synchronized
Item
SEM201
Item no.
00011756-00
SEM201
Description
Channels / drives
fiber optic ring with max. 32 drives, 2 kB x 32 DPRAM
Modules per controller
max. 12
Transfer rate
2 / 4 / 8 / 16 Mbaud
Cycle times
62.5 μs .. 65 ms
Synchronization
multiple masters can be synchronized
Certified by
SI – Sercos International (formerly IGS)
Galvanic isolation from system
yes, via fiber optic cable
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Model variants
SEM201
Sercos master; 2/4/8/16 Mbaud; SERCOS FO interface
178
bluecom
The real-time communication solution for large projects
Renewable energy sources like solar and wind
power stations exist in ranges and dimensions
that vary considerably. Beginning with separate
installations at a distance of a few hundred meters
up to hundreds of participants spread across
several square kilometers, the installations have
to maintain contact among themselves and with
a monitoring and control center. Operators are
placing ever higher demands on the controllability
of such virtual power stations. In order to be
able to react positively to errors like LVRT and
FRT, there has to be a swift and reliable real-
time connection to every separate power station.
Diagnostic and remote maintenance tasks, e.g stateof-the-art condition monitoring analyses, should be
possible parallel to time-sensitive communications.
bluecom provides reliable real-time communication
technology for the highest performance requirements,
specifically optimized for renewable energy systems'
rapid exchange of information. Top reliability,
easy maintenance and diagnosability, as well as
adaptability to existing networks, have been achieved.
As a software-only solution absent with special
bluecom - energy park/virtual power station networking model
Park control center /
control station
M1 controller
Monitoring and maintenance from any
connection point possible with standard
PC
179
bluecom
requirements for CPU and network hardware,
applications in user-defined topologies
can be put into effect, having up to 500
participants and saves resources.
Library functions for cyclic and acyclic
communication in IEC 61131-3, C and C++
make for the greatest easy development.
The configuration, monitoring and diagnostic
analysis are executed via the SolutionCenter.
Thanks to its compatibility with Ethernet standard
IEEE 802.3, bluecom provides a sustainable
solution for the networking tasks of modern
power stations. bluecom at once predefines the
optimization of performance with lower CPU and
network load for master-master communication
at the machine and plant level too.
bluecom
Features
Networking of more than 500 subscribers in a free
network topology with bidirectional transmission of at
least 250 bytes in a real-time cycle of 20 ms.
Continuous additions of stations and entire network
segments during real-time operation
Optimization of speed and bandwidth utilization ensure high data throughput with low CPU and network
load
Monitoring and analysis of the state of the network
and the fastest location of errors possible with no
extra effort via integrated diagnostic and monitoring
interfaces
Standards-compliant implementation is the basis for
the influence-free coexistence of real-time communication parallel to other Ethernet-based protocols and
services
180
bluecom
bluecom
bluecom defines an open real-time transmission
protocol optimized for the requirements of diverse
Ethernet based network structures that have grown
over time. Structures such as these can be found
in the networking of alternative energy plants, for
instance, the so-called virtual power stations.
bluecom connects hundreds of network devices
deterministically and is not assigned to specific
network hardware or proprietary extensions of
Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3. The user is free
to choose the topology, the transmission medium
and the transmission rate. As a result, bluecom
render the most cost-efficient real-time networking
of new and pre-existing systems possible.
• Real-time networking of more than 500 substations with cycle time of less than 20 ms at
250 bytes of bidirectional data transmission
• Compatible with every MX, MPC, MH
and MC series processor module
• Ethernet-based real-time protocol without
specific requirements for networking
topology and network equipment
• Optimized for speed and bandwidth utilization
• Efficiency by design (low CPU and
networking utilization)
• Hot-plug functionality when removing
and adding network stations
• Parallel communication via the same interfaces
and media, without impact on real-time
capabilities (HTTP, FTP, video, VoIP, …)
• Priorization of Ethernet traffic acc. to IEEE 802.3q
• Configurable bandwidth limit
• Subnet formation and cascading
• Multi-master functionality
• Integrated error detection and
diagnostics functionality
• Configurable I/O mapping of network variables
• Programming and diagnostic interface
in IEC 61131-3 and C/C++
Item
Application licence
Application maintenance licence
Developer licence
Developer maintenance licence
181
Item No.
00019331-60 (can only be used in conjunction with
M1 CPUs, independent of the number of applications
per customer)
00019331-70 (annually)
00020721-60 (for implementation on external
systems)
00020721-70 (annually)
bluecom
bluecom
Rationale / Type / Compatibility
Protocol type
Ethernet-based real-time protocol
Ethernet compatibility
yes, as per IEEE 802.3q (ISO/OSI layer 1+2)
Registered IEEE Ethertype
0x892D
Transmission medium
independent of transmission medium
wireless communication (802.11) permissible once the jitter
requirements have been taken care of
Gateway functionality
Interface of different network types on the application level
Fieldbus
CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus UDP + TCP, EtherCAT
Control station level
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA, Modbus
TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
Use of special hardware
no (straight software solution)
Topology / Networking
Topologies
Star, bus, ring*, mesh network
Dimension
in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network
section via fiber optic connection (FCS214)
Transfer rates supported
100 Mbit/s, 1 Gbit/s
Time synchronization
via PTP (IEEE 1588) **
Switches / infrastructure
Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Parallel data traffic
yes, possible
Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP(S), FTP(S),
SNTP, SMTP, video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...
Configuration / Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
IEC 61131-3, C/C++ user interfaces integrated,
Library functions
Software interfaces
API for sending and receiving and for monitoring and checking the full and proper delivery of packets, as well as the
management of I/O stations
Network variables
yes (configuration of variables at the endpoints automatically
generates bluecom communication channel)
Adding/removing slaves
yes, possible (hot plug)
*
employing appropriate network hardware
** accuracy achievable subject to CPU type used and master clock used
182
bluecom
bluecom
Diagnostics / Monitoring
I/O live display
yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
I/O network variables
yes, for every I/O channel (status, value)
Channel status
yes, for every bluecom channel
Error status
yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Diagnostics
yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Statistics
yes (SolutionCenter, IEC 61131-3, C, C++)
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Bandwidth limitation
Monitoring and limitation of real-time communication
bandwidth use included
(adjustable, pre-configured: 35 Mbit/s)
Jitter monitoring
yes
QoS
yes (IEEE 802.3q)
Performance data
Number of I/O stations
max. 500 *** (restricted by software)
Cycle time
200 μs .. 1 s *** (any intermediate values configurable)
Transmission frame cyclic
0 .. 1400 bytes per payload unit
Transmission frame acyclic
32000 bytes per payload unit
Capacity under test conditions
Master CPU: MPC293, slave CPU: MX213, 10 ms cycle, 96
slaves, 50-byte cyclic data exchange bidirectional to each I/O
station, transmission medium copper
CPU load only Protocol
Master: 17%, slave: 1,7%
CPU load (Protocol, GetData +
SetData)
Master: 27%, slave: 3%
Network load
Master: 9 Mbit/s, slave: 0.082 Mbit/s
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
by software possible / licence required
System prerequisites
Automation equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (application licence)
Porting information is available for implementation on
external equipment (developer licence)
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
***
183
Limit value is subject to the power of the controller and the network, as well as the
controller capacity utilization and the network topology/load
bluecom
184
Communication – control room networking
A suitable system for every industry.
Machines and plants usually work as a
composite and are coupled to a central
data acquisition system, a control room,
or a PDA/MES system. Regardless of
whether this involves aggregates of
a wind park, or production machines
of a manufacturing shop – Bachmann
electronic has a suitable communication
system for every industry in its product
line. A powerful, laboratory-certified OPC
server is available in two variants, as well
as an MMS server tailored to the energy
industry for communication in accordance
with IEC61850 and IEC61400-25.
M1 OPC standard server
Features
OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0
Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
Secure SSL connection to the controllers
Up to 5 automation devices per server
Up to 10,000 information points
Operation under Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, XP
M1 OPC enterprise server
Features
OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04, 2.05, 3.0
Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
Secure SSL connection to the controllers
No limitation of connected M1 systems
No restriction of data quantity
Simulation of clients
Operation under Microsoft Windows 7, Vista, XP,
Server 2003, Server 2008
185
Communication – control room networking
The telecontrol protocol, according
to IEC60870-5-104, is widely used in
power generation, power distribution
and infrastructure areas. It allows the
control and monitoring of intelligent subcomponents and sub-stations through a
superordinate control center. The palette
of these sub-components ranges from
circuit breakers, converters, and energy
meters to cogeneration units up to
complete power plants.
MMS server
Features
Communication in accordance with
standards IEC 61400-25 or IEC 61850
Pure software solution, special additional
hardware
is unnecessary
Shared operation with other protocols on
the same Ethernet interface
Enables access from outside to variables
of the controller
MMS client
Features
Communication in accordance with standards
IEC 61400-25 or IEC 61850
Pure software solution, special additional
hardware is unnecessary
Shared operation with other protocols on the
same Ethernet interface
Enables access from outside to variables of the
controller
IEC60870-5-104-Server
Features
Standard compliant implementation of
IEC60870-5-104 Server
Subsequently installable service/software solution
No changes to the application logic required
Fully configurable/no application-specific processing
via PLC libraries required
Configurator for commissioning and diagnostic
monitor in the SolutionCenter
Import/export in CSV format for exchange with other
manufacturers
186
Communication – control room networking
M1 OPC standard server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)
OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral
software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data
access actual states and values (online data)
can be exchanged between controllers and
software applications, such as visualizations,
control systems or production data acquisition.
As a pure software interface OPC runs on a PC
or IPC under Windows and communicates with
the M1 automation systems via Ethernet. Any
standard-conformant OPC clients will then either
be operated on the PC of the server, or
in the network and permit data exchange in both
directions.
The integrated configuration tool supports the
selective disclosure of any variables from the
control system under a freely selectable item
name for the clients. Configurations can either
be created directly in the graphic interface, or
transferred from other tools via the import/
export function. Inversely a test client that is also
integrated in the »OPC Configurator« configuration
tool allows checking of the data exchange with
underlying controllers without a completely
set-up OPC client application.
• OPC conformant data server –
manufacturer-neutral interface
• Specifications – OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04,
2.05 and 3.0
• Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
• Secure SSL connection to the controllers
• Up to 5 automation devices per server
• Up to 10,000 information points
(items / field elements)
• Multi-processor support (depending on
operating system)
• Graphic configuration tool
• Flat and hierarchical browsing
• Integrated test client (configuration tool)
• Operation under Microsoft Windows Vista,
XP, 2000
187
Communication – control room networking
PC (Windows)
Application 1
(SCADA, HMI,
alarm system,
Historian, ..)
OPC client
OPC server
M1 OPC enterprise server284
Ethernet
Bachmann M1
Automation device
VHD
SVI
PLC 1
#1
IEC61131
Motion
PLC x
#2
C/C++
#n
IEC61131
Bachmann MSys, MCore
VxWorks
I/O fieldbus
OPC standard server
Server
Protocol for client application
OPC data access
Supported specifications
V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction
bidirectional
Supported data types
basis types
UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
block types
all basis types; basis type BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping
SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items)
10,000 (individual variables or field elements)
Time stamp on the server
yes
Time stamp from controller
yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server
yes
Quality attribute from controller
yes (per group one quality item possible)
188
Communication – control room networking
Continuation
M1 OPC standard server
M1 OPC standard server
Server
Display of connection loss
yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type
OUT_PROCESS
Operation without GUI
yes
Flat browsing
yes
Hierarchical browsing
yes
Refresh rates
dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)*
Multi-processor support
yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols
TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol
SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller
yes
Simultaneous queries
yes
Number of connected controllers
5 (maximum)
Access protection
yes, configurable
Supported security levels
0 to 4
Encryption
SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface
yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers
yes
Browsing of controller variables
(SVI)
yes
Import/export
yes (CSV)
Templates
yes
Clones (with enumeration)
yes
Restricted access
yes (only on configured items)
Item names
OPC-side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights
OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client
yes
Configurations can be saved
yes
Access protection on configuration
yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging
yes (log file)
Debug mode
yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items
yes (static items)
Statistics on items
yes (static items)
* Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.
189
Communication – control room networking
Continuation
M1 OPC standard server
M1 OPC standard server
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
(See standard package M-Base and M-COM)
Installation can be automated
(»silent«)
yes
System prerequisites – server
Computer
IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor
minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM
minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card
at least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk
>300 MB free
Graphic
1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices
keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server)
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Other software
Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
System prerequisites M1
M1 automation devices
families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software
MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)
190
Communication – control room networking
M1 OPC enterprise server
(Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity)
OPC defines a number of manufacturer-neutral
software interfaces for automation
(www.opcfoundation.org). With OPC data access,
actual states and values (online data) can be
exchanged between controllers and software
applications, such as visualizations, control
systems or production data acquisition. As a
pure software interface OPC runs on a PC or IPC
under Windows and communicates with the M1
automation systems via Ethernet. Any standardconformant OPC clients will then either be
operated on the PC of the server, or in the network
and permit data exchange in both directions.
TM
R
M P LIA
N
FO
CO
CE
SELF-TESTED
®
191
The integrated configuration tool supports the
selective disclosure of any variables from the
control system under a freely selectable item
name for the clients. Configurations can either
be created directly in the graphic interface, or
transferred from other tools via the import/export
function. Convenient copy functions accelerate
the configuration or management even for large
installations with many connected controllers.
The integrated simulation enables communication
tests with client applications even without
connected M1 systems. Inversely a test client that
is likewise integrated in the »OPC Configurator«
configuration tool allows checking of the data
exchange with underlying controllers without
a completely set-up OPC client application.
The Bachmann M1 OPC enterprise server has been
specially developed for large installations with a
variety of automation devices, i.e. for large data
volumes. In addition to the possibility of handling
multiple network connections simultaneously,
here the parallelization of queries and the multiprocessor support have a particular effect.
Communication – control room networking
• OPC-conformant data server –
manufacturer-neutral interface
• Specifications: OPC Data Access 1.0, 2.04,
2.05 and 3.0
• Connection to M1 or CT via Ethernet
• Secure SSL connection to the controllers
• No restriction of the connected
M1 systems*
• No restriction of data quantity (items)*
• Multi-processor support (depending on
operating system)
• Powerful configuration tool
• Flat and hierarchical browsing
• Simulation for clients (configuration tool)
• Integrated test client (configuration tool)
• Operation under Microsoft Windows 7, Vista,
XP, 2000, Server 2003 and Server 2008
P C 1 (W indow s)
P C 2 (W indow s)
A pplication 1
A pplication 2
(S C A D A , H M I,
Alarm-System,
Historian, ..)
(S C A D A , H M I,
Alarm-System,
Historian, ..)
O P C C lient
O P C C lient
O P C S erver
M 1 O P C E nterprise S erver
Ethernet
VHD
SVI
M 1 C ontroller 1
VHD
SVI
VHD
SVI
VHD
SVI
M 1 C ontroller 2
M 1 C ontroller 3
M 1 C ontroller n
* However there is restriction due to computer performance, network capacity and communication load
on the M1 system. The actual achievable throughput depends on the application case.
192
Communication – control room networking
M1 OPC enterprise server
Server
Protocol for client application
OPC data access
Supported specifications
V1.0, 2.04, 2.05a, 3.0
Data exchange direction
bidirectional
Supported data types
basis types
UINT1, UINT8, SINT8, UINT16, SINT16, UINT32,
SINT32, REAL32, BOOL8, CHAR8, CHAR16, MIXED,
REAL64, UINT64, SINT64
block types
all basis types; basis type + BLK
(e.g. CHAR8 + BLK = STRING)
Data type mapping
SVI on OPC (automatic)
Number of variables (items)
user-defined**
Time stamp on the server
yes
Time stamp from controller
yes (per group one time item possible)
Quality attribute on the server
yes
Quality attribute from controller
yes (per group one quality item possible)
Display of connection loss
yes (affected items show quality=BAD)
Server type
OUT_PROCESS or SERVICE (configurable)
Operation without GUI
yes
Flat browsing
yes
Hierarchical browsing
yes
Refresh rates
dynamically adjustable per group (from 50 ms)**
Multi-processor support
yes
Simulation mode
yes
Interfaces to the controller
Physical interface to the M1
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex)
Basis protocols
TCP/IP
UDP/IP
QSOAP
Protocol
SMI / VHD
Multiple connections per controller
yes
Simultaneous queries
yes
Number of connected controllers
user-defined**
Access protection
yes, configurable
Supported security levels
0 to 4
Encryption
SSL (configurable)
Configuration
Graphic interface
yes (OPC configurator)
Browsing of controllers
yes
Browsing of controller variables
(SVI)
yes
** Refresh rates depend on the data volume and the computer performance,
(Free) controller performance and network topology/network load.
*** No program-technical restriction. Limit value depends on performance
of the computer, the network and the capacity utilization of the controllers.
193
Communication – control room networking
Continuation
M1 OPC enterprise server
M1 OPC enterprise server
Configuration
Import/export
yes (CSV)
Templates
yes
Clones (with enumeration)
yes
Restricted access
yes (only on configured items)
Item names
OPC-side can be freely configured (»renaming«)
Item access rights
OPC side can be freely restricted
Integrated test client
yes
Configurations can be saved
yes
Access protection on configuration
yes (different user levels)
Diagnostics
Error logging
yes (log file)
Debug mode
yes (several can be set)
Diagnosis on items
yes (static items)
Statistics on items
yes (static items)
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation can be automated
(»silent«)
yes
License basis
per installation (single-license obligation)
License protection
hardware-dependent software key
Configured installation
yes (items/controller configuration, as well as configuration users
can be preset)
System prerequisites – server
Computer
IBM-compatible PC (Intel x86 architecture)
Processor
minimum: Intel Pentium 500 MHz or comparable (Windows 2000)
recommended: Intel Core2Duo or Core2Quad with >2 GHz
RAM
minimum: 256 MB RAM (Windows 2000)
recommended: >1 GB RAM
Network card
at least 1x Ethernet 802.3
Hard disk
>300 MB free
Graphic
1024 x 768 or better (only for configuration)
Input devices
keyboard, 2-button mouse (only for configuration)
Operating system (OPC Server)
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
Other software
Text editor or MS Excel recommended for external configuration
7
Vista
XP
2000
Server 2003
Server 2008
System prerequisites M1
M1 automation devices
families ME, MX, MPC, MPE, as well as CT/WT200 , CT/WT300
(achievable performance is type-dependent)
System software
MSys V2.11 or higher (for full function scope)
194
Communication – control room networking
MMS server
Manufacturing Message Specification Server
The MMS server equips the M1 controller with the
capability of communicating in accordance with
the standards IEC 61400-25 or IEC 61850. These
are two communication standards that have been
created to correspond to the needs of the energy
industry and the grid operators.
The standardization makes it possible to
seamlessly integrate an ever-increasing number
of heterogeneous plants, such as wind turbines
or CHPs, in a control room or in a mixed network.
The standards, IEC 61400-25 and IEC 61850,
extend far beyond pure data communication.
They also define the data modeling and thus
offer an object-oriented view of the system.
Objects, such as generator, circuit breaker,
transformer, rotor, etc. are defined. For each of
these objects the additional characteristics, their
designations, the data types and the associated
services are specified.
The MMS server from Bachmann electronic depicts
the variables that are available from the plant
control programs (e. g. PLC) in the SVI (Standard
Variable Interface) on an IEC conformant
communication. The user of the MMS server
determines the standardized ICD file (ICD
= Intelligent Electronic Device Capability
Description), what information of the plant is
represented, and is therefore visible to the client
(e. g. the control station). This enables individual
adaptation to different plants or modular
expansion stages.
195
Communication – control room networking
Features
Capabilities in accordance with
IEC 61400-25 / IEC 61850
• It is started as a stand-alone software module
• No special hardware required, pure software
solution for M1-CPUs, MPC240 or higher
recommended
• Configuration of the variable set via
standardized ICD file (XML format)
• The object definition decides between
IEC 61850 or IEC 61400-25
• Mapping of the SVI variables to IEC variables in
a readable ASCII file, that can be automatically
generated
• Optional entry points for additional preprocessing
and post-processing of values, e. g. logging
of write accesses
• Can be operated together with other protocols
(OPC, QSOAP, Telnet, etc.) on the same Ethernet
interface of the M1
• Number of clients, reports, etc. can be limited
• Transport layer MMS (Manufacturing Message
Specification) in accordance with ISO 9506
• Browsing of variables / objects with presentation
of structures and elements in plain
text (self-describing system)
• Reading and writing of values
(Get / Set Data Values)
• Summarizing of data (datasets)
• Generation of reports, e. g. if there
is a value change
• Command issue with command preselect
(Select – Operate)
• File transfer
Client
M1 controller
e. g.
SCADA system
in accordance
with IEC61400
MMS server
MMS
• Browsing
• Object directory
• Read / Write Values
• File transfer
• DataSets
• Reports
read /
write
SVI
PLC task 1
SVI
PLC task 2
write
SVI
C-task
read /
write
SVI
J-task
read /
write
SVI
MIO, RES, etc.
read /
write
Mapping
IEC names
to
SVI names
read /
SVI = Standard Variable Interface
196
Communication – control room networking
MMS client
Manufacturing Message Specification client
Numerous switching, protective, and
measurement devices in the energy technology
area are equipped with an Ethernet interface
and offer communication in accordance with the
IEC61850 standard. Via this interface parameters
can be assigned for the devices, and the devices
can be diagnosed, and actual values can be
picked up through polling or received per report.
Previously this interface has been primarily
served by SCADA and control room systems.
Through the Bachmann MMS client the
control system is capable of directly using the
IEC61580 interface of such peripheral devices.
The MMS client behaves on the controller in a
manner similar to a fieldbus driver: It supplies
actual values and reports of the peripheral
devices directly into the application software.
Inversely, switch commands, setpoints and
parameters for the peripheral device can be
set directly from the application program.
• Pure software solution, special
additional hardware is unnecessary
• It is started as a stand-alone service
directly from the application software
• Common operation with other protocols on the
same Ethernet port and in the same network
• Configuration via SolutionCenter,
no external tools are required
• Operates devices in accordance with IEC 61850
and/or IEC61400-25 in the same network
• Operating interface for sequential
programs (IEC61131-3, C/C++) via
SMI for temporal decoupling
• Library for PLC programming in
accordance with IEC61131-3
• Header file for C/C++ programming
• Disclosed interface for tools and visualizations
• Report data is available via logical I/O
modules for application programs and tools
• Commissioning and diagnostics
monitor in the SolutionCenter
197
Communication – control room networking
MMS client
Usability
Implementation areas
wind power in accordance with IEC61400-25
distributed energy resources: CHP, photovoltaic,
Heat accumulators in accordance with IEC61850-7-420
switchgear and protective devices in accordance
with IEC61850-7
Scope of delivery
software components for the controller
PLC library and C-defines for operation of the API
test and diagnostics monitor in the SolutionCenter
user manual
sample configuration
PCS sample project
User interface
Individual read and write commands via non-blocking
PLC modules (PLC) or non-blocking calls (C/C++).
Incoming report data on logical IO modules and in the
process image.
Capabilities in accordance with IEC 61400-25 / IEC 61850
Login/logout on the external server with
or without password
Associate, Abort, Release
Check connection status
MMS status request
Read value from data attributes
GetDataValues
Write value from data attributes
GetDataValues
Write value from data attributes
SetDataValues
Activation and configuration – buffered
and unbuffered reports (BR, UR)
Get/SetBRCBValues, Get/SetURCBValues,
BRCB…buffered report control block
Generating, deleting and reading of datasets
CreateDataSet, DeleteDataSet, GetDataSetDirectory
Issuing of switch commands (operates)
Select, Select with value, Operate,
Cancel, TimeActivatedOperate
Receipt of information reports as reaction to operates
M1 SOFTWARE MODULE
mconfig.ini
- SERVER
- REPORTS
MMS CLIENT
SERVER 1
S MI
CALL
PLC MODULE 1
XCBR1.Pos
S MI
CALL
LOGIN/LOGOUT
PLC MODULE 2
SERVER 2
READ/WRITE
VALUES
S MI
CALL
C/C++ MODULE
S MI
INTERFACE
MMXU1.AvgWatts
OPERATE
SERVER 3
REPORTS
LOGIN
LPHD.PhyHealth
REPORTS
ACTIVE/INACTIVE
REPORT
DATA
ON MI0MODULE
ETHERNET
REPORTS
198
Communication – control room networking
IEC60870-5-104 Server
The IEC60870-5-104 Server is installed purely
as a software component on the controller and
requires no special hardware. For the generation
of externally visible information objects, a
convenient tool is available in the SolutionCenter
that supports the user with dialogs and wizards,
and reviews the entries immediately. Thus,
inconsistent or incorrect configurations can be
avoided. The link to the process data takes place
by selecting the corresponding SVI variables
from a variable browser. To exchange the
configuration using other tools, import and export
functions of a generic CSV format are available.
A monitor in the SolutionCenter shows
the current configuration of information
objects used in the server, and the value
most recently transmitted to the client.
To reduce the communication load, a threshold
filter can be enabled. Values which are
located outside of defined Min-/Max-limits
are also not transmitted. No implementation
by the user is necessary for this.
Which selection of process data for the associated
IEC60870 client is visible can be influenced
purely by a configuration file. A different
data model can also be created for different
clients. The log-in of clients can be restricted
by specifying a permitted IP address, and the
number of simultaneous client connections
can also be limited. Write accesses can be
captured in the security log of the controller.
Existing software for sequence control and
regulation does not need to be changed and will
not be affected in its run time. Thus it can be
flexibly responsive to final customer requirements
without changing the existing tested software
for control and regulation of the substation.
Through realization as a finished server with
integrated update- and threshold logic, tedious
replication of the protocol functions via limiting
PLC-libraries, and the associated training efforts
in the standard, is eliminated. Engineering
and testing time can thus be reduced, and the
integrated diagnostics shorten the troubleshooting
in the event of malfunctions during operation.
The diverse communication possibilities via field
busses and real-time Ethernet, the broad range
of signal interfaces to grid measurement, as
199
Communication – control room networking
well as powerful mass storage, predestine the
M1 system in conjunction with the telecontrol
protocol according to IEC60870-5-104 for
use as a control device, central control, data
concentrator, datalogger, and gateway.
• Standard compliant implementation
of IEC60870-5-104 Server
• Subsequently installable service/software solution
• No changes to the application logic required
• Fully configurable/no application-specific
processing via PLC libraries required
• Configurator for commissioning and
diagnostic monitor in the SolutionCenter
• Import/export in CSV format for
exchange with other manufacturers
• Reducing the amount of data via
configurable threshold filter
• Number and IP addresses of
authorized clients can be limited
• Logging of write accesses in the
security log of the controller
PC
• Configuration
• Parametrizing
• Monitoring
SolutionCenter
Configurator
IEC60870-5-104
Clients
SolutionCenter
Monitor
Ethernet TCP/IP
M1 controller
Configuration
Object model
Data mapping
IEC60870-5-104
Server Stack
Data mapping and
polling engine
SVI
Software module
PLC, C/C++
Process
MIO
Sensor
Actor
200
Communication – control room networking
IEC60870-5-104 server
Server
Type
Service for Bachmann M1 controls (software-only solution, subsequently installable) with configuration interface
Physical interface
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 (Interface of M1 CPUs and EM2131)
Protocol
IEC60870-5-104 Server (Client)
Transport layer
TCP/IP
Port number
adjustable depending on server instance (default 2404)
Parallel operation
- Multiple independent server instances on a single CPU
- parallel use of the Ethernet interface for other
- communication protocols or engineering tool access is possible***
Message types (ASDUs)
Comprehensive implementation of the essential application data
service units, for example single message, single command, double
message, double command, level message, level command, measured
value normalized, time synchronization, reset and many more
Data mapping
Per configuration each server instance is separately defined.
Access to:
- SVI variables of application programs (SW modules) independently
of implementation (IEC61131-3, C, C++)
- physical inputs and outputs directly (MIO)
- Data from field busses / Ethernet protocols via UFB
Data type mapping
Implicit in the server (mapping SVI data types on IEC data types)
Query groups
yes (can be configured for counter- and group queries)
Data Designation
IEC60870-5-104 compliant: via station address (Common Address)
and information object address (IOA) either structured (28.7.16) or
flat (1836816), in configuration freely assignable.
Source time stamping
yes, implicitly through server, resolution in ms
Quality labeling
yes (implicitly through server, possible explicitly via application)
Transmission reason identification
(COT)
yes (implicitly through server)
Transmission modes
Adjustable via configuration:
- event driven (value or quality change)
- cyclical
- query by client
- general query, group query
- background query
Update rates**
Between application and server
- freely adjustable monitoring cycle
- spontaneous update possible by application
between client and server
-dependent on the selected transmission mode, minimal 1 ms
201
Update suppression
yes (absolute or integrated threshold)
Validity monitoring
yes (values outside of allowed value range suppressed in automatic
update; individual/group queries possible)
Connection monitoring
yes
Access security/security
yes (limiting the number of clients, IP address specification for client,
integration with M1 Access Control: Logging connections and write
accesses)
* EM213 Performance values limited compared to the onboard interfaces of the CPUs
** Performance data depends on computer performance in addition to the data volume,
(Free) control performance/target system and network topology/-load. Performance generally application-dependent
*** Dependent on the total load and real-time requirements of restrictions possible
Communication – control room networking
IEC60870-5-104 server
Configuration
Configuration interface
yes (integrated in Bachmann SolutionCenter)
Data configuration/mapping
- via configuration interface (with variable browser and consistency
check)
- open configuration format (ASCII) for automated creation
Import
yes (CSV format)
Export
yes (CSV format)
Diagnostics
Process data monitor
yes (integrated in Bachmann SolutionCenter)
Connection statistics
yes (integrated in Bachmann SolutionCenter)
Status variables
Yes (server publishes essential operating characteristics and diagnostic
information also as SVI variables - visible for all applications and via
module "scope" loggable over time)
Debugging
yes (runtime shiftable levels of information output)
Logbook
yes (essential operational information is displayed in the central logbook)
Write accesses
yes (logging in M1 security log)
Installation
Delivery form
Separately installable product (service) delivery on CD-ROM or as
download
Installation
via SolutionCenter or direct entry mconfig.ini
Licensing
Individual license liability per CPU (regardless of number of servers,
client connections or points of information)
License protection
hardware-dependent Software Key
System prerequisites - server
Device
all M1 CPU-Families (MH2xx, MC2xx, MPC2xx, MX2xx) except ME2xx
System version
Msys from Version 3.80, Mcore from Vers 3.80 (all Versions required)
(without support of security protocol); complete functional range generally from M-Base 3.85
System prerequisites configuration
SolutionCenter
SolutionCenter from version 1.85 (M-Base 3.85) - computer requirements see SolutionCenter
202
Integrated. Intuitive. Safe.
Integrated safety technology.
Safety – for man as well as machine – plays an increasingly important role
in the world of automation: Machines and plants are becoming ever more
complex and the requirements imposed on functional safety continuously
increase.
Bachmann electronic offers a safety package that is consistently integrated
in the M1 automation system that is designed for the most rigorous safety
requirements. It consists of the programmable SLC284 safety module,
digital I/O modules, and the Safety Developer, and it can be
extended to meet individual needs in accordance with the latest safety
standards (PL e, SIL3, Cat 4). And best of all: In addition to safety,
efficiency is also increased; the intelligent safety technology helps
to significantly lower engineering costs. Through specific diagnostic
possibilities and the fastest possible intervention, availability of the
machine/system is increased and downtimes are reduced.
198
Safety Module & Safety Developer
Integrated safety.
With the safety modules for realization
of functional safety, Bachmann electronic
is setting a clear signal for a holistic
and integrated automation solution. The
systems presented here not only offer the
best-possible safety, they also guarantee
continuity and investment protection.
The new programmable safety module,
SLC284, and the digital I/O safety
modules, SDI208 or SDO204, make
it possible to set up a solution that is
integrated in the M1 Automation System.
This solution can be adapted to the
individual requirements and satisfies
the latest safety standards.
Safety processor module
SLC284
Features
16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Programmable in function block language
in accordance with IEC 61131-3
Programming, configuration, monitoring
and debugging per SolutionCenter
Manipulation protection thanks to configurable user
schemes with access and function restrictions
1x RS232 for on-site maintenance access without
developer tools
Digital input module SDI208
Features
Digital input module with two galvanically
separated input groups
16 digital input channels – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Each channel can be optionally tested
per test clocking
Cross-circuit detection
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns
199
Safety modules
For the subsequent safety-relevant safety
engineering steps the SolutionCenter
contains the Safety Developer, which
includes all the required tools for safetyoriented programming in accordance with
FBD acc. to IEC61131-3 and PLCopen, and
has been developed and certified in close
cooperation with TÜV.
Digital output signal SDO204
Features
Digital output module with two galvanically
separated output groups
8 digital output channels – can be used
redundantly in pairs (PL e / SIL3 / Cat 4)
Autonomously safe – robust against network
breakdowns
Output voltage range +18 .. 34 V DC
2 A per channel
Safety Developer
Features
Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one engineering tool
Full-graphic function plan editor
with autorouting
Certified safety modules
in accordance with PLCopen Safety
Standard modules for logical links, timers and
arithmetic operations in accordancen with
EN61131-3
Integrated debugger and monitor - online monitoring
in safe operation
200
Safety modules
Safety processor module
SLC284
The programmable safety controller SCL284
– ideally integrated in the M1 controller – is
presented as an independent, safe, and modern
safety controller. The Safety Logic Controller is
approved in accordance with the latest safety
norm, IEC61508.
No additional cabling is needed for communication
between the Safety Logic Controller SLC284 and
the safety I/O modules SDI208 and SDO204.
The modules can be separated by several hundred
meters and operated in a distributed manner via
the bus expansion or a FASTBUS.
• 16 digital inputs / 8 digital outputs – can be
used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Each output with emergency delay is
configurable in the event of communication lost
• Safety Controller with two independent 32-bit
microcontrollers
• Fastest program cycle 5 ms
• Decentralized I/O via FASTBUS or bus expansion
with SDI208 or SDO204
• All safety I/O states can be used by the M1
controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system bus
• Operating mode selector switch
• Operating status display »SAFE«, »PROG«,
»TEST«, »ERROR«
• Status display for each channel via LED
• Programming via independent serial interface or
via controller
Item
SLC284
SLC284
201
Item no.
00014273-00
00017465-00
Safety modules
SLC284
Processor
CPU
2x LPC2468, 72 MHz, 32 bit
Controller
Programming
via controller (I/O bus) or serial interface (COM)
Number of independent safety
programs per SLC
1
Program cycle
minimal 5 ms
I/O expansion
via SDI208 or SDO204 modules
Digital inputs
Quantity
16 digital inputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Input voltage range (H)
15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L)
-34 .. +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW
300 μs
Input delay (normally) SW
1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according to
IEC61131-2 input current
at least
type 1
3.5 mA at 24 V DC
Status display (LED)
green
Error monitoring
internal function monitoring
external test clocking optional
Digital outputs
Quantity
8 digital outputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel
(max.)
0.5 A nominal
Total current per group (max.)
2A
Delay 0 to 1
max. 35 μs at full load
Delay 1 to 0
max. 155 μs at full load
Output groups
2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED)
green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
500 Hz
Error monitoring
short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage
of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency shutoff
each output individual from 0 .. 1800 s configurable
(resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost e.g.
cable break or failure in the supply voltage
202
Safety modules
Continuation
Safety processor module SLC284
SLC284
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the
system
500 V
Galvanic isolation between
groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 600 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption
normally 95 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption
of the encoders and sensors
Connection technology
Connection technology
screw or spring terminal,
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
IEC61508: Functional safety – draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for
ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
Product standard
IEC 61131-2
UL508
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Operating mode adjustable via hex switch
Ambient conditions
coldclimate ( )
Standard
Operating temperature
-20 .. +60 °C fanless
Relative humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C
Relative humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
-30 .. +60 °C fanless
Model variants
203
SLC284
safety CPU
SLC284
like SLC284, in coldclimate model ( )
Safety modules
Safety input modules
SDI208
The safety input module SDI208 adds an
additional 8 input channels to the safety logic
controller SLC284. A homogeneous total system
is created through independent and safe
integration in the M1 controller. Through the
free choice of the slot – either directly beside
the safety controller, through bus expansion,
or several hundred meters away through the
FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and
existing infrastructure of the system.
The input module, SDI208, is approved under
the latest safety standard IEC61508. The input
module can be easily integrated in the safety
application, comparable with a standard I/O
module – as the proven »SolutionCenter«
development platform offers the easiest
configuration, most flexible type of programming,
and a safe simulation via easily combinable
PLC-Open function modules. All variables,
and states of the SDI208 safety input
module are accessible in all other machine
program languages (PLC, C/C++, Java);
visualization is also available and makes
cumbersome parallel wiring unnecessary.
• 16 digital inputs – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant
32-bit microcontrollers
• Several SDI208 modules per controller possible
• All safety I/O states can be used
by M1 controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Operating state display »SAFE«
• Status display for each channel via LED
Item
SDI208
SDI208
Item no.
00014544-00
00017459-00
204
Safety modules
SDI208
Digital inputs
Quantity
Input voltage range (H)
16 digital inputs - can be used redundantly in pairs
(PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
15 .. 34 V DC
Input voltage range (L)
-34 .. +5 V DC
Input delay (normally) HW
300 μs
Input delay (normally) SW
1 ms with deactivated test clocking
Input type according
to IEC61131-2
Input current at least
type 1
Status display (LED)
green
Error monitoring
internal function monitoring
external test clocking optional
3.5 mA at 24 V DC
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from the system
500 V
Galvanic isolation between groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 600 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Current consumption
normally 65 mA at 24 VDC + Σ current consumption
of the encoders and sensors
Connection technology
Connection technology
screw or spring terminal
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
Approved for
Product standard
IEC61508 Functional safety draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
IEC 61131-2 ... UL508
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Relative humidity operation
Storage temperature
Relative humidity storage
Standard
-20 .. +60 °C fanless
-30 .. +60 °C fanless
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
-40 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
205
coldclimate ( )
SDI208
safety input module
SDI208
like SDI208 in coldclimate model ( )
Safety modules
Safety output modules
SDO204
The safety output module, SDO204, adds an
additional 4 output channels to the safety logic
controller, SLC284, and a homogeneous overall
system is created through the independent and
safe inclusion in the M1 controller. Through the
free choice of the slot – either directly beside
the safety controller, through bus expansion,
or several hundred meters away through the
FASTBUS – the safety system can be optimally
adapted to the distributed requirements and
existing infrastructure of the system.
The input module, SDO204, is approved
under the latest safety standard IEC61508.
The input module can be easily integrated
in the overall safety application, comparable
with a standard I/O module – as the proven
»SolutionCenter« development platform offers
the easiest configuration, most flexible type
of programming, and a safe simulation via
easily combinable PLC-Open function modules.
All variables and states of the SDO204 safety
output module are accessible in other machine
program languages (PLC, C/C++, Java), however
the visualization is also available and makes
bothersome parallel wiring unnecessary.
• 8 digital outputs – can be used redundantly
in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
• Each output with emergency delay is
configurable in the event of communication lost
• Safe monitoring of the inputs with redundant
32-bit microcontrollers
• Several SDO208 units per controller possible
• All safety I/O states can be used
by M1 controller
• Safety programming via SolutionCenter
• Galvanic isolation between the groups
• Galvanic isolation from the system
• Operating state display »SAFE«
• Status display for each channel via LED
Item
SDO204
SDO204
Item no.
00014545-00
00017462-00
206
Safety modules
SDO204
Digital outputs
Quantity
8 digital outputs - can be used redundantly in pairs (PL e/SIL3/Cat 4)
Output voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Output current per channel
2 A nominal
Total current per group (max.)
8 A (derating from 40 °C ambient temperature)
Delay 0 to 1
max. 35 μs at full load
Delay 1 to 0
max. 155 μs at full load
Output groups
2, electronic fuse
Status display (LED)
green
Switching frequency
(max., ohmic load)
500 Hz
Error monitoring
short circuit, overload, inadequate or excess voltage of the power supply
Time-delayed emergency shutoff
each output individual from 0 .. 1800 s configurable
(resolution 100 ms);
Emergency shut-off is activated in the event of communication lost e.g.
cable break or failure in the supply voltage
Internal power supply
Galvanic isolation from
the system
500 V
Galvanic isolation
between groups
500 V
Internal power supply
Backplanes BS2xx
Current consumption internal
5 V / 250 mA via backplane
External power supply
Reverse polarity protection
yes
Input voltage
24 V DC (18 .. 34 V)
Voltage range
18 .. 34 V DC
Current consumption
normally 70 mA at +24 VDC + Σ current consumption of the encoders
Connection technology
Connection technology
screw or spring terminal
writable and codable plug
Standards
Machine safety
IEC61508 Functional safety draft of complex E/E/PE
safety components
Approved for
ISO13849: Safety of Machinery
IEC62061: Functional safety machine-related E/E/PE systems
IEC61511: Functional safety equipment and process industry
EN954
Product standard
207
IEC 61131-2
UL508
Safety modules
Continuation
Safety output modules SDO204
SDO204
Additional features
Status display via LEDs
Ambient conditions
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-20 .. +60 °C fanless
-30 .. +60 °C fanless
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Operating temperature
Relative humidity operation
Storage temperature
Relative humidity storage
-40 .. +85 °C
-40 .. +85 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Elevation limit
2000 m above sea level (use), 3000 m above sea level
(storage & transport)
Model variants
SDO204
safety output module
SDO204
like SDO204 in coldclimate model ( )
* Derating of 40oC ambient temperature
I [A]
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
T [°C]
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
208
Safety Developer
Safety Developer
For the more safety-relevant, engineering steps
the SolutionCenter contains the Safety Developer
that includes all tools required for safetyconformant programming in accordance with
EN61508 andb PLCopen. Safety Developer has
been developed and certified in close collaboration
with TÜV. All methods required for logging
and the verification obligation of the machine
manufacturer are integral components: password
management, fail-safe program transmission,
tamper-proof logging on the target device,
documentation of the safety program, and all
software components used, unique identification
of the safety modules, and the programming itself.
• Integrated in the SolutionCenter all-in-one engineering tool
• Full-graphic function plan editor
with autorouting
• Certified safety modules
in accordance with PLCopen Safety
• Standard modules for logical links, timers and
arithmetic operations
in accordancen with EN61131-3
• Color coding of secure and unsecure signal flow
• Grouping of circuitry parts for repeat use
(compound)
• Adjustable test depth for the project translation
• Variable monitoring, value simulation and break
points
• Open programming interfaces (PLC, C, C++) for
e.g. online monitoring
209
• Bidirectional exchange of values
between secure and non-secure controller
• Unique identification of the safe hardware
• Configuration of the clocked
self-monitoring of inputs/outputs
• Communication to safe hardware
via Ethernet (M1) or serial
• Certified redundant program download
• Logging of the acceptance state in PDF format
• Direct connection to version management
• Online monitorning of all I/Os also
in safe operating mode
Safety Developer
Programming in accordance
with PLCopen Safety
The safety application is programmed in a freegraphic function plan editor (Safety Editor) in
accordance with EN61131-3. The module set
includes a library of safety modules that have
been strictly implemented, tested, and certified in
accordance with the PLCopen safety standard.
For the logic, additionally required standard
modules, such as timers, arithmetic, and logical
operations are available. The application can
be organized in multiple separated functional
units and sub programs in order to structure the
program. Unsafe input and output signals from
the control system can be added to the safety
project via a browser. The execution sequence of
the modules is presented graphically and can be
corrected by the user. Redundant hardware inputs
are summarized via equivalence or antivalence
blocks and subsequently presented as a safe
signal in the program. The data types, bool,
integer, and time, are supported.
210
Safety Developer
Visibility in the standard program
The transparent exchange of signals functions
in both directions. In the Safety Developer you
configure which values – irrespective of the
states of the safe I/Os – should also be visible
in the unsafe world. Thus intermediate results
in networks and the status of modules can be
presented in a visualization, recorded with the
Scope, or evaluated in a PLC program. Thus there
are extensive diagnostic possibilities and a high
level of operating convenience.
Safe and unsafe paths
Signals from the standard sequential program and
from the I/O modules of the control system can
be used in the safety program as unsafe input and
output signals. The classification of a signal as
safe or unsafe is presented with color coding.
211
User-specific templates
A logical circuit that is structured from a group of
basic modules can be put together and given an
interface in the project for a function group. Thus
separate user-specific function blocks (templates) can
be created and used in the project multiple times.
These groups or even complete networks can also by
transferrred from one project into the next project.
Safety Developer
Tracking changes
In the Safety Developer version management is an
integral component – regardless of the logging and
verification obligation. The version management
database is operated directly from the project
navigator. A local history is always kept automatically,
which enables reversal of changes even without a
genuine version management system. Naturally
Undo/Redo functions are also available.
Logging
Program verification
The program for execution on the target system is not
compiled, but rather is translated into a script that is
checked and executed redundantly by the firmware of
the target system. Nevertheless the Safety Developer
can detect and display possible error sources in the
code when the script is generated.
Optionally the safety program can be stored on
the safety controller and can be opened and
further processed from the controller. Additional
user-specific information, such as author, version
history, and additional comments can be stored
for each network.
The verification obligation is supported in different
ways. For logging of acceptance, a project report
can be generated that also presents the entire
program code graphically. The tamper-proof log
book of the safety controller logs each safety-relevant change in the system, such as the download
of a changed program. Thus any manipulation can
be traced with user name, date, and time.
Hardware configuration
Modularity
The Safety Developer takes the flexible requirements
in today's industry into account through its modular
project management. FBD networks, and also
additional safe I/O modules of the project, can be
activated depending on the expansion stage, signals
can be connected to different sources and potentially
susceptible equipment, thus a project for maximum
machine expansion can be created and tested.
Adaptation to the real degree of expansion is achieved
through the bringing together of the desired parts.
Commissioning of individual machine parts is also
possible in this manner.
In addition to the tools for variable selection,
programming, and logging, the safe hardware
can also be directly configured in the Safety
Developer. This includes not only assignment
of unique channel names, but particularly also
allocation of the controller to the project, the
adding of additional safe I/O modules, and
specification of test intervals for clocked lines,
which then are tested automatically by the
hardware for short circuit, cross-connection, and
interference voltage.
Safety-relevant, required unique module
identification that excludes the possibility of
swapping modules after a service deployment is
also executed directly in the Safety Developer.
Communication between Safety Developer and the
control system for program download, diagnosis
and configuration is executed conveniently and
in broadband via the Ethernet Interface of the
M1 control system. Alternatively, communication
can also be executed directly with the Safety
Controller via a serial RS232 interface, which also
enables use of the Safety Controller as a standalone solution without a surrounding control
system.
212
203
Failure-free. Flexible. Economical.
Redundancy – maximum availability
ensures productivity.
Automation devices from plant, transport and mechanical engineering are
no longer unthinkable. They control and regulate mission critical systems often entirely stand-alone or with requirements that manual operation can
no longer perform. Maximum reliability and ranges of solutions for highavailability applications call for increasingly higher demands on productivity
right up to 27/7 availability.
Proven ruggedness and exceptional service life data are are often insufficient
here. Effective measures against network, sensor and wiring outages, as well
as statistically rare component part failure, are required.
Bachmann electronic with its scalable redundancy products for the
proven M1 automation system always provides the right solution. The
redundancy product series upgrades the significant ruggedness and
availability of the hardware modules universal fault tolerance. The softwareonly implementation based on redundant Ethernet real-time networking
guarantees compatibility without special and expensive redundancy hardware
and makes upgrading of existing applications possible.
204
Redundancy
The right solution for each application
Hot-standby redundancy
Maximum reliability thanks to fully
automatic variable exchange and bumpless
application switchover. Ideal where outages
are economically unacceptable and for
technical challenges like in rapid control
applications.
Network redundancy
Using the basic redundancy version, critical
transmission links are protected against
interruptions due to mechanical damage
and network equipment outages.
Warm-standby redundancy
Values interchange is supported by
network redundancy. Adjusts to redundant
data recording and for simple and less
critical redundancy applications.
Common features
Redundancy cycles up to 1 ms possible*
Automatic switchover between variables and process
value sources within one PLC cycle
Support of fully autonomous, dual communication
guarantees maximum reliability with freely selectable
transmission medium (copper/optical fiber)
Integration of configuration, monitoring and
programming in the engineering tool SolutionCenter
Redundancy networking on Ethernet basis, full
support of TCP/IP-based parallel communication
Networking topology freely selectable: star, bus,
ring and combinations  easily adaptable to existing
network
Master CPUs: all processor modules from the MPC,
MC, MH series
Retrofitable and upgradable without CPU exchange,
application of standard components
Support of standard applications in addition to
redundancy applications, even with diverse cycle
times
Standard operating range of -30°C … +60°C, with
short-term Temperature peaks of -40°C … +70°C
with condensation present when using cold climate
modules
* tested with CPUs of the MPC series; limit value
subject to CPU type, memory available, application
size, number of exchangeable variables, network
bandwidth available, network and CPU load via nonredundant applications
205
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Features
Two master CPUs
Automatic matching of the master CPUs
Bumpless switchover
Chronological synchronization of all stations
Configuration and monitoring in the SolutionCenter
Expanded diagnostic and programming interfaces for
monitoring and analysis of redundancy status
Network redundancy included
Freely adjustable switchover time, automatic
switchover in case of error
Warm-standby redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Features
Two master CPUs
Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing the
redundancy status
Slaves decide from which CPU the data packet is
applied (voter)
Switching time configurable
Matching of the master CPUs not integrated
Operator
Terminal
Network redundancy
Master
CPU
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Features
One master CPU
Redundant communication (cyclic and non-cyclic
communication)
Easy configuration in development environment,
integrated diagnostics (status, quality)
Programming interface, libraries and system
variables for easy creation of applications
Slaves work as smart substations
Network switchover in the same PLC cycle
206
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Mission-critical systems, applications in harsh
environments and facilities where even short
outages, e.g. owing to cost restraints, are
not tolerated are hot-standby redundancy's
main fields of activity. In addition, control
engineering applications with their requirement
of smooth switchover, i.e. no deviation between
values when switching the master CPU, are
executable in this redundancy version too.
With redundancy on all system levels (i.e. hardware,
system software, application programming and
maintenance, monitoring interfaces) hot-standby
redundancy provides maximum reliability with
outstanding convenience at the same time.
The full integration of configuration, programming
and monitoring in Bachmann tools shortens
application creation and minimizes deviations with
respect to everyday standard operating sequences.
At the same time, risks in the course of maintenance
operations, error corrections and application
updates decrease during the process in operation.
Hot-standby redundancy combines the
highest redundancy technology and the best
performance possible with the customary
ruggedness of every Bachmann module.
Hot-standby redundancy enhances
network redundancy by the following
attributes, among others:
• Fully automatic matching of process variables
• Automatic failover upon detecting internal errors
• Integrated self-tests for checking system status
• Automatic system matching (system
software, configuration, applications)
• Automatic application synchronization
(variance < 200 μs)
• Millisecond-precise synchronization of all stations
Item
Hot-standby redundancy (BC/H/P/R202)
Licence basis
Scope of delivery
Licence protection
207
Item No.
00019829-00
per master CPU (product delivery includes two
separate licences)
2 CF cards with imprinted licence
licence key on every CF card
Redundancy
• Network switching time freely
configurable (0 … 10 PLC cycles)
• Blumpless switchover
• Redundancy programming support
in M-PLC (IEC 61131-3)
• Debugging and forcing of variables in
redundant applications (M-PLC)
• Resistant to single-fault events, additionally many
multi-fault scenarios are overridden on a continuous
basis
Integration in the SolutionCenter
• Applying, monitoring and deleting
redundancy devices
• Extra support in Solution Navigator and
Device Manager for configuring, monitoring
and logging redundant applications
• Textual and graphical redundancy status displays
• Virtual redundancy devices with the option
of applying and manipulating redundancy
configurations and applications
• Redundancy master status information
• Device designation
• Current redundancy status of the entire system
• CPU information
• System software information
• Network information
• Redundancy application status information
• Current redundancy status
(REDUNDANT/SINGLE/ERROR)
• Runtime state (RUN/STOP/ERROR)
• Error status codes
• Synchronization status
• Cycle time
• Maintenance interface for redundancy
systems integrated (execution of commands
on both master CPUs at the same time)
• All commands and monitoring mechanisms
are available to the operator as open user
interfaces and/or as system variables.
208
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type
Hot-standby redundancy with local I/O stations (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy
yes (synchronization and self-monitoring automatic)
Network redundancy
included
I/O redundancy
possible
Sensor redundancy
possible
Switchover
bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability
yes
Communication redundancy
yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable
yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
integrated in network protocol;
Number of I/O stations
more than 100
Smart substations
yes, for example, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
209
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Redundancy
Hot-standby redundancy
Configuration/Programming
Editor
CoDeSys
Redundancy download
Automatic
Redundancy debugging
yes
Redundancy synchronization
automatic (process variables, system software)
Manual switchover
yes
Switchover: triggering by user
Failover: automatic via software
Multitasking
yes (one redundant task permissible per PLC application, total up to
three independent redundancy tasks)
Mixed operation
yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display
SolutionCenter
Redundancy status
yes
Error status
yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Distributed logging
yes (synchronized, granularity 1 ms)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1 … 1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 μs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 .. 600
channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Synchronization volume
max 120*1400 byte
Switching time
adjustable from 0 .. 10 cycles
Time precision
< 1ms *
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
*
Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction.
210
Redundancy
Warm-standby redundancy
Master
CPU A
Master
CPU B
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
For applications where reliable recording of critical
data has priority, warm-standby redundancy is the
preferred solution. Good support when configuring
and monitoring the actual CPU redundancies helps
during the rapid development of applications for
which bumpless switchover is not required.
Continuous operation during maintenance,
system updating and application changes
is also possible in this version.
If a master CPU for maintenance work
is disconnected from the network, realtime processing is only affected to a
minimum. The data transmission continues
seamlessly and from the perspective of the
receiving stations no packets are lost.
The matching of process variables in the
master CPU has to be resolved on the
application level, which means extra effort
and expense and increased complexity vis-àvis hot-standby redundancy (see Fig. 1).
Warm-standby redundancy provides the
qualities of network redundancy and
the following advantages as well:
• CPU redundancy
• Switching time freely configurable
(0 … 10 PLC cycles)
• Selection of the data master integrated
in end points (voter), the fastest
switching times possible as a result
• Diagnostic interface for monitoring and analyzing
the redundancy status in the SolutionCenter
• Automatic matching of the master CPUs not
integrated  switchover not bumpless
Item
Network redundancy (BC/H/P202)
Licence basis
Scope of delivery
Licence protection
211
Item No.
00019828-00
per master CPU
(licence mandatory: two network redundancy
licences constitute a warm-standby licence)
order 2 CF cards
licence key on every CF card
Redundancy
Master CPU A
Master CPU B
Network 1
A
B
A
B
Network 2
A
B
A
B
B
A
B
A
A
B
A
Slave Station 1
B
Master CPU A
Master CPU B
Network 1
B
B
B
Network 2
B
B
B
B
A
Slave Station 2
B
B
B
Slave Station 1
B
Slave Station 2
Fig.1 Switchover of the active CPU within a PLC cycle, e.g. cycle time 1 ms – switchover ≤ 1 ms
Warm-standby redundancy
Rationale/Characteristic
High availability system type
Warm-standby redundancy with decentral I/O (1oo2 voting
integrated)
CPU redundancy
yes (no automatic synchronization and self-monitoring)
Network redundancy
included
I/O redundancy
possible
Sensor redundancy
possible
Switchover
not bumpless
Continuous dual-channel ability
yes
Communication redundancy
yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable
yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
integrated in network protocol;
Number of I/O stations
more than 100
Smart substations
yes, for example I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation or load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)
212
Redundancy
Warm-standby redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor
CoDeSys
Redundancy download
Automatic
Redundancy debugging
yes
Redundancy synchronization
manual
Manual switchover
to integrate by user
Multitasking
to integrate by user
Mixed operation
yes (non-redundant, non-synchronized applications can run parallel
to redundancy applications)
Diagnostics/Monitoring
I/O live display
SolutionCenter
Redundancy status
yes (restricted to network redundancy)
Error status
yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated automatically on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1…1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 μs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) - typically 400 .. 600 channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Switching time
adjustable from 0 .. 10 cycles
*
Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction.
213
Redundancy
Warm-standby redundancy
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Controller equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 series or better (min. 2 Ethernet interfaces
onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
214
Redundancy
Network redundancy
Master
CPU
Slave
Station 1
Slave
Station 2
Operator
Terminal
Cable break and outage or misconfiguration
of network equipment are frequent causes of
failure in the daily automation routine. Searching
for errors in the process often proves to be
expensive and difficult. In doing so, however, little
carelessnesses hide the risk of longer production
stoppages and economically relevant outages.
The introduction of redundant real-time
networking makes separate cable routes
possible. In conjunction with the simultaneous
transmission of all data packets on both network
lines, single failures on the transmission
line no longer have the effect of disrupting
communication and therefore automation.
The product „network redundancy“ fulfills these
qualities precisely by means of a combination
of media and communication redundancies.
Even in the case of an error, no data packets
to the receiving stations (master or slave) are
lost in the process (see Fig. 1). Integrated
self-monitoring and diagnostic interfaces
draw attention to transmission errors and
make finding their location easier.
The network redundancy is optimized
for real-time capabilities, compatibility,
ruggedness and performance. Conformity
with Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3 guarantees
the cost-effective networking of more than
one hundred redundancy stations*.
• Switch-over time ≤ 1 PLC cycle
• Real-time network fully Ethernet
compatible (IEEE 802.3q)
• Monitoring and diagnostics of
errors via SolutionCenter
• Programming interfaces, libraries and
system variables for data transmission and
communication monitoring in IEC 61131-3
• Prioritized redundancy data transmission
makes parallel communication via
IP-based protocols possible
• Bandwidth limit integrated
• Connection of terminals via TCP/IP
Item
Network redundancy (BC/H/P202)
Licence basis
Scope of delivery
Licence protection
215
Item No.
00019828-00
per master CPU (licence mandatory)
1 CF card
licence key on every CF card
Redundancy
Master CPU A
Network 1
Network 2
Slave Station
Fig. 1 In case of an error, no data packets to the receiving stations are lost.
Network redundancy
Rationale/Characteristics
High availability system type
Communication and media redundancy (1oo2 voting integrated)
CPU redundancy
no
Network redundancy
yes
Switchover
0 ms
Continuous dual-channel ability
yes
Communication redundancy
yes
Processing units (recommendation)
Master: M1 standard CPUs of the MPC, MC, MH families or better
Slave: M1 standard CPUs of the MX, MPC, MC, MH families or better
I/O peripheral
via MX CPU all from M1 standard module portfolio
Use of special hardware
no (straight software solution and standard Ethernet)
Topology/Networking
Protocol basis
Ethernet IEEE 802.3q, Ethertype 0x892D
Communication protocol
bluecom with redundancy enhancement (100% IEEE 802.3q
compatible)
Media redundancy
yes (2-channel, galvanically separated Ethernet networks)
Switches
Standard Ethernet IEEE 802.3q
Topologies
Star, bus, ring, mesh
Ring redundancy
possible via parallel application of MRP, STP and RSTP
Dimension
in compliance with IEEE 802.3 - max. 2000 m per network section
with fiber optic connection via FCS214 module
CPUs spatially separable
yes (see Dimension)
Time synchronization
integrated in network protocol;
Number of I/O stations
more than 100
Smart substations
yes, I/O stations can execute local applications for:
emergency operation, load separation or local logging
Parallel data traffic
yes, possible (Ethernet-based protocols and services, e.g. HTTP, FTP,
video stream, Modbus, OPC, MMS, ...)
216
Redundancy
Network redundancy
Interfaces
I/O peripheral
M1 standard module portfolio
Redundancy network
bluecom network variables
Field buses
Gateway function for CAN, Profibus DP, Profinet, Modbus, EtherCAT
via application possible
SCADA / control station & PDA
Standard protocols:
IEC61850, IEC61400-25, IEC60870-5-104, OPC DA,
Modbus TCP/UDP
Application development:
communication library M1Com and M1Com.NET
IT protocols
see M1 software (FTP, HTTP, SNTP, SMTP, … and security versions)
Configuration/Programming
Configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Remote configuration
yes (Ethernet LAN, Internet)
Network configuration
SolutionCenter (support via wizards)
Programming
M-PLC: IEC 61131-3 (IL, LD, FBD, ST, AS, SFC)
Editor
CoDeSys
Diagnostics/Monitoring
Redundancy status
yes
Error status
yes
Diagnostic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Statistic user interface (API)
yes, integrated
Network monitor
SolutionCenter
Network analysis
yes (by Wireshark plug-in, Wireshark data are generated
automatically on the controller)
Performance data
Master cycle time
1…1000 ms*
I/O cycle time
Minimum 200 μs for non-redundant applications
1 ms… 1000 ms for redundant applications*
I/O frame works
more than 100 stations*
Number of channels unrestricted (*, **) typically 400 .. 600 channels per station (1/3 analog, 2/3 digital)
Installation
Installation medium
CD ROM or network
Installation tool
SolutionCenter
Upgrading existing systems
possible via software / new CF card required
License protection
Data CF of the master CPUs is integrated dongle
System prerequisites
Automation equipment
M1 CPUs of the MX200 family or better (minimum 2 Ethernet
interfaces onboard)
Network
2x Ethernet 100 MBit/s or Gbit/s
Software
MSys / MxCCore / M-BASE V3.80 or higher
*
217
Limit value subject to CPU type, memory available, application size, number of exchangeable
variables, network bandwidth available and network and CPU load via non-redundant
applications
** No program-technical restriction
Redundancy
218
219
2
21
19
Individual. Attractive. Ergonomic.
HMI devices.
We have devoted 20 years of, what is now, our 40-year company history
to the areas of »Human Machine Interfaces«, abbreviated as HMIs.
Always oriented to the specific needs of our business partners and the
target industries, Bachmann electronic offers a complete product line
of visualization systems in different performance classes and for a wide
variety of implementation areas.
All HMIs are developed and manufactured in our main facility in Feldkirch
in Austria. In order to offer our customers the highest level of investment
protection possible, all components are selected by our development team
according to the premises of long-term availability and stablity.
To acheive this, the experienced engineers use industrial-grade components
exclusively. In addition, every visualization device is subjected to a 48-hour
run-in test in the climate chamber prior to delivery, and the specified
operating temperature range is run through several times.
A competitive advantage for Bachmann customers: with the Vis Designer,
as an easy-to-use, powerful project planning tool, which is included in the
standard scope of delivery, machine and plant visualizations can be quickly
and efficiently created for all HMIs.
220
Operator terminals
The optimal operator terminal for every application.
With the series OT100, OT200 and
OT1300 operator terminals, Bachmann
electronic offers operator terminals
in different performance classes. The
devices of the Essential class, OT100,
are display devices that are primarily
designed for simple text-based
presentation in conjunction with
a powerful M1 CPU. With the devices of
the Intermediate class, OT200, the user
gets a »self-contained«, i.e. full-fledged
5.7" terminal based on PC technology
with embedded Linux as the operating
system. The brand new Advanced class
OT1300 series – based on Intel's latest
Atom E640 processor and integrated solid
state disk (SSD) or alternatively with
AMD G-T40E Dualcore processor – is the
ideal application for requirements where
high performance capability paired with
Operator terminal
OT100 series
Features
Display: 4.2” STN Bluemode
Processor: 72 MHz 32 bit
RAM: 64 kB internal
Interfaces: RS232/422
Project planning: Vis Designer, PLC blocks
Operator terminal
OT200 series
Features
Display: 5.7” QVGA, 5.7” VGA, color TFT,
opt. touch screen
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ UDMA 2 GB
Operating system: embedded Linux
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS232
Project planning: Vis Designer, Java programming
221
Operator terminals
shallow mounting depth and different
screen diagonals are demanded.
For visualization under extreme
climatic conditions, condensation-proof
»coldclimate« devices are available in
all performance classes. Devices for
use in marine applications (indicated in
the product designation with »M«) have
a galvanically isolated supply voltage
and, depending on the model, they have
typical marine features, such as internal
signal encoders, a floating relay output,
etc. In conjunction with Bachmann's
own project planning tool, Vis Designer,
visualizations can be quickly and easily
implemented with all device series.
Consistent application of industrialgrade components guarantees long-term
availability and thus investment security.
Operator terminal
OT1300 series
Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA / 19"
SXGA color TFT, opt. touch screen
Processor:
Intel Atom E640 1.0GHz /
AMD G-T40E 2x 1.0 GHz
RAM: 1 GB DDR2 / 2 GB DDR3
Ultrafast CFast mass memory
Interfaces: 1x GBit Ethernet, 4x USB2.0
Standard operating temperature: 0 ... 60 °C, fanless
Operating system: Linux embedded, Windows 7
embedded, Windows XP embedded
Project management: Vis Designer, Java programming
222
Operator terminals
Operator terminal OT100 series
The devices are equipped with a full graphic
4.2" STN display. With use of UTF-8 character
coding many lines of Asiatic and Cryillic
characters can be displayed. The brightness
of the LED backlighting can be controlled with
the PLC program or via the input elements.
With the ability to operate at temperatures
from -30° to +60 °C, these terminals
are predestined for use under extreme
conditions where dependability is a must.
Communication with the M1 controller
occurs through an integrated interface
that can be programmed to either
the RS232 or RS422 standard.
The arrangement and design of the control
elements, including an alphanumeric multi-click
keyboard are oriented to the familiar operating
philosophy of mobile phones. For better tactile
feel the keys are embossed and have integrated
snap disks. The aluminum front panel with
inlayed front foil underlines the sophisticated
and robust character of the terminal.
• Full-graphic 4.2" STN Bluemode display with
240 x 64 pixels
• Model-dependent operating/display elements:
5x softkeys, alphanumeric multi-click keyboard,
1x Exit key, 1x Shift key, 1x keyboard entry
lock/unlock key, 1x Backspace key, cursor
directional pad with Enter key and 3 LEDs
• Convenient project planning via Vis Designer
• Character coding with UTF-8
• Operating temperature range
from -30° … +60 °C
Item
OT115/R/BE1
OT115/R/BE2
OT115/R/BE2/CC
Item no.
00014569-00
00014570-00
00017593-00
CC ... coldclimate ( ) variant
223
Operator terminals
OT100 series
OT115/R/BE1
OT115/R/BE2
OT115/R/BE2/CC
Display
Diagonal/resolution
4.2” STN Bluemode (240 x 64 pixels)
Display brightness
450 cd/m2
Backlight
LED: dimmable via keyboard / PLC program
Processor/RAM
Processor
72 MHz 32 bit
RAM
64 kB internal
Control/display elements
Front keyboard
Softkeys
5x
5x
Enter
1x
1x
Cursor keys
4x
4x
Multi-click keyboard
-
alphanumeric
Exit
-
1x
Shift
-
1x
Keyboard entry
-
1x lock/unlock
Backspace
-
1x
-
1x red LED
2x yellow LEDs
Display elements
RS232 / 422 (switchable)
1x
Power supply*
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V), 10 ms buffering
Certifications
CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage /
operation
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-20 °C .. +60 °C fanless
-30 °C .. +60 °C fanless
-30 °C .. +80 °C
-40 °C .. +85 °C
5 %.. 95 %
without condensation
5 %.. 95 %
with condensation
Certifications
CE, UL, GL; pending: ABS, BV, DNV, LR
Degree of protection
Front / Rear
IP65 / IP20
Software
Visualization
project planning: Vis Designer / programming: Java, C, PLC environment
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
170 x 128 x 50 mm
170 x 160 x 50 mm
170 x 160 x 50 mm
approx. 1 kg
approx. 1 kg
approx. 1 kg
Variants
OT115/R/BE1
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with cross
elements, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C ..
+80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with AlphaNum key, operating temp. -20°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -30 °C ..
+80 °C, rel. humidity operation 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT115/R/BE2/CC
4.2“ STN-Bluemode display (240x64 Pixel), 1x RS232, front panel with AlphaNum key, operating temp. -30°C .. +60°C, storage temperature -40 °C ..
+85 °C, rel. humidity operation5 .. 95 % with condensation
* In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
Interface
224
Operator terminals
Operator terminal OT200 series
The OT200 operator terminal series offers an
inexpensive entry into the world of visualization
devices. Smaller visualization applications in
the renewable energies, industry, and marine
areas are the ideal implementation area of the
operator terminals. The system is connected
to the automation via Ethernet, in addition the
device has two USB2.0 interfaces. The system
is ideally designed for Java visualizations.
The operator terminal comes with a color TFT
display and dimmable LED backlight in various
screen resolutions. The operator terminal is
operated via a touch screen and / or a keyboard
integrated in the front panel. In the marine version,
OT205V/M, the device has an internal signal
encoder, as well as a floating relay output.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extremely compact and powerful
Fanless operation up to +50 °C
Visualization with Bachmann Vis Designer
5.7" color TFT monitor with QVGA or VGA resolution
Optionally with keyboard integrated in the front panel
Marine version with GL approval and marine-typical
special functions
Item
OT205/BE1
OT205/V/BE1
OT205/V/BE2
OT205/M/BE1
OT205/V/BE1/CC
Item no.
00018216-00
00018218-00
00018221-00
00018217-00
00018219-00
V ... VGA resolution
M ... maritime variant
CC ... coldclimate ( ) variant
225
Operator terminals
OT200 series
OT205/V/
BE1
OT205/BE1
OT205/M/
BE1
OT205/V/
BE2
OT205/V/
BE1/CC
Display
Diagonal/resolution
5.7" QVGA
(320 x 240)
5.7” VGA
(640 x 480)
Display type
Color TFT
Display brightness
700 cd / m²
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM
512 MB
Mass storage
CF card
≥ UDMA 2 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
analog resistive
Front keyboard
Softkeys
-
11x
-
Enter
-
1x
-
Cursor keys
-
4x
-
Multi-click keyboard
-
alphanumeric
-
Exit
-
1x
-
Shift
-
1x
-
2
-
System LED
optional 5x
Status LED
Run, Init, Error
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100
1x
USB 2.0
2x
RS232
1x
Buzzer
-
1x
Floating relay output
-
1x
Power supply*
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC, GL
Ambient conditions
Standard
Operating temperature
0°C .. +60°C fanless**
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage / operation
Marine
-15 .. +50°C
Standard
0°C .. +60°C
fanless**
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60°C
-20 .. +85°C
-40 .. +85°C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95 %
with
condensation
226
Operator terminals
Continuation
Operator terminal OT200 series
OT200 series
OT205/BE1
OT205/V/
BE1
OT205/M/
BE1
OT205/V/
BE2
OT205/V/
BE1/CC
Software
Operating system
Visualization
Linux embedded
Vis Designer / Java
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
212 x 156 x 49 mm
approx. 2 kg
Variants
OT205/BE1
Display: 5,7"; QVGA (320x240); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. 0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT205/V/BE1
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz;
RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. 0°C.. +60 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85°C, rel. humidity
5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT205/V/BE2
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); AlphaNumKB;
CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM: 512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth
10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232; operating temp. 0°C.. +60°C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/M/BE1
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1x Buzzer;
1x potential free relay output; 1xRS232; operating temp -15°C.. +50 °C;
storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C, rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT205/V/BE1/CC
Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:
512MB-DDR; CF-Card-Slot; 1xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB2.0; 1xRS232;
operating temp. -30°C.. +60°C; rel. humitdity operation 5 .. 95 % with
condensation; storage temp. -40°C..+85°C, 5 .. 95 % short-term
condensation (≤60 min)
*
**
227
In the case of OTs for marine applications the supply voltage is galvanically isolated.
For details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
Operator terminals
228
Operator terminals
Operator terminal OT1300 series
The new OT1300 series combines ultra-modern
technology, performance and durability with an
attractive and sleek design. The OT1300 series
is the ideal decision for visualization applications
in the areas of renewable energies, industry and
marine. Condensation-proof coldclimate models
guarantee highest availability even under extremely
demanding ambient conditions. Consistent use
of industrial grade components guarantees longterm availability and thus investment security.
• Processor/RAM:
Intel Atom E640 1.0 GHz / 1GB RAM
AMD G-T40E 2x 1.0 GHZ / 2 GB RAM
• 4 GB SLC SSD onboard (E640 platform)
• Ultrafast CFast mass memory
• Interfaces (standard device): 1x GBit Ethernet,
4x USB2.0
• Standard operating temperature: 0 ... +60 °C,
fanless
• Enhanced temperature range (coldclimate):
-30 .. +60 °C
• Operating systems: embedded Linux, Windows XP
embedded (optional)
• Cut-out-compatible for IPC300 / WT300 series
Item
OT1310/BE1/AE1G0
OT1310/BE1/CC /AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/CC /AE1G0
OT1315/BE1/AE1G0
OT1319/BE1/AE1G0
OT1310/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1312/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1315/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1319/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0
CC
M
... coldclimate ( ) variant
... maritime variant
other models on request
229
Item no.
00018300-00
00018305-00
00018302-00
auf Anfrage
00018303-00
00018304-00
auf Anfrage
auf Anfrage
auf Anfrage
auf Anfrage
auf Anfrage
00021833-00
auf Anfrage
00021831-00
Operator terminals
OT1300-Serie
OT1310/BE1/
AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/
AE1G0
OT1310/BE1/CC/
AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/
CC/AE1G0
10.4” VGA
(640x480)
12.1” SVGA
(800x600)
OT1315/BE1/
AE1G0
OT1319/BE1/
AE1G0
15” XGA
(1024x768)
19" SXGA
(1280x1024)
400 cd / m²
350 cd / m²
Display
Diagonal
Display type
Display brightness
Color TFT
450 cd / m²
450 cd / m²
Half-brightness
Processor/RAM
Processor
min. 50,000 h
coldclimate (CC)
Standard
Intel Atom E640T 1.0 GHz
Intel Atom E640 1.0 GHz
RAM
1 GB
Mass storage
SSD
onboard 4 GB SLC
CFast card (optional)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type*
≥ 4 GB
coldclimate (CC)
Standard
analog resistive, glass front
System LEDs
analog resistive, membrane front
Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000
MBit
1x
USB 2.0
4x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems
Linux embedded
Windows XP Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7 **
Visualization
Ambient conditions
Vis Designer / Java
coldclimate (CC)
Standard
Operating temperature
-30 .. +60 °C fanless
0 .. +60 °C fanless
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85 °C
-20 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
*
**
310 x 234 x 54 mm
341 x 253 x 54 mm
406 x 308 x 62 mm
471 x 375 x 62 mm
approx. 2.5 kg
approx. 4.0 kg
approx. 5.0 kg
approx. 6.5 kg
Customer-specific front panel on request
Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
230
Operator terminals
Continuation
Operator terminal OT1300 series
OT1300-Serie
OT1310/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1312/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1315/BE1/
GT1G0
OT1319/BE1/
GT1G0
10.4” VGA
(640x480)
12.1” SVGA
(800x600)
15” XGA
(1024x768)
19" SXGA
(1280x1024)
400 cd / m²
350 cd / m²
Display
Diagonal
Display type
Display brightness
Color TFT
450 cd / m²
450 cd / m²
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD G-T40E 2x 1.0 GHz
RAM
2 GB
Mass storage
SSD
-
CFast card (optional)
≥ 4 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type*
analog resistive, membrane front
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000
MBit
1x
USB 2.0
4x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems
Linux embedded
Windows XP Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7 **
Visualization
Vis Designer / Java
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 .. +60 °C fanless
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Storage temperature
-20 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
*
**
***
231
310 x 234 x 68 mm
341 x 253 x 68 mm
406 x 308 x 76 mm
471 x 375 x 76 mm
approx. 2.5 kg
approx. 4.0 kg
approx. 5.0 kg
approx. 6.5 kg
Customer-specific front panel on request
Available from Q2/2013
Windows Embedded Standard 8 on request
Operator terminals
Continuation
Operator terminal OT1300 series
OT1300 series
OT1310/M/
BE1/AE1G0
OT1312/M/
BE1/AE1G0
OT1315/M/
BE1/AE1G0
OT1319/M/
BE1/AE1G0
10.4” VGA
(640x480)
12.1” SVGA
(800x600)
15” XGA
(1024x768)
19" SXGA
(1280x1024)
Display
Diagonal
Display type
Display brightness
Color TFT
450 cd / m²
450 cd / m²
Half-brightness
400 cd / m²
350 cd / m²
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
Intel Atom E640 1.0 GHz
RAM
1 GB
Mass storage
SSD
onboard 4 GB SLC
CFast card (optional)
≥ 4 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type*
analog resistive, membrane front
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Act
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000
MBit
2x
USB 2.0
4x
Floating relay output
Buzzer
1x
Power supply
Certifications**
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V, galvanically isolated)
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC, GL**, DNV**, ABS**, LR**, BV**
Software
Operating systems
embedded Linux
Windows XP Embedded
Windows Embedded Standard 7 ***
Visualization
VIS designer / Java
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-15 .. +60 °C fanless
Storage temperature
-20 .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
310 x 234 x 54 mm
341 x 253 x 54 mm
406 x 308 x 62 mm
471 x 375 x 62 mm
approx. 2.5 kg
approx. 4.0 kg
approx. 5.0 kg
approx. 6.5 kg
232
Operator terminals
Continuation
Operator terminal OT1300 series
OT1300 series
Variants
233
OT1310/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 10,4" VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; operating temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1310/BE1/CC/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 10,4" VGA (640x480); glass touch; CPU: E 640
@1 GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; operating temp. -30°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -40°C .. +85°C;
rel. humitdity: 5 .. 95 % temporary condensation (≤ 60min)
OT1310/M/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 10,4“ VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 2x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; 1x buzzer; 1x potential free relais output; operating temp. -15°C
.. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 10,4“ VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 2GB-DDR3; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit; 4x USB 2.0; operating
temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 %
without condensation
OT1312/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 12,1" SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; operating temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1312/BE1/CC/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 12,1" SVGA (800x600); glass touch;
CPU: E 640 @1 GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot;
1x Eth-GBit; 4x USB 2.0; operating temp. -30°C .. +60°C; storage temp.
-40°C .. +85°C; rel. humitdity: 5 .. 95 % temporary condensation (≤ 60 min)
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 12,1" SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: RAM: 2GB-DDR3; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit; 4x USB 2.0; operating temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 ..
95 % without condensation
OT1312/M/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 12,1“ SVGA (800x600); TTouch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 2x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; 1x buzzer; 1x potential free relais output; operating temp. -15°C
.. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
Operator terminals
Continuation
Operator terminal OT1300 series
OT1300 series
Variants
OT1315/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 15" XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit;
4xUSB 2.0; operating temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1315/M/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: 15“ XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1 GHz; RAM:
1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 2x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; 1x buzzer; 1x potential free relais output; operating temp. -15°C
.. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 15“ XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 2GB-DDR3; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit; 4xUSB 2.0; operating
temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 %
without condensation
OT1319/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 19" SXGA (1280x1024); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 1xEth-GBit;
4xUSB 2.0; operating temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
OT1319/M/BE1/AE1G0
Operator Terminal: 19“ SXGA (1280x1024); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1 GHz; RAM:
1GB-DDR2; SSD: 4GB onBoard; CFast-Card-Slot; 2x Eth-GBit;
4x USB 2.0; 1x buzzer; 1x potential free relais output; operating temp. -15°C
.. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without
condensation
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0
Operator Terminal: Display: 19“ SXGA (1280x1024); Touch; CPU: E 640 @1
GHz; RAM: 2GB-DDR3; CFast-Card-Slot; 1x Eth-GBit; 4xUSB 2.0; operating
temp. 0°C .. +60°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +80°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 %
without condensation
234
Web terminals
Perfect visualization at the machine.
The series 300 web terminals are
based on a powerful AMD Geode
LX800 processor. Series 300 models
are available with screens in different
diagonals and resolutions. For mass
storage the customer has the choice of
a classic hard disk or an industrial, and
thus robust, UDMA-CF card.
Integration of the web terminal in the
automation occurs via Ethernet; USB
is available as the interface for service
and operating elements. Combined with
the visualization package (Vis Designer)
included in the scope of delivery, the
terminals permit platform-independent
project planning of graphic user
interfaces (under Java on the basis
of a virtual machine).
Vxworks is used as the operating system.
This makes the devices immune to power
failures, even without the use of a costintensive uninterruptible power supply.
These devices are the ideal choice
wherever compactness and the highest
availability are demanded.
Web terminal WT300 series
Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA, color TFT,
opt. touch screen
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ 512 MB
Operating system: VxWorks®
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232
Visualization: Vis Designer,
Java programming
235
Web terminals
Web terminal WT300 series
The WT300 series of web terminals is a powerful
platform for Java visualization. The web terminal
comes with a color TFT display and is available in
various screen diagonals. The front panel can be
adapted to the customer's specific requirements.
The devices can be operated from a touch screen
and/or a customer-specific keyboard.
•
•
•
•
•
Powerful
Compact design
Fanless up to +50 °C
Visualization with Bachmann VIS Designer
10", 12" or 15" color TFT monitor
Item
WT310/BE1
WT312/BE1
WT315/BE1
Item no.
00014314-00
00014329-00
00014399-00
236
Web terminals
WT300 series
WT310/BE1
WT312/BE1
WT315/BE1
10.4" VGA (640 x 480)
12.1" SVGA (800x600)
15” XGA (1024x768)
Display
Diagonal/resolution
Display type
Display brightness
Color TFT
450 cd / m²
Half-brightness
350 cd / m²
250 cd / m²
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM
512 MB
Mass storage
CF card
≥ 512 MB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number
of keys
optional / max. 64
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Caps Lock
Interfaces
PS/2 connection
1x
Ethernet 10 / 100
2x
USB 1.1
2x
RS232
1x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating system
WindRiver VxWorks®
Visualization
Vis Designer / Java
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature*
0 °C .. 50 °C fanless**
Storage temperature
-20 °C .. +80 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95% without condensation
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
237
*
**
307 x 233 x 94 mm
307 x 256 x 97 mm
405 x 308 x 97 mm
approx. 5 kg
approx. 5 kg
approx. 6 kg
Other temperature ranges on request
For details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
Web terminals
WT300 series
Variants
WT310/BE1
Web Terminal: Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected]
MHz; RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card: 512MB; 2xEth 10/100MBit; 2xUSB1.1;
1xRS232/422/485; 1xPS2; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; rel. storage temp.
-20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
WT312/BE1
Web Terminal: Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: [email protected]
MHz; RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card: 512MB; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB1.1;
1x RS232/422/485; 1xPS2; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; rel. storage temp.
-20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
WT315/BE1
Web Terminal: Display: 15"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz;
RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card: 512MB; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB1.1;
1x RS232/422/485; 1xPS2; operating temp. 0°C.. +50°C; rel. storage temp.
-20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
238
Control terminals
Control and visualization compactly unified.
The control terminals of the CT200
and CT300 family enable controller
and visualization to be implemented
concurrently on a compact device
platform (PLC+HMI). The CT200 series
with 5.7" color TFT display offers a
lot of functionality wherever space is
at a premium; it is the ideal solution
for control and visualization of small
machines. The devices can either be
operated via touch screen or via a
customer-specific membrane keyboard
on the front panel.
As is the case for all HMIs offered by
Bachmann electronic, the aluminum front
panels can be adapted to all customer
desires relative to design, form and
function. The devices are mounted in
the control cabinet via clamp elements
attached on the rear.
The same languages (IEC 61131, C/C++
and Java) and tools are available for
programming and parameter assignment
that are available on the M1 automation
system. Visualization and control
project are created with the aid of the
integrated »SolutionCenter« development
environment and are presented together
in the Solution Perspective.
Control terminal CT200 series
Features
Display: 5.7" QVGA / 5.7" VGA, color TFT,
opt. touch screen
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ 512 MB
Operating system: VxWorks®
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, RS232 / 422 / 485, CAN
Visualization: Vis Designer, Java programming
239
Control terminals
Control terminal CT200 series
The CT200 series with 5.7" color TFT display is
an inexpensive entry into the world of combined
control and visualization devices. Extremely
compact, it is the optimal platform for control and
visualization of small machines.
The device has an RTC, a watchdog, as well as
512 kB remanent memory. The existing Compact
Flash card serves simultaneously as program
memory and mass storage for data or logging.
I/O units are connected as peripheral devices
optionally via Ethernet, CAN, or the serial
interface. PROFIBUS IO RT, CANopen and
Modbus TCP /RTU are available as protocols.
Simple visualizations can be created quickly and
without programming skills with the Vis Designer
integrated in the SolutionCenter.
Operator inputs can be executed via touch screen
or via the membrane keys integrated in the front
panel.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Control and visualization device
Ultra compact, fanless and without hard drive
5.7" also with VGA resolution
Programming: IEC 61131, C / C++
Visualization: Java, Vis Designer
Operating system VxWorks®
CANopen, PROFINET IO RT, Modbus TCP / RTU
Marine version with GL approval and marinetypical functions
Item
CT205/BE1
CT205/M/BE1
CT205/V/BE1
Item no.
00014221-00
00015970-00
00014336-00
240
Control terminals
CT200 series
CT205/BE1
CT205/M/BE1
CT205/V/BE1
Display
Diagonal/resolution
5.7” QVGA (320 x 240)
Display type
5.7” VGA (640 x 480)
Color TFT
Display brightness
350 cd / m²
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM
512 MB
CF card
≥ 512 MB
NVRAM
512 kB (battery buffered)
Interfaces
I/O interfaces
CAN 1 Mbit/s with software CANSync (master and slave)
PROFINET IO RT controller / device Modbus TCP Ethernet (client and server)
Modbus RTU RS232 (client and server)
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number of
keys
optional / max. 64
System LED
Run, Init, Error
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 / 100
2x
USB 2.0
2x
RS232 / 422 / 485
1x
CAN
1x
Buzzer
-
1x
-
Floating relay output
-
1x
-
Additional features
Power supply
Standards
Ethernet, real-time clock with rechargeable battery,
CPU-ID can be set via hex switch
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC, GL (pending)
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating system
Visualization
WindRiver VxWorks®
Vis Designer / Java
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature*
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
*
**
241
0 °C .. 50 °C fanless**
-20 °C .. +85 °C
5 .. 95% without condensation
Other temperature ranges on request
For details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
Control terminals
Continuation
Control Terminal CT200 series
CT200 series
CT205/BE1
CT205/M/BE1
CT205/V/BE1
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
212 x 156 x 49 mm
212 x 156 x 49 mm
approx. 2 kg
approx. 2 kg
Variants
CT205/BE1
Control Terminal: Display: 5,7"; QVGA (320x240); Touch; CPU: [email protected]
MHz; RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card:512MB; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB2.0;
1x RS232/422/485; 1x CAN, operating temp. 0°C.. +50 °C;
storage temp. -20°C .. +85 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
CT205/M/BE1
Control Terminal: Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected]
MHz; RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card:512MB; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB2.0;
1x RS232/422/485; 1x CAN, 1x buzzer; 1x potentialfree relay output;
operating temp. 0°C.. +50 °C; storage temp. -20°C..+85 °C; rel. humidity
5 .. 95% without condensation
CT205V/BE1
Control Terminal: Display: 5,7"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected]
MHz; RAM:512MB-DDR; CF-Card:512MB; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB2.0;
1x RS232/422/485; 1x CAN, operating temp. 0°C .. +50 °C; storage temp.
-20°C .. +85 °C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
242
243
2
24
43
Robust. Spacious. In conformance with standards.
Industrial PCs.
Robust industrial PCs are used in the automation sector for controlling
machines, networking plant components as well as for data acquisition
and image processing. Bachmann electronic's passively cooled IPC300
and IPC1400 panel PCs offer the ideal industrial PC for every task. The
remote displays of the Dx900 series allow visualization to be implemented
up to 100 m away from the central computer unit IPM1400. The front
panels of the operator units are made from aluminum and their function,
color and design can be adapted to customer requirements. The operating
elements required can be implemented as real machine pushbuttons, with
a foil keyboard or as touch screens. Whether complete standard system
or customer-specific solution Bachmann electronic always delivers 100 %
quality: precisely like the HMI devices all Bachman industrial PCs are
subjected to a 48-hour run-in test in the climate chamber, in which the
specified operating temperatures are run through multiple times. Naturally
compliance with the applicable industrial/product standards, as well as the
legally prescribed standards is ensured.
244
Industrial PC
Customized PC-based visualization devices – compact or modular.
The display diagonals, operating elements
and design of the compact IPC300 series
devices can be adapted to the customer's
needs. The modular IPC1400 series offers
scalable processing performance. It can
be factory fitted with a number of different interfaces or retrofitted quickly in the
field.
Maximum flexibility for applications requiring
a spatial separation between the controller
and the display / operator unit is offered by
the combination of IPM1400 with digital serial remote installation (DSA) and the remote
display of the Dx900 series. The Dx900's display diagonals, operating elements and design can be adapted to individual requirements.
Industrial PC IPC300 series
Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA, color
TFT, opt. touch screen, customer-specific front panel*
Processor: AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM: 512 MB
Compact Flash: ≥ 512 MB
2.5" hard disk: ≥ 40 GB
Operating system: Windows XP Embedded
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232
Industrial PC IPC1400 series
Features
Display: 10.4" VGA / 12.1" SVGA / 15" XGA /
19" SXGA, color TFT, touch screen, customer-specific
front panel*
Processor: Celeron M processor ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo processor L2400 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM: 1 GB / 2GB
Compact Flash: 4GB / 8GB
Operating system: Windows XP Embedded,
Windows 7
Slot system: PCI, HDD*
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232,
CF slot
* on request
245
Industrial PC
In order to ensure the lowest possible failure rate and maximum investment security,
Bachmann electronic places considerable importance on the selection of the components
used in terms of availability, mechanical resistance and suitability for industrial use.
246
Industrial PC
Industrial PC IPC300 series
The IPC300 compact industrial PC series serves as
HMI for visualization under windows. The industrial
PC comes with a color TFT display at various screen
diagonals. The visual design of the front panel as well
as the operating concept can be adapted to customer
requirements. The device is operated via a touch
screen and / or a customer-specific front keyboard.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compact design
Visualization under Windows
10", 12" or 15" color TFT monitor
2 Ethernet interfaces
Optional touch screen
Customer-specific front panel design
Item
IPC310 /BE1
IPC312 /BE1
IPC315 /BE1
Item No.
on request
00017609-00
00017227-10
... -00: equipped with hard disk
... -10: equipped with Compact Flash
247
Industrial PC
IPC300 series
IPC310/BE1
IPC312/BE1
IPC315/BE1
10.4" VGA (640x480)
12.1" SVGA (800x600)
15" XGA (1024x768)
450 cd / m²
350 cd / m²
Display
Diagonal/ main memory
Display type
Display brightness
color TFT
Half-brightness
300 cd / m²
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
AMD Geode LX800, 500 MHz
RAM
256 / 512 MB
Mass storage
CF card
≥ 512 MB
2.5" hard disk
≥ 160 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
analog resistive
Front keyboard / Number
of keys
optional / max. 64
System LEDs
Power, Diag, Caps Lock
Interfaces
PS/2 connection
1x
Ethernet 10 / 100
2x
USB 1.1
2x
RS232 / 422 / 485
1x
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems
Windows XP Embedded
Visualization
Vis Designer / Java
Software
Operating temperature*
Fanless
with CF card: 0 .. 50°C, with HDD: 0 .. 40°C
with fan
0 .. 50°C**
Storage temperature
-20 °C .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95% without condensation
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
*
**
307 x 233 x 94 mm
337 x 256 x 97 mm
405 x 308 x 97 mm
approx. 4.5 kg
approx. 5.0 kg
approx. 6.0 kg
other temperature ranges on request
for details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
248
Industrial PC
Continuation
Industrial PC IPC300 series
IPC300 series
Variants
IPC310/BE1
Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM: 12MB-DDR;
CF-Card: 4GB - WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB1.1; 1xRS232/422/485;
1xPS2; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
IPC312/BE1
Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:512MBDDR; CF-Card: 4GB - WXPP-FES; 2xEth 10/100MBit; 2x USB1.1; 1xPS2;
1xRS232/422/485; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C;
rel. humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
IPC315/BE1
Display: 15"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: [email protected] MHz; RAM:1GB-DDR;
CF-Card: 8GB - WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 2x USB1.1; 1xRS232/422/485;
1xPS2; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95% without condensation
249
Industrial PC
250
Industrial PC
Industrial PC IPC1400 series
The highly modular and compact IPC1400series is suitable for demanding visualizations.
The family relies on modularity,
Performance scalability and service friendly. The
system with TFT screens is available with different
diagonals to meet specific customer requirements.
The modular slot system enables the implementation of a wide range of slots such as PCI and PICe,
as well as the simultaneous use of different mass
storage technologies.
• Scalable industrial PC based on a Celeron M or
Core Duo processor
• Maximum reliability and maintenance friendly
• Modular slot system
• Customer-specific configuration and front panel
design
• Compact unit or computer with remote display
up to 100 m
Item
IPC1410/CM
IPC1410/CD
IPC1412/CM
IPC1412/CD
IPC1415/CM
IPC1415/CD
IPC1419/CD
CM
CD
251
Order No.
00016898-00
00016902-00
00016899-00
00016903-00
00016900-00
00016904-00
00016905-00
processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06GHz
processor Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
Industrial PC
IPC1400 series
IPC1410
IPC1412
10.4" VGA (640x480)
12.1" SVGA (800x600)
Display
Diagonal/resolution
Display type
Display brightness
color TFT
450 cd / m²
350 cd / m²
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
Celeron M ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM
1 GB / 2 GB
Mass storage
CF card type I+II
4 GB / 8 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Front keyboard / Number
of keys
analog resistive
on request / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
System LEDs
Power, Diag, HDD
Interfaces
Network
USB
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit
3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
Serial
2x RS232 / 422 / (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard
Audio
1x combined PS/2 connection
AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
External monitor
1x RGB, 1x DVI
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk (slot)
Slots* (module)
(optional) ≥ 160 GB or RAID1: 80 GB (24/7), other on request
max. 2x PCI, max. 2x PCIexpress (on request)
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems
Visualization
Windows XP Embedded, Windows 7
Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature**
Fanless
with fan
0 .. 50°C,
0 .. 50°C***
Storage temperature
-20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
*
**
***
****
314 x 237 x 110 mm****
337 x 256 x 110 mm****
approx. 5 kg
approx. 5 kg
in conjunction with RAID1 max. 1x PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible
other temperature ranges on request
for details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
without expansion / attachments (per expansion: +30 mm -> max. 2 expansions = +60 mm)
252
Industrial PC
Continuation IPC1400 series
IPC1400 series
Diagonal/resolution
IPC1415
IPC1419
15" XGA (1024x768)
19" SXGA (1240x1024)
Display type
Display brightness
color TFT
250 cd / m²
300 cd/m³
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Processor/RAM
Processor
Celeron M ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM
Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
1 GB / 2 GB
Mass storage
CF card type I+II
4 GB / 8 GB
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Front keyboard / Number
of keys
analog resistive
on request / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
System LEDs
Power, Diag, HDD
Status LEDs
optional: max. 64
Interfaces
Network
USB
Serial
2x Ethernet 10 / 100 MBit
3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
2x RS232 / 422 / 485 (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard
Audio
1x combined PS/2 connection
AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
External monitor
1x RGB, 1x DVI
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk (slot)
Slots* (module)
(optional) ≥ 40 GB or RAID1: 80 GB (24/7), on request
max. 2x PCI, max. 2x PCIexpress (on request)
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Certifications
CE, UL, CSA, CUL, CCC
Software
Operating systems****
Visualization
Windows XP Embedded, Windows 7
Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature**
Fanless
with fan
0 .. 40°C
0 .. 50°C***
Storage temperature
-20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
253
405 x 308 x 124 mm*****
470 (19") x 374.6 (9 U) x 121 mm*****
approx. 6 kg
approx. 12 kg
Industrial PC
Continuation IPC1400 series
IPC1400 series
Variants
IPC1410/BE1/CM1G1
Industrial PC: Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: Celeron M ULV
423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card: 4GBWXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; operating temp. 0°C ..
+50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1410/BE1/CD1G6
Industrial PC: Display: 10,4"; VGA (640x480); Touch; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; CFCard: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0;
2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
IPC1412/BE1/CM1G1
Industrial PC: Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: Celeron M
ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card:
4GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x
RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C ..+60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
IPC1412/BE1/CD1G6
Industrial PC: Display: 12,1"; SVGA (800x600); Touch; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; CFCard: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0;
2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
IPC1415/BE1/CM1G1
Industrial PC: Display: 15,1"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: Celeron M
ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz, 533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card:
4GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x
RS232/422; 1xPS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
IPC1415/BE1/CD1G6
Industrial PC: Display: 15,1"; XGA (1024x768); Touch; CPU: Core Duo
Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2;
CF-Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered
USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI;
1x VGA; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPC1419/BE1/CD1G6
Industrial PC: Display: 19"; SXGA (1240x1024); Touch; CPU: Core Duo
Prozessor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66 GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2;
CF-Card: 8GB- WXPP-FES; 2x Eth 10/100MBit;3x USB2.0; 1x powered
USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI;
1x VGA; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel.
humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
*
**
***
****
*****
in conjunction with RAID1 max. 1x PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible
other temperature ranges on request
for details regarding the maximum permissible ambient temperatures for different install positions
and install types, see section, »Device dimensions and ambient temperatures«
other operating systems on request
without expansion / attachments (per expansion: +30 mm -> max. 2 expansions = +60 mm)
254
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Displays with USB and CAN connectivity.
The Dx900 display series from Bachmann
electronic enables the spatial separation
between the display and operator unit and
the controller. The remote display and the
IPM1400 are connected via a 100 meter
cable using the serial remote installation
(DSA). The DSA itself is implemented as
a module of the IPM1400 cassette system
and ensures the interference free transfer
of video, USB and CAN signals from the central unit to the Dx900 series display. USB terminals on the display enable a wide range of
peripheral devices to be operated directly at
the interface between the user and machine.
CAN enables operating elements on the display to be connected directly with the controller hardware. A customized cable can be supplied on request.
Remote displays DD900 series
Features
Display: 15" XGA / 19" SXGA, color TFT, touch
screen, customer spec. front panel*
Remote: 100 m, video, USB, CAN
Protection: front IP65 / rear IP54
Housing: stand-alone, aluminum housing,
Support arm connection
*
on request
Remote displays DF900 series
Features
Display: 15" XGA / 19" SXGA, color TFT, touch
screen, customer specific front panel*
Remote: 100 m, video, USB, CAN
Protection: front IP65 / rear IP20
Housing: control cabinet mounting
*
255
on request
Headless IPCs and remote displays
The display diagonals, operating elements
and design of the 900 series can also be
adapted to individual requirements.
The control panels of the 900 series are
available in two variants to meet different
mounting requirements: the DD900 series
comes with a modern aluminum housing
with protection to IP65 at the front and
IP54 at the rear. The DF900 devices are
designed with a mounting depth less than
60 millimeters for control cabinet mounting. Aluminum frontpanels with a decorative film and an all-round seal also ensure
protection to IP65 (front).
Cabinet PC IPM1400
Features
Processor: Celeron M processor ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo processor L2400 2x 1.66 GHz
RAM: 1 GB / 2GB
Operating system: Windows XP Embedded
Slot system: PCI, HDD*
Interfaces: Ethernet, USB, PS/2, RS232,
CF slot
* on request
256
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Remote displays
DD900 series
The DD900 remote display is an industrial control
panel in a modern aluminum housing. The design and
operating elements can be adapted to the customer's
requirements.
The integrated USB interface enables a wide range
of peripherals to be connected directly on the terminal. CAN enables operating elements on the remote
display to be connected directly with the controller
hardware without requiring any additional wiring.
• Remote installation between control panel and
IPM up to 100 m
• Mounting on support arm
• Transfer of video, USB and CAN signals via one cable
Item
DD915
DD919
257
Item No.
on request
on request
Headless IPCs and remote displays
DD900 series
DD915
DD919
Display
Diagonal/resolution
Display type
Display brightness
Half-brightness
15" XGA (1024x768)
19" SXGA (1280x1024)
color TFT
300 cd / m²
min. 50,000 h
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Front keyboard / Number of
keys
Interfaces
Power supply
Operating temperature
Certifications
Housing
analog resistive
optional / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
1x USB (rear)
CAN (rear)
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
0°C .. 40°C, fan-free
CE, UL, CUL
aluminum
Degree of protection (front)
IP65
Degree of protection (rear)
IP54
258
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Remote displays
DF900 series
The remote display DF900 is an industrial terminal in
flat design. Design and control elements of the front
panel can be adapted to the customer's requirements.
The integrated USB interface enables a wide range
of peripherals to be connected directly on the terminal. CAN enables operating elements on the remote
display to be connected directly with the controller
hardware without requiring any additional wiring.
• Remote installation between control panel and IPM
up to 100 m
• Mounting in the cabinet
• Transfer of video, USB and CAN signals via one cable
• Slimline remote terminal
Item
DF915
DF919
259
Item No.
on request
on request
Headless IPCs and remote displays
DF900 series
DF915
DF919
15" XGA (1024x768)
19" SXGA (1280x1024)
Display
Diagonal/resolution
Display type
color TFT
Display brightness
300 cd / m²
Half-brightness
min. 50,000 h
Control/display elements
Touch screen type
Front keyboard / Number of
keys
analog resistive
optional / max. 128, 2-fold programmable
System LEDs
Power, DIAG
Interfaces
Power supply
Operating temperature
Certifications
Housing
2x USB (rear)
1x CAN (rear)
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
0°C .. +50°C, fan-free
0°C .. +45°C, fan-free
CE, UL, CUL
aluminum
Degree of protection (front)
IP65
Degree of protection (rear)
IP20
260
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Cabinet PC
IPM1400
The IPM1400 cabinet PC while inconspicuous is the
powerful and reliable brain of the well-designed
Dx900 series terminals. The configuration varies
depending on the application, and most I/Os as
well as additional cards are individually arranged.
• Powerful and scalable cabinet PC based on
Celeron M and Core Duo processors
• Individual configuration of the PC using
expansion units
Item
IPM1400/CM1G1/A
IPM1400/CD1G6/X
IPM1400/CD1G6/AX
CM
CD
...
...
Item No.
on request
on request
on request
processor Celeron M ULV 423 1.06GHz
processor Core Duo L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
Interfaces
Remote displays
DD900, DF900
RGB
External displays
DVI
TFT monitor
USB devices
Ext. hard disk
Modem
Printer
USB hub
Keyboard
Mouse
Web cam
Serial devices
DSA (optional)
max. 100 m
USB1-4
COM1-2
Cabinet PC
IPM1400A, IPM1400R, IMP1400RA
Audio devices
AC97
RAID slot
PS/2
RAID 1
Ethernet 1-2
Slot system
Wide slot
(max.)
* on request
261
Narrow slot
(max. 2)
Expansion modules
S-ATA devices
PCI
PCI express
Hard disk 2.5" *
Video
Remote installation up
to 100 m*
Modem / mouse
Emergency supply
(UPS)
Networking
Barcode reader
Loudspeaker
Headset
Microphone
Input device
Keyboard
Mouse
Networking
Control
Control room
Headless IPCs and remote displays
IPM1400 series
IPM1400/CM1G1/A
IPM1400/CD1G6/X
IPM1400/CD1G6/AX
Processor/RAM
Processor system*
RAM
Celeron-M processor
ULV 423 1.06 GHz
Core Duo processor L2400, 2x 1.66 GHz
1 GB
2 GB
Mass storage
2.5" Flash disk
CF card type I+II
4 GB
-
Interfaces
Network
2x Ethernet 10/100
USB
3x USB 2.0 + 1x powered USB 2.0
Serial
2x RS232 / 422 / (also configurable as full RS232)
Mouse / keyboard
1x combined PS/2 connection
Audio
AC97, 1x Line-In, 1x Line-Out, 1x MIC
System LEDs
External monitor
Power, Diag, HDD
1x VGA, 1x DVI, 1x DSA
1x VGA, 1x DVI
1x VGA, 1x DVI, 1x DSA
Expansion modules
2.5" hard disk
-
Slots*****
≥ 80 GB (24/7), RAID 1
max. 2x PCI or 2x PCIexpress
Power supply
24 V DC (18 V .. 36 V)
Tested acc. to
CE, UL, CUL, CSA, CC
Software
Operating systems***
Visualization
Windows XP Professional (FES), Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Vis Designer / Java, other visualizations at customer's request
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature**
0°C .. 50°C fan-free
Storage temperature
-20 .. +60 °C
Rel. humidity operation /
storage
5 .. 95 % without condensation
Dimensions and devices
Dimensions (W x H x D)
*
**
256 x 288 x 126 mm
(incl. mounting plate,
without expansion unit)
other processors on request
other temperature ranges on request
256 x 288 x 156 mm
(incl. mounting plate
and expansion unit)
***
****
other operating systems on request
optional, IPM1400R / IPM1400RA, max. 1x
PCI or 1x PCIe slot possible
262
Headless IPCs and remote displays
Continuation
Cabinet PC IPM1400
IPM1400 series
Variants
IPM1400/CM1G1/A
Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Celeron M ULV 423 (1M Cache, 1.06 GHz,
533 MHz FSB); RAM:1GB-DDR2; CF-Card: 4GB - WXPe; 2x Eth 10/100MBit;
3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2; 1x Line-in, 1x LineOut, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; 1x DSA; operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C;
storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5 .. 95 % without condensation
IPM1400/CD1G6/X
Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66
GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; HDD: RAID1-2x160GB WXPP-FES;
2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA;
operating temp. 0°C.. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
IPM1400/CD1G6/AX
263
Industrial PC: Headless; CPU: Core Duo Processor L2400 (2M Cache, 2x 1.66
GHz, 667 MHz FSB); RAM:2GB-DDR2; HDD: RAID1-2x160GB WXPP-FES;
2x Eth 10/100MBit; 3x USB2.0; 1x powered USB2.0; 2x RS232/422; 1x PS2;
1x Line-in, 1x Line-Out, 1x Mic; 1x DVI; 1x VGA; 1x DSA
operating temp. 0°C .. +50°C; storage temp. -20°C .. +60°C; rel. humidity 5
.. 95 % without condensation
Headless IPCs and remote displays
264
265
Intuitive. Intelligent. Platform-independent.
Engineering software
from Bachmann electronic.
In the automation of plants and machines software has become an essential
component. As an innovative provider Bachmann electronic also establishes
the state of the technology in this area as well and enables groundbreaking
future solutions, such as the Bachmann SolutionCenter. With a series of
the latest software engineering and diagnostic tools we support rapid and
convenient realization of programs for machine sequence, process control,
visualization, and not least, communication with the outside world.
»Time-to-market« is no longer just a buzz word,
rather it is a principle that is lived.
With engineering software from Bachmann electronic you rely
on complete solutions that have been thought-through in the
details; solutions that increase the productivity and sovreignty of
your applications, that free-up resources for your core business,
and that can also be used reliably in the distant future.
266
The SolutionCenter – overview
A milestone in the reduction of engineering costs.
As part of a unique, complete software
solution, the Bachmann SolutionCenter
covers all aspects of the engineering
process – configuration, programming,
controlling/regulation, communication,
Motion, visualization, as well as test and
commissioning. Thanks to the highly
modular Eclipse plug-in concept, the
tool can be easily expanded, even for
integrated user-specific requirements.
Matched in the best manner possible to the
devices and systems of the manufacturer,
it provides time savings, brings synergies,
and increases usability. Users benefit from
the cohesive operating concept and avoid
redundant entry or unnecessary manual
entry. A close linking to the automation
systems of Bachmann electronic enables
simplifications in virtually all processes.
Programming
Visualization
- C / C+ +, Java
- IEC 61131 (CoDeSys)
- Safety Editor
- M-JVIS (configured)
- Java (programmed)
Controlling /
regulating
Motion
- Softmotion (SMC)
- Shaft
- CNC
267
- Temperature
controller
- Injection module
- MATLAB® / Simulink®
Configuring
Test / diagnostics
- Hardware and
software
- PROFINET
- CANopen
- Safety Developer
-
Commissioning
Scope / monitoring
Diagnostic tools
Teleservice
SolutionCenter – overview
Configuring
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controller structure offline
Configuration of the hardware modules
Configuration of the fieldbuses
Management and use of pre-defined
hardware and software modules
Assignment of signal designations
Archiving, export and import of subsystems
or complete control systems
Controlling and regulating
•
•
•
Programming
•
•
•
•
C/C++
IEC 61131 (CoDeSys, Safety PLC)
MATLAB®/Simulink®
Java
Motion
•
Visualizing
•
•
•
•
Vis Designer for configured visualizations
Libraries for Java programming
DLL for Windows™ programming
OPC server
M-Target for Simulink®
Eclipse plug-ins
Temperature controller (M-TEMP)
Motion Control
• Softmotion (M-SMC)
• Shaft (M-SHAFT)
• Three-dimensional motion (M-CNC)
Testing and diagnostics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Software oscilloscope
Remote monitoring
Log books
Task lists with runtime measurement
Error lists in the error handler
Excerpt of the controller log
Direct access to I/O signals
Variables browser
Internet-capable communication
268
Delivery Variants
Delivery variants M-Base
The complete product range of the engineering
software from Bachmann electronic is delivered
in a software package. For different applications,
derivatives are made available which are tailored
to the needs of individual users.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Device configuration & system settings
Fieldbus configuration
Right of accesses
Programming in C/C++, IEC61131
Safe programming
Visualization project
Comprehensive system diagnostics
Many monitoring functions
Project and diagnostic reports
Items
M-Base One-time License
M-Base Annual Maintenance
M-Base COM One-time License
M-Base COM Annual Maintenance
M-Base SC One-time License
M-Base SC Annual Maintenance
M-Base SC Light One-time License
M-Base SC Light Annual Maintenance
M-Base Device Viewer One-time
License
M-Base Device Viewer Annual
Maintenance
269
Item Nr.
00015629-60
00015629-70
00015778-60
00015778-70
00018914-60
00018914-70
00018888-60
00018888-70
00015845-60
00015845-70
Ausführungsvarianten
Delivery variants
M-Base
M-Base One-time License
Complete engineering package for configuration, programming
and modeling for the Bachmann M1. The product support and the
updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base Annual Maintenance
extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
M-Base SC One-time License
SolutionCenter for configuration and diagnostic, programming
in C/C++, visualization tool and Safety Developer. The product
support and updates within one year are included in the license.
M-Base SC Annual Maintenance
extension of the product support and updates for one year longer.
M-Base SC Light One-time License
SolutionCenter with Device Manager for pure configuration and
diagnostic for the M1 controller system. The product support and
the updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base SC Light Annual Maintenance
extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
M-Base Device Viewer One-time
License
Device Viewer for pure monitoring of the M1 controller system.
The product support and the updates of one year are included in
the license.
M-Base Device Viewer Annual
Maintenance
extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
M-Base COM One-time License
communication library for MVIS visualizations. The product
support and the updates of one year are included in the license.
M-Base COM Annual Maintenance
extension of the product support and updates for one year longer
270
Configuration
Merging hardware, fieldbuses, and software into a unit.
The expenses for design, wiring, and
commissioning of a machine represent
a considerable share of the engineering
costs. Bachmann electronic supports the
user on all levels with convenient and
innovative tools. From the planning of
the control topology and the configuration of fieldbuses to the wiring test
and to installation of software modules,
one tool can be used that permits flexible
adaptation to a wide variety of tasks
with its consistent operating concept.
The Device Manager as part of the
SolutionCenter is the central point for
all configuration and diagnostics tasks.
Device Manager
The Device Manager is the integrated tool for
configuration and commissioning of all automation
devices from Bachmann electronic. The entire
M1 controller family, the panel PLCs from the
CT series, the terminals of the WT series, but
also standard-conformant fieldbus nodes from
third-party suppliers are supported by this
tool. Through the capability for complete offline
engineering work can start before the hardware is
available. The flowing alternation between offline
and online configuration in both directions is not
only possible for the complete controller, it is
also possible for the exchange and archiving of
individual hardware and software modules, as well
as for complex fieldbus configurations.
The work area is consistently organized for all
topics in a configurator window and a monitor
window. The Cnfigurator shows the saved target
status that will be valid after the next system
startup, the monitor shows the actual status and
allows manual change of values and settings.
The hardware structure is presented in the real
topology. The type of networking via proprietary
and standardized bus systems is presented
through the organization of a tree structure;
the I / O modules can be uniquely detected
and directly operated through the graphic
presentation. Thus the wiring test can be executed
immediately after switching on the system.
The software for the controller is also managed
in the Device Manager. The system packages
from Bachmann electronic are summarized in a
catalog. All the software is updated conveniently
271
Configuration
via a wizard that guides the user through the
procedure. In addition to the provided system
packages, the user can also put together and
manage his own, machine-specific packages and
transfer them to other PCs. Thus unique software
states can be assured on all systems and on all
service PCs.
The variable set of all participating controllers is
presented in a structured manner in a separate
view. Searching for values is facilitated through an
automatic full-text search; a selection of relevant
values can be summarized, saved, and reloaded in
an additional window. Through a trend display the
temporal progression of values can be graphically
presented.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One interface for all Bachmann devices
Managing devices
Backup of existing devices
Offline configuration of entire control systems
or individual HW / SW modules
Offline and online configuration of fieldbuses
(CAN, PROFINET RT and IRT, PROFIBUS DP,
EtherCAT)
The same mode of operation for online and
offline devices
Consistent concept: Monitor (actual status)
and configurator (target status)
Graphic presentation of the I / O modules
Configuration and diagnostics in one tool
Software is managed in catalogs, user-specific
catalogs
Flexible compilation of functional window areas
(perspectives)
272
Testing and diagnostics
Monitoring and debugging for every implementation area.
Bachmann M1 automation systems are
designed for a broad user spectrum.
More extensive than is the case with
the conventional solutions for industrial
automation, the support for experts
was considered right from the start.
Monitoring and debugging tools for
every implementation area, from
the signal test of the control cabinet
builder to section identification of
the control system engineer, shorten
commissioning times and increase overall
transparency – as is the case with with
the Scope in the Device Manager.
Scope (SolutionCenter)
In the initial project planning and also for
commissioning or troubleshooting, transparent
information concerning states and sequences of
n automatic system is essential for success.
For many dynamic processes seeing a physical
variable as only a numeric value is insufficient.
The software oscilloscope »Scope« in
SolutionCenter makes the temporal progression
of processes visible and places this progression in
relation to other process variables.
The Scope is an indispensable tool for optimization
of a controller setting, for troubleshooting in a
sequential program, or for ongoing verification of
the manufacturing process on the machine.
It permits specific recording and subsequent
scanning and evaluation of a great number of
values in parallel. Different trigger conditions,
as well as a pretrigger functionality enable
acquisition of the prehistory, for example in the
case of sporadically occurring errors. Calculation
of additional curves from the recording values
facilitates retrospective analysis.
A special exchange format enables saving and
sending of the recording configuration and entered
values in one and the same file. Thus, for example,
Scope recordings can be forwarded per email
and further processed by the recipient in their
full extent (zoom, measurement with cursors,
calculated curves, etc.)
273
Testing and diagnostics
• Recording of analog and digital values
as well as bit-coded status words
• Real-time acquisition directly on the controller
• Long-term recordings per trend capture directly
on the PC
• Large number of signals (multiple acquisition
tasks possible)
• High resolution / variable sampling priority
• Versatile trigger possibilities / pre-triggers
• Graphic evaluation / curve display on the PC
• Measurement of curves
• Scaling / shifting of curves and calculated curves
• Overlay of reference curves
• Archiving / export on the PC
• Completely integrated in the SolutionCenter
274
Testing and diagnostics
Continuation Scope
Scope
General
Acquisition system
Stand-alone real-time recorder on the controller (Scope) value scans
from the SolutionCenter (trending)
Configuration
Graphic configuration interface in the SolutionCenter
Presentation interface
Diagram display with dynamic legend in the SolutionCenter
Acquisition system
Ascertainable data sources
Channel values direct (MIO), SVI variables
Data types
all analog and digital formats, as well as bit-coded variables
(e.g. status word/control word)
Ascertainable tasks
SVI variables of any number of software modules is also possible
simultaneously from different controllers
Sampling modes
scope mode: Ongoing, triggered once, triggered cyclically
trend mode: ongoing
Sampling rate
scope mode: from 500μs (depending on the target system)
trend mode: from 100 ms (polled by the SolutionCenter)
Triggers
start and stop triggers for recording separate
Flank triggering/value triggering
Pretriggers
Data quantities
>100,000 points per record overall
> 64 curves (performance-dependent)
Interface
SVI variable interface (can also be used by controller applications
without SolutionCenter)
Scaling
multiple acquisition tasks with different configuration
(sampling rate, priority, monitoring variable, etc.) possible in parallel
Display/analysis system
275
Presentation forms
Value-over-time [x(t)], value-over-value [x(y)]
Time formats
Milliseconds [ms] or date/time formats
Number of value axes
user-defined (virtual <16)
Number of curves
user-defined (virtual <32 in normal view)
Testing and diagnostics
Continuation Scope
Scope
Display/analysis system
Axis reference
each curve can be allocated to any axis
Auto-scaling
yes
Fixed scaling
yes, adjustable
Scale arrangement
Adjustable
Measurement cursors
2 (can be offset separately and together)
Measurement cursor
functions
value display in legend, time display, differential display
Grid
yes (x and y)
Presentation options
curves, axes, grid colors, all line thicknesses, orientation, axis label,
axis arrangement (left/right)
Raw value transformation
factor and offset per signal
Reference curves
yes (earlier recordings can be overlaid)
Operands
measured curve values, calculated curve values
Operations
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, integration, differentiation,
bit masking (e.g. for status word and control word)
Visualization integration
Scope
diagram interface and data communication for acquisition task
can be integrated in Vis Designer
Trend
diagram interface and cyclic acquisition of variable values can
be integrated in the Vis Designer application
Data retention
Recording configuration
can be exported/imported as file
Data types
all analog and digital formats, as well as bit-coded variables
(e.g. status word/control word)
Value storage
on the PC
Exchange formats
import / export in SCTE format contains recording configuration,
presentation settings, calculated curves and values, and enables further
processing independent of the acquisition computer
Excel interface
CSV export
276
Programming
Maximum performance for maximum stability.
Any automation platform is only as
good as the software that is available
for it. The stability, real-time capability
and performance of the runtime
system have the highest priorities.
The M1 automation system can be
programmed in the respective familiar
environment of the automation engineer:
All five languages of IEC 61131-3 are
supported, as are C, C++ or Java.
Also the model-based development via
UML-Design / coding or integration in
the function block editors of MATLAB® /
Simulink® are unique in the industrial
environment. Comprehensive, complete
provided libraries simplify the use even of
complex units from automation, motion
control, and information technology / web.
M-PLC programming interface
Features
Easy entry into IEC 61131-3
IT, ST, LD, FDB, CFC, QFB
Convenient debugging on the target system
with single-step, breakpoints, etc.
Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions
C / C++ Developer
Features
Languages: ANSI C and C++
Gnu compiler gcc
Automatic adaptation and management
of the computer environment
Editor and debugger based on Eclipse CDT
Intellisense: Automatic supplementation
of structure elements
Syntax highlighting
Folding code ranges, e.g. for complete while loops
277
Programming
M-PLC
Programming interface
PLC programming interface according to
IEC 61131-3
M-PLC is a complete development environment for
programming the M1 controller in accordance with
IEC 61131-3. The M-PLC puts a simple approach
to the powerful IEC language at the disposal of the
PLC programmer. Use of the edit and debugging
functions is based on the proven development
program environments of advanced programming
languages.
Controller
Controller
IEC61131
IEC61131
VxWorks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
SMI
VxWorks
• Easy entry into IEC 61131-3
• All languages defined in IEC standard 61131-3 are
supported (instruction list, structured text, ladder
diagram, function block diagram, continuous
function chart, sequential function chart).
• Editor and debugging functions
• Provided libraries with pre-finished and tested
functions
Programming
• Editors for programming in all IEC 61131-3
languages
IL
Instruction List
ST
Structured Text
LD
Ladder Diagram
FBD
Function Block Diagram
SFC
Sequential Function Chart
CFC
Continuous Function Chart
• Syntax highlighting for key words defined in
IEC 61131-3
• Graphic project navigation bar (based on
Windows Explorer)
• Support of all elementary IEC 61131-3 data
types to 64 bit
• Support of fields, structures and pointers
• Graphic controller and task configuration
• CAN objects from *.dcf files in M-PLC can be
applied as symbols
• PB objects from *.2bf files in M-PLC can be
applied as symbols
• Library management for creation and
management of libraries
• Watch manager and recipe manager (freely
definable variable monitoring)
• M-PLC can be started several times (multiple
projects open and online in parallel)
• Automatic project backup and creation of backup
• Project archiving on the controller
• Password protection for projects
• Offline simulation
• Online help
• Data exchange system-wide via SVI/SMI
interface programming
278
Programming
SW module 1
SW module 2
Online functions
• Online change (exchange of blocks in running
operation) also for multitasking projects
• Monitoring of all project variables
• Writing and forcing of variables
• Single cycle, single step and break points
• Sequence control (program lines that have been
run through will be displayed)
• Recording and graphic presentation of
project variables – trace
279
VxWorks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
IEC61131
Global variables
Tasks
SMI/SVI
IEC61131
Global variables
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
VxWorks
Tasks
Tasks
• Any number of running M-PLC projects on one
processor
• Every PLC project supports up to 16 separate
tasks
• Each task can be configured independently of
the others in terms of (priority, task call-up
mode [event, timetrigger, free running, sync],
watchdog)
• Actual multitasking via operating system tasks
(VxWorks)
• Communication between software modules (precompiled units)
• Between different tasks of an IEC 61131
module: global variables or SMI/SVI
• Between IEC 61131 modules: GD flag
range or SMI/SVI
• Between IEC 61131 modules and other modules
(C/C++, Simulink): SMI/SVI
• Between any modules on different controllers:
SMI
• Interface to visualization/SCADA/BDE
• Standard protocols: OPC DA, IEC 61850/
IEC 61400, Modbus, …
• Libraries for integration into separate software
(for C/C++, C#.NET, Java)
• Support of battery-buffered data (RETAIN flag)
SW module 3
GD data
C/C++
Simulink
Tasks
Runtime system
Programming
Manufacturer libraries
• STANDARD
• CONT_PLC
• MIO_PLC
• SMI_PLC
• EHD_PLC
• UTIL_PLC
• FILE_PLC
• CIA405
• DN_PLC
• PB_PLC
• USS_PLC
IEC 61131-3 Standard functions
and function blocks
7 standard PID controllers
Functions for direct access
to hardware I/Os
Functions for fast
communication between modules
and controllers (SMI/SVI)
Functions for inputting and
managing errors in the EHD
Functions for access to RTC,
runtime system info, special
conversions
Functions for access to files,
directories and serial
interfaces
Functions for access to CAN
Functions for access to
device net
Functions for access to Profibus
Functions for communication
with "Micromaster" frequency
converters
Extensions relative to CoDeSys
• Grouping possibility for I/O modules in the
process image (controller configuration)
• runtime-optimized process image (only
channels being used are processed)
• CAN objects with symbolic names in the
process image
• Addressing for inputs/outputs: undelayed
access that bypasses the process image
• Adjustment of the interval time and watchdog
time in the controller configuration
• Multiple, concurrently running PLC projects
on one CPU with different priorities/
interval times
• Actual operating system tasks within the
PLC projects
• GD flag range for shared data from
multiple projects on one CPU
• RD flag range for remnant (battery-buffered) data
• Optionally, the normal flag range
(MX .. MR) can also be placed in the batterybuffered memory area.
• Interface in the runtime system for libraries
• Initialization (C), deinitialization, version
check, memory management, management
of background tasks, provision for online change
• Support for exception handling in the runtime
system
• Display of the status "in error handling"
(ERROR) in the interface
• Implementation of the I/O modules of the process
image in the runtime system
• Optimized for performance, flexibility and
combinability, shared use of an I/O module by
multiple projects/SW modules possible
• Saving/loading of the entire project including
sources to/from the controller
• Transparency of the global variables
(flags, symbolic variables, structures)
controller- and visualization-wide
Integration in the SolutionCenter
(projects are SW modules)
• Generation of an executable *.m file with
configuration information
• Task interval time measurement, can be queried in
the project itself and in Device Manager
• Watchdog integration
• Execution possible in an application layer
(memory protection)
• Install, start, stop, reset and delete of PLC
projects in Device Manager
• The state machine of a PLC project in
the runtime system always corresponds to the
model defined for SW modules.
• Integration via M1 system debug mode and M1
system logbook
• Start of a project when booting through entry in
MConfig.ini
280
Programming
C / C++ Developer
High-level language programming in C and C++ is
also gaining increased significance in automation
technology. These languages are not only widely
used, they also offer the possibility of extremely
efficient programming and of encapsulating
frequently-used sequences in classes. The ability
to structure a software module into any number
of tasks, and in the process being able to use all
the resources of a powerful operating system,
VxWorks®, without restriction is an incredible
expansion of the possibilities. C / C++ Developer
enables programming in ANSI C, as well as
in C++.
Thanks to the mature interface and the restriction
to the required setting possibilities, getting started
with C and C ++ programming remains easy.
For the start of a new project multiple selectable
project templates available that already contain
all calls for the start of the software module
and its interaction with the operating system.
Consequently the programmer can immediately
devote himself to the logic of his application.
Projects can be compiled immediately after they
are created. The result is a finished, executable
program file for the M1 controller family. The
»make« environment and all configuration files
are managed and set up by C /C++ Developer
automatically. For transfer of existing projects
from a different development environment there
is also the possibility of continuing to use the
existing configuration files for the compile process,
without having them managed by the C / C++
Developer (»unmanaged make«). Integration of
existing libraries (*.a) in projects is also possible,
as is generation of your own libraries.
The generated executable program file can be
directly transferred, configured, installed and
started from the C / C++ Developer on the control
system.
281
Programming
Troubleshooting is supported by a mature
debugger that can not only be active after
download of the project, but also enables
integration of a software module that is already
running. Set break points can be deactivated
and will be saved automatically in the project, in
addition they can also be saved in lists. In addition
to the break points, watch points, also referred
to as »hardware breakpoints« are also available.
These do not stop a task when it executes a
defined code, but rather they stop a task when
a specific memory address is read and / or written
to.
The contents of the stack variables and the global
variables are readable and writable, complex data
types and structures are resolved appropriately
and mapped in the form a tree. In addition, any
number of memory contents can be listed in
numeric format.
All tasks that belong to the software module
are presented. For each function that is in the
debugger the call-up hierarchy is displayed
(stack trace).
• Languages ANSI C and C++
• Gnu compiler gcc
• Automatic adaptation and management of the
compiler environment
• Editor and debugger based on Eclipse CDT
• Intellisense: Automatic supplementation of
structure elements
• Syntax highlighting
• Folding code ranges, e. g. for complete
while loops
• Jump to the declaration of variables and
functions from the code
• Debug agent integrated in the M1 operating
system (MSys), no additional settings are
necessary
• Installation and start of the created software
module from the development environment
• Coupling of the debugger to the running
software modules
• Generation and integration of libraries
• All important compiler settings are accessible
via dialogs
282
Visualization
Greater transparency and flexibility in process visualization.
The clear and understandable
presentation of process and machine
information, as well fully intuitive
interaction are the center of the
visualization software from Bachmann
electronic.
In order to provide these characteristics,
not only locally on the machine, but
also in a distributed manner on the
intranet / Internet, the latest generation
of the Bachmann software is based on
Java and web technologies.
This offers independence from devices
and operating systems and saves time,
as well as maintenance costs. The
provided »ready-to-use« functions,
the available libraries and components,
and the extraordinary suitability
of Java for visualization tasks reduce
engineering effort of the applications.
Vis Designer
Features
Full-graphic visualization software for HMI
applications (operating / monitoring)
Complete configuration tool with graphic user
interface (Eclipse)
Platform-neutral thanks to Java technology
Online language switchover
Recipes / dataset management
283
Visualization
M-JVIS, M-JSYS tool library
Features
Tool library for Java visualizations
Management of process variables and their values
Language management / switchover
Alarm handling
Quality table
Communication to the controller (RPC, FTP, Vis)
Basis of M1 software modules
Monitoring the communication
284
Visualization
Vis Designer
The Bachmann Vis Designer visualization package
is a comprehensive software solution for all the
requirements of fully-graphic machine and plant
visualization. Based on the latest Java technology
it enables creation and operation of graphic
user interfaces, both in the form of conventional
applications, as well as for web access (applets).
Vis Designer is available as an intuitively
operated, graphic editor for generation process
images. From the supplied basic elements,
such as buttons, input fields, or selection lists,
the pages are built up and linked with process
variables. Your own graphics and icons can be
easily imported. Convenient dialogs guide the
user through all important work steps so that no
programming skills whatsoever are required for
a simple visualization.
Finished created applications can be executed
per mouse click, either as a complete application
directly on the PC, or they can be installed as
software modules on the visualization devices of
the WT, CT, OT, or IPC series. Another possibility
is that the application can also be stored as an
applet on a web server (e.g. on an M1 controller).
In this case the visualization application can
be loaded and executed from any Java-capable
visualization device (PC, IPC, OT, WT, CT). The
running application is fully network capable
and communicates autonomously with the
SVI interfaces of all automation devices from
Bachmann electronic.
285
Visualization
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Full-graphic visualization software for
HMI applications (operating/monitoring)
Complete configuration tool with graphic user
interface
Platform-neutral thanks to Java technology
Visualization can run on
•
PC / IPC
•
Operator terminals (OT, WT)
•
Control terminals
Web-capable through applets and
Java Webstart
Extensive presentation possibilities
Online language switchover
Recipes / dataset management
Alarm handling, message screen
Trend presentation
Mature window technology (frames, dialogs)
Input aids: Cursor linking, tab order, soft
keyboard, number pad
Extensive cross-references / search function
The Vis Designer supports the most important
control elements and image formats, it is fullygraphic and allows the use of different fonts.
The user of the visualization application can
switchover between any number of languages
online. In addition, to numerous animation types,
pre-finished and easy to configure commands
can be stored for user inputs.
286
Visualization
Vis Designer
Features – development environment
287
Project management
multiple projects / concurrently in access
Project data storage
configuration time: XML
runtime: compiled Java code
Image creation
graphic editor and configurators: Vis Designer
Presentation
fully-graphic
Color depth designer
trueColor
Window technology
yes (Elipse dockable views and perspectives)
Page display
multi-document view (multiple pages open in parallel)
Navigation
project tree and tabs in the main view
Zoom in the editor
yes (infinite)
Project planning aids
wizards, content assistance, problems view with
quick-fix function, drag & drop
Undo / Redo
yes (user-defined depth)
Cross-reference function
yes (with list output / search tree)
Search function
wild card search and filtering in tables
Graphic objects
line, circle/ellipse, rectangle, button, text (label), input field,
text field, combo box, check box, radio box, image/icon, scale,
pointer instrument, table, trend
Animations
value presentation (formated), number format, visibility, operability,
presentation, image content, image sequence, color change, fill level,
position, pointer position, transparency (operating-system dependent)
Reuse /
object orientation
templates (groups of animated graphic objects) with the possibility
of reuse through referenced variables (placeholders). Changes to the
template will be automatically effective in every instance.
User interaction
input, mouse click left (touch), mouse click right, selection,
Hover, etc.
Commands
- Value: write constant / toggle value / copy from variable / increment
(with step) / decrement (with step)
- Recipe (dataset): load / save
- Image change (with target area)
- Language switchover
- Data source: connect / disconnect / change (multiplex)
- Start program, data operations, and much more
Number formatting
freely definable for variable configuration
Value ranges
freely definable for variable configuration
Variable definition
manual in the table or import of online controllers
Local variables
yes
Colors visualization
as many as desired (functional color names / referencing)
Fonts
TrueType fonts can be imported; functional font names
with referencing
Language switchover editor
yes
Number of languages / project
User defined (memory-dependent)
Visualization
Continuation
Vis Designer
Vis Designer
Features – development environment
Transfer to target device
Can run as:
•
application on the PC / IPC (local or on the network)
•
application on Bachmann target device (OT, CT, WT)
•
Java applet on Bachmann M1 controller and execution in the
browser
•
Webstart application
Preview
yes
•
Not dynamized in the editor or
•
local deployment dynamized (process data connection)
Recipe management
integrated (flat dataset handling)
Button navigation runtime
cursor linking can be manually configured or generated automatically.
Preview of the jump targets directly in the editor
Tabulator navigation runtime
tab order can be manually configured or generated automatically.
Preview of the jump targets directly in the editor
Features – runtime system
Type
PC, IPC, WT or CT series
Graphic
depending on the target device from QVGA (320x240) to XGA
Presentation
fully-graphic
Colors
depends on the target device (to TrueColor)
Fonts
TrueType fonts can be used in the project planning (at runtime,
then either converted embedded fonts, or use of the TrueType fonts
installed on the target system)
Operation
2-button mouse, keyboard, touch screen, or membrane keyboard
Navigation in the image
menus, cursor linking, (arrow keys), tab linking, mouse
Menus
configurable
Number of process images
(pages)
user defined (memory-dependent)
Number of objects / image
user defined (performance-dependent)
Online language switchover
yes, online
Language management/switchover
yes, online (user-defined number of color schemes, e.g. for day/night
or for error indication)
Communication with the
controller
Bachmann M1 VHD / SVI with automatic communication groups
Protocols
TCP / IP, UDP / IP, QSOAP
Communication security
SSL (Secure Socket Layer)
Multiplexing of controllers
yes (can be selected from the interface)
Number of data sources
user-defined (data from multiple controllers can be presented
in the same process image)
288
Visualization
M-JVIS, M-JSYS
Tool library
M-JVIS and M-JSYS are libraries for creation
of visualizations under Java that can be used
platform-independently on Java-capable devices.
The components are based on Java version 1.1.8.
This version is supported by the VM (virtual
machine) from Bachmann electronic.
M-JVIS consists of the following packages:
• M-JVIS / DACC
• M-JVIS / UTIL
• M-JVIS / GUI
The packages are divided into two types
of classes:
• Configuration classes that are implemented
in the form of beans
• Runtime classes that allow a dynamic
configuration and during runtime handle
the management or presentation of the data
The configurations of all objects are
stored in XML files.
289
Visualization
M-JVIS / DACC
M-JVIS / GUI
The M-JVIS / DACC package manages
process variables and their values
(DACC = Data Access).
The M-JVIS / GUI contains the graphic components
The graphic components are based on AWT.
M-JVIS / DACC consists of the following
components:
• Process variable management
• Recipe management
• Unit switchover
• Communication interface
M-JVIS / GUI consists of the following components:
• XY diagram
• Table
• Tree view
• Screen keyboard
• Input fields
• Button
M-JVIS / UTIL
M-JSYS
The M-JVIS / UTIL package consists of the
following components:
• Language management / language switchover
• Protocols
• Alarm handling
• Quality table / statistical process control
The M-JSYS package allows general access to the
control system.
• Read-out and change of the controller
configuration
• RPCs for control
• Access to system software modules
Web-Start / browser
M-JVIS / GUI
XY-diagram
Buttons
Table
Input error
Tree-view
Screen
keyboard
XML
Visualization
M-JVIS / DACC
M-JVIS / UTIL
Process
variable
management
Units
conversion
M1-proxy
Communication
interface
Recipe
management
Alarm
handling
Quality stab. /
stat. process
control
Logging
Language
switchover
Visualization device
M1 controller
M-SYS
PLC task
C task
Java task
290
Simulation
Proven security for the future.
M-Target for Simulink® enables rapid
implementation of algorithms developed
in MATLAB®/Simulink® on the M1
automation system. Processes are
presented in the simulation environment
of MATLAB® and suitable control and
regulation strategies are developed for
this. The overall system can be varied
as often as desired in the computer
291
simulation, before trials are executed
on real prototypes of machines and
plants. Automatic code generation
enables transfer of the developed
algorithms to the controller and
automatically establishes the connection
to the input/output modules used.
Simulation
M-Target for Simulink
®
Fast development of controllers and
sequence controllers
®
The MATLAB program package and the
®
associated toolbox, Simulink from Mathworks
Inc. are considered to be the worldwide standard
in the area of modeling dynamic systems in
technologically demanding processes.
With the complete integration of the M1 controller
as target system, a convenient and efficient
®
implementation of the MATLAB functions is
enabled on an M1 control system. The user can
concentrate exclusively on working in the familiar,
®
graphic Simulink programming environment,
where he can model the system in its entirety
and simulate the effect of changes even before
transfer to an M1 control system. The code for the
M1 target system is generated automatically in
the background and requires no knowledge of a
programming language. This complete integration
enables efficient programming and commissioning
of the M1 control system.
• Faster implementation of controllers through
shorter controller design phases
• Shorter commissioning processes through
reliable automatic code generation
• Higher level of agreement between
machine model and controller model
®
Item
M-Target for Simulink
One-time License
M-Target for Simulink
Annual Maintenance
Item no.
00015577-60
00015577-70
®
Existing MATLAB / Simulink subsystems can
be reused in new simulations of the controller
programs. The integration of Bachmann »readyto-use« software modules facilitates development
of complex, customer-specific software. The
unique and direct interplay between process
model, controller model and support a more
stable modeling of the overall process. Transfer to
the M1 controller is executed automatically from
®
®
the MATLAB / Simulink environment, parameter
variations in the model are implemented online
in the M1 target system (target). Sequential
programs can be implemented through the
optional Stateflow and Coder toolboxes.
292
Simulation
Process
293
Input
Monitoring
5. Operation
Output
Input
Output
4. Test and
optimization
Input
3. Generation and
download
Commands
s
Parameters
rs
2. Simulation
Download
d
1. Modeling
2. Simulation
The resulting complete model is now simulated
offline on the computer. Comprehensive test
series of all possible operating conditions or
error situations are played through. Iterative
model adjustments and new simulations
follow seamlessly. The high-quality process/
solver for numeric calculation of differential
equations also prove themselves outside
of simple analytical systems. Outstanding
graphic depiction possibilities, such as curves
and surface plots and even animated 3D-CAD
models, optimize the work sequence.
Output
Development Process
1. Modeling
Both plant (physical system) and control systems are
modeled in Simulink®. Using application specific
tools reduces the time spent developing the
system. This is achieved by enabling the developer
to use modeling languages native to the domain
of interest. Domain-specific products for physical
modeling, such as SimElectronics, SimHydraulics,
SimMechanics, make it easier to create
intuitive, reusable models of the multidomain
physical system. For mathematical modeling,
MATLAB® and Simulink® also offer a range of
capabilities. Established service companies
offer additional expertise in all domains.
Simulation
3. Generation and download
In this step, the process model is first separated
from the actual control or regulation part. Then
a mouse click triggers automatic code generation
and preparation of the application for the realtime system. This can be loaded directly from
the Simulink® interface into the controller.
5. Operation
As soon as a satisfactory result is achieved, the
project management PC can be separated from the
controller – which continues to run autonomously
in real time. All interfaces to parallel-running
applications on the same (or other) controllers
remain in place. The published process variables
can be depicted through the general engineering
tool SolutionCenter or in visualizations.
4. Test and optimization
The generated real-time program now runs in
the controller. But it can exchange data directly
with the Simulink® interface on the PC through
the communication interfaces integrated during
code generation. Then, in the so-called “external
mode”, the actual process values (variables,
channel values) are available directly online in
Simulink®. At the same time, variable values
or internal parameters of the Simulink® blocks
can also be changed from there in the real-time
program. In this mode, the Simulink® model
created by the developer is only the graphic
front end for visualization of process values and
stipulation of parameters. Using the real process
environment, the discovered solution can be
verified and further optimized. If necessary,
users can switch to a prior process step and
make changes there (iterative improvement).
External Mode
Display and change online data directly
from real-time systems in Simulink® .
294
Simulation
M-Target for Simulink®
Areas of application
Model-based development
yes, with Simulink® / automatic code generation
Offline simulation
yes
Hardware in the loop
yes
Real-time programming
yes
Control technology
yes (PID, Observer, Fuzzy, MIMO, ....)
Signal processing
yes, synchronous or blockwise processing
(frame-based processing)
Process and status machines
yes, with Stateflow®
Signal interfaces1)
Digital signals
24 V uniform signal input (meter-capable, interrupt-capable)
24 V uniform signal output (PWM-capable)
5V TTL input / output
Analog signals
±1 V, ±10 V uniform signal input / output
0(4)..20 mA uniform signal input / output
Temperature sensor
PT100
PT1000
thermoelements type J, K, N, ....
Position, angle, location
incremental encoder, SSI
Force/expansion measurement
expansion measurement bridges
Vibrations, accelerations
ICP acceleration sensors (up to 50 kS/sec)
Special signals
step motor triggering, PWM (DC motors)
Software interfaces
Process communication
SVI (standard variables interface),
SMI (standard module interface) of signals and parameters
Software interface M-Target
C/C++ (M-Target models can be supplemented with
legacy code)
File system
yes, on flash interchangeable media, fixed media, RAM,
remanent RAM
“External mode” by Simulink®
Monitoring
1) over Bachmann M1 modules
295
for using of scopes, displays, workspace blocks in Simulink,
online monitoring of all SVI variables with the engineeringtool
SolutionCenter Scope
Simulation
M-Target for Simulink®
Real-time systems
Real-time operating system
VxWorks
Multitasking
yes, preemptive
Several M-Target models
yes, simultaneously / different priorities possible
Priority levels
255
Task models
single-rate/single-task, multi-rate/single-task, multi-rate/
multi-task
Cycle times
freely selectable from 200 μs (application-dependent)
Synchronization
hardware interrupts (signal interfaces),
hardware cycle (sync), CPU
Mix mode
yes, software modules (processes) in IEC 61131-3 (ST, FBD, IL, LD,
SFC), C, C++, Java can run parallel to Simulink® models
Libraries
Bachmann I/O and function modules
yes, contained in M-Target for Simulink®
Function enhancements2)
respective toolboxes from MathWorks
Domain modeling2)
respective toolboxes from MathWorks
System requirements
Real-time systems
Bachmann M1 CPUs of the Series MX, MPC, ME and MH
Bachmann Control Terminals of the Series CT300 and CT200
Engineering computer
IBM compatible PC under Windows XP/Vista/7
2 GB RAM (Vista: 3 GB), processor Intel Core Duo 2 GHz
or better, screen resolution ≥1280 x 1024 TrueColor,
>1 GB free HDD, Ethernet interface
Engineering software
MATLAB® with Simulink® and Simulink Coder® (supported
versions as per datasheet), toolboxes from MathWorks
according to application, M-BASE Version 3.20 or higher.
2) Requirement is suitability for Realtime Workshop
296
295
Standardized. Special. Overlapping.
Motion Control –
standardized drive control.
The requirements imposed on modern drive technology are becoming ever
more specialized, and not rarely are mechanical engineers confronted with
special requests or special regulations from the customer side. Even with
the most modern machines, with the most innovative drives, individual
drive solutions are still requested. No problem for Bachmann electronic:
with the M1 automation system, drive controllers can be selected with
complete independence from the drive type.
Building on the IEC 61800-7 standard, an open and universal interface to
the drive technology is implemented in the M1 automation system, with
the name »Drive Middleware«. Drive Middleware takes over the translation
from the logical drive with a manufacturer-independent, standardized drive
profile on the respective physical drive.
The Drive Middleware interface permits selection of a drive that is
perfectly matched to the respective requirements. In this regard the
fieldbus technology (CANopen, EtherCAT, SERCOS, PROFINET, etc.) or the
product line of the drive manufacturer are irrelevant. Thanks to fieldbusindependence with concurrent standardization of the fieldbus profiles, the
finished Motion Control applications can be implemented in the shortest
time possible and the training/maintenance costs of the various drive
worlds are significantly reduced. At Bachmann electronic, perfect solutions
for every request are just part of the standard.
296
Control
Professional motion guidance for individual requirements.
With expert know-how gained through
years of experience in the area of control
and system technology, Bachmann
electronic is indisputably one of the
leading providers of special solutions
in the industry. This knowledge and
the associated technology does not
necessarily have to be worked out by each
company itself. Customers and partners of
Bachmann electronic can rely on proven
and highly-optimized software controllers
for a wide variety of applications. Thus
years of development work can be
embedded as a finished, configurable
module in your own application.
users additionally facilitate use. The
palette of freely usable components
extends from simple motion control
of multiple axes, to CNC and shaft
controllers, to special modules for
demanding temperature applications.
Extensive libraries for C or
IEC 61131-3 (including PLCopen, Motion
Control) encapsulate the functionality
and guarantee standardized access
from the application program. Naturally
all controller modules from Bachmann
electronic support SVI communication
(Standard Variable Interface), as well
as the synchronizing function »Sync« of
the M1 system family. Commissioning
and diagnostic tools with graphic
interface designed by experienced
M-SMC
Software Motion Control
Features
Software module for regulating
the speed and / or position
of motion axes
Combined actuator / controller
operation
Master / slave operation
for parallel guided motions
Convenient commissioning
via monitor
Library for IEC 61131-3
PLC programs
297
M-CNC
Three-dimensional
motions
Features
Path motion for Cartesian
3-axis system
Profile specification in accordance
with DIN 66025 (program structure
of numerically-controlled axes)
Interfaces (analog, incremental,
fieldbus, etc.)
Configuration and diagnostics
via Device Manager
Commissioning interface
(CNC monitor)
Library for IEC 61131-3 PLC
programs
Control
M-SHAFT
Shaft controller
Features
Software module that simulates
a virtual shaft from 0° to 360°
Cyclic and synchronous regulation
of 32-axes
Speed of the shaft can be changed
in running operation
Independent master operation or
can be synchronized as slave
Convenient axis commissioning
via monitor
Drive Middleware
Features
Uniform, fieldbus-independent
programming of motion
applications in accordance
with IEC 61800-7
Full integration in the Bachmann
SolutionCenter
Easy addition of new,
supplemental drives
Position control, speed control,
and torque control are integrated
Easy management of the drive
parameters
M-TEMP
Temperature controller
Features
Temperature control software
for universal implementation
Modes: Actuator or controller
(2-3 point)
Automatic parameter assignment
(learn function)
Heating power monitoring
Sensor failure detection
For heating sections, cooling
sections, and combined sections
298
Control
M-SMC
Software Motion Control
Software module for regulating the speed and /
or position of motion axes Based on a simple
configuration a wide variety of options or modes
of regulation can be selected.
• Configuration as speed controller, position
controller, or underlying speed controller
(cascade control)
• Combined actuator / controller operation
• Master / slave operation for parallel guided
motions
• Specification of speed, accelerations, delays
and the target position to be approached
• Specification of position tolerance window and
tolerance monitoring time (settling time)
•Sampling times: min. 200 μs, in 100 μs
increments
• Easy application through FUB interface
for PLC programs
• Commissioning interface
299
Control
Features
• Up to 16 freely configurable axes
per SMC module can be defined
• Software module can be loaded multiple times
• Free configuration of the hardware
input and output signals via Device Manager
• »Controller enable« signal (output),
»controller ready« signal (input)
• Master slave relationship between axes
• Flying saw
• Online switchover from speed
to position specification
• Online change of the controller parameters
• Change of target position or speed during travel
• Selection of different pre-defined
referencing methods is possible
• Reversing operation with teach function for
controller adjustment
• Integrated drag error monitor with various
response methods and status output
• Monitoring of software limit switches
• Monitoring of hardware limit switches
• PLC function library
Visualization
• Software module available for all M1 processor
modules
• Easy integration of visualization systems
through disclosure of the parameter interfaces
and addressing via symbolic variables
• Different methods of interpolation for position,
speed and acceleration
• Configurable PID controller structure
with FeedForward
• Different methods for implementing
master/slave applications
• Support of fieldbus systems
(CAN, SERCOS, EtherCAT)
• Easy commissioning through
the Windows interface SMC monitor
• Test function for determination of
the section parameters
SMC monitor
M1 controller
Position
Speed
Application
(PLC / C)
Manipulated variable
M-SMC
Motion unit
ENC
M
T
300
Control
M-SHAFT
Shaft controller
M-SHAFT is a software module that simulates
a virtual shaft that turns from 0° to 360°.
Different axis types can be synchronized on this
shaft. M-SHAFT is ideally suited for machines with
a cyclically recurring sequence, such as packaging
machines, processing machines, etc.
• Speed (rpm) of the shaft can be changed in
running operation
• Independent master operation or can be
synchronized as slave
• Up to 32 axes per software module can be
synchronized to the shaft
• Step up / step down ratio for each axis can be
freely selected
• Axes can be switched on and off in running
operation
• End position monitor and dead time
compensation for digital axes
• Offline collision monitoring of the axes
• Convenient commissioning tool M-SHAFT
monitor
301
Control
Profile specification
Axis types
• Offline or online profile specification for each
axis is possible
• Profile specification via an external file is
possible (up to 360 interpolation points)
• Profile calculation online in the production cycle
without stop (online interpolation)
• Free selection of the type of interpolation
between the interpolation points
• Interpolation types: Linear, sinoid, sinus2,
• Regulated, absolute
(absolute coordinates, e. g. lift cylinder)
• Regulated, relative
(relative coordinates, e. g. feed)
• Analog
(analog manipulated variable, e. g. -10 .. +10 V)
• Digital (e. g. pneumatic ejector, press)
• Multi-cam (16 digital cams per axis)
modified sinus, spline, trapeze, Bestehorn,
polygon 6th degree, temporal, ext. signal
Table interpreter
• Profile calculation for minimal cycle times
via table interpreter
• Record by record position-oriented consideration
of profiles (similar to CNC)
• CNC commands (F, W, X, E, T)
• Loop command for automatic repetitions
of specific table columns
• Input of tables via M-SHAFT monitor
Summary – features
• Configurable and parameter-assignable
software module
• All options can be configured via software
(number of axes, axis type, I / Os, etc.)
• Fast commissioning via graphic
presentation of all datasets
• High product quality through high repeatability
• Short set-up times through omission of
mechanical switch cams
• Simplified mechanics through independent
drives
• Software module can be instanced
302
Control
M-CNC
Three-dimensional motions
M-CNC is a software module for path control of
three-dimensional motions with three axes in
Cartesian arrangement. Motions are specified in
accordance with DIN 66025.
• Path motion for Cartesian 3-axis system
• Profile specification in accordance with
DIN 66025 (program structure of numericallycontrolled axes)
• Configuration and diagnostics via Device
Manager
• Commissioning interface (CNC monitor)
• Library for IEC 61131-3 PLC programs
303
Control
Functions
Special functions
• Genuine 3-axis CNC controller
• Circle segments and straight lines user-defined
in space
• Point control behavior (PTP travel)
• Straight line interpolation (path)
• Circle interpolation
(clockwise / counterclockwise)
• Predefined dwell time
• Tool path corrections:
• Tool corrections:
• Reference point travel
• Referencing (various methods)
• Multiple instances of the module are possible
• Different methods for area monitoring
at calculation and execution
• Several methods of interpolation for position,
speed, acceleration of single axis
• Fast and direct setting of outputs
from M-CNC
• Single-axle travel
• Teaching of axes / positions
• Cascading with speed controller
(M-SMC)
• ActiveX element for Visual Basic,
Visual C and Delphi
• Commissioning monitor for efficient
graphic user guidance
Visualization
CNC monitor
M1 controller
Position
Speed
Application
(PLC / C)
Actuating variable
M-CNC
Motion unit
304
Control
Drive Middleware
Investment security
The investment in a motion application is not lost
if there is a change in the drive supplier.
Learning effort is reduced
The different drive profiles, such as SERCOS,
ProfiDRIVE, and DS402 have their own state
machines, error routines, and parameter
designations. Through standardization in
accordance, the training effort and the complexity
of drive solutions is reduced.
Drive-independence for coordinated axis
motions
Multi-axis applications, as they are realized
with M-SMC, M-SHAFT, etc. can be implemented
independently of the fieldbus profiles of the
individual drives.
Features
• Uniform, fieldbus-independent programming
of motion applications in accordance
• Full integration in the Bachmann SolutionCenter
• Connection to motion applications for multi-axis
applications is already integrated
• Easy addition of new, supplemental drives
• Cyclical and non-cyclical communication is
possible
• Referencing methods in accordance with DS402
are integrated
305
Control
User applications (PLC, C/C+)
Motion Control
M-SMC
M-SHAFT
M-CNC
Positioning/
Gantry
Camming
Gearing
DIN66025
Motion
IEC 61800-7
Drive dependent
Drive
Descriptions
Drive Middleware
<xml
...
*
* on request
Drives
306
Control
M-TEMP
Temperature controller
M-TEMP is a software module of the M1 controller
for monitoring and regulating temperaturedependent processes. To achieve an optimal
adaptation to the controlled system, all control
parameters can also be changed during operation.
• Temperature control software for universal
implementation
• Modes: Actuator or controller
• Automatic parameter assignment
(learn function)
• Integrated adaptive setpoint filtering
• Temperature range -200 °C to +1400 °C
Visualization
M1 controller
M-TEMP
307
Application
(PLC / C / …)
Control
Features
Possible functions
• Fast commissioning via graphic user interface
• User-defined changing between actuator and
controller operation
• Heating and cooling path control with one
controller is possible
• Setpoint change during operation is possible
(setpoint function)
• Suppression of vibrations in the event of major
setpoint changes, through adaptive setpoint
filtering
• Change of all control parameters is possible
during operation
• Possibility of autonomous determination
of the control parameters
• Precise determination of the target temperature
and process monitoring functions
• Versatile possibilities for data input and output
• Automatic generation of a cleaning pulse for
analog cooling controllers
• Conventional and user-defined temperature
units are possible
• Detection of sensor break
• Detection of defective power switches
• Current measurement function
• PLC function library
• Maximum of 9 controller systems, each
with up to 127 controllers
• Controller sample time 20 ms to 30 min
• Pulse width modulation periods from 20 ms
to 30 min
• Temperature resolution 1 / 100 °C
• Heating controller
• Cooling controller
• Three-state controllers (combined heating
and cooling section)
Process monitoring functions
•
•
•
•
Tolerance band monitoring
Increase monitoring
Heating power monitoring
Heating current monitoring
Actual value acquisition via
•
•
•
•
•
AIO288 (Pt100 sensor)
TCO2xx-C (thermal element)
DA3284-C (Pt100, Pt1000)
PTAI216 (Pt100 sensor)
SVI interface (external)
Manipulated variable to
• AIO288, AO204 (analog value 0 .. 10 V)
• TCO2xx-C, DO2xx, DIO2xx, DIO2xx-C,
DA3284-C (digital output with pulse width
modulation)
SVI interface
• External, e. g. for a different task
308
Planning. Detecting. Preventing.
Condition monitoring
The annual revenue of a production plant is significantly determined
by its reliability. Particularly for difficult to reach plants and plants that
can only be reached under specific conditions, such as offshore wind
power plans, focused planning of maintenance is necessary. A Condition
Monitoring System (CMS) integrated in the automation system can
provide all information, in order to detect failure hazards early on and
plan maintenance tasks in good time. Thus the costs for spare parts and
maintenance can be minimized and downtimes can be significantly reduced.
Condition monitoring is based on the continuous or regular acquisition
of the machine condition by measuring and analyzing meaningful physical
variables (e.g. vibration, temperature, condition of lubricant, etc.).
A CMS that is built with the Bachmann M1 system benefits from its versatile
communication and service interfaces and also reduces the training period
of the operating and maintenance personnel. Secure web technologies
also enable defined access to the full system or to individual parts of the
plant from the outside. Thus data is accessible at all times for operators
and maintenance personnel, so that optimal process control and power
generation are ensured.
CERTIFICATE NO. TC-GL-008A-2008
310
Condition monitoring
More control, fewer outages.
The operational availability of modern
machines and plants requires a
comprehensive maintenance and
service concept as well as a consistent
design. Due to the high costs of failure,
heavy mechanical elements for power
transmission (power trains, gears, prime
movers) and bearings in particular place
considerable pressures on manufacturers
and operators. A continuous and if
possible automatic monitoring of the
mechanical systems is the ideal solution.
The condition of the equipment (wear
and damage) can be monitored and
maintenance and service can be timely
scheduled to ensure maximum operability.
Within the framework of Condition
Monitoring, in addition to numerous wellknown indicators, such as temperature,
current consumption or load selective
operating hour acquisition, vibration
analyses in the frequency range, in
particular, has proven to be an effective
output variable.
Vibration sensor
input module AIC212
Features
Number of inputs: 12 analog inputs
(9 inputs with IEPE interface for Piezo vibration
sensors and 3 inputs with + / -10 V)
Resolution: > 17 bit
Dynamics: > 95 dB
Sampling rate up to 50 kHz, adjustable
Galvanic isolation from system 500 V
Ω-Guard®
Features
16 IEPE inputs
Extensible
Integrated processing
Web-based software »WebLog«
for remote diagnostics
311
Remote service
via WebLog
Features
Web-based, operating-system
independent »WebLog« software
for remote diagnostics
Condition monitoring
OmegaExpert®
Mobile measurement system
Features
16 IEPE inputs
Easy management
μ-bridge
Sensor
Features
IEPE standard
Operating current: 4 .. 10 mA
Surge protection: Imax = 16 mA
Output voltage (offset)
11 ± 0.5 V
Max. saturation degree 8V
μ-Two
acceleration sensor
Features
IEPE standard
Operating current: 4 .. 10 mA
Overcurrent protection:
Imax = 16 mA
Output voltage (offset):
11 ± 0,5 V
max. modulation: 8 V
SVM300 series
Structural Vibration Monitor
Features
Measurement in 3 axes
Measurement range ± 2 g
Resolution: ≥0.5 mg
Internal memory (≤150 days)
Protection class IP67
312
Condition monitoring
Vibration sensor
input module AIC212
The M1 automation system's AIC212 module
offers up to nine vibration measuring inputs for
high resolution, signal correlated monitoring of
different measuring points. Three signal inputs
with a standard signal level of ±10 V and a
position transducer input provide consistent
acquisition of other relevant variables and the
angle or position relation of the mechanics.
Thanks to the embedding in the M1 system
analyses can also directly consider any other
signals or variables of the entire controller
composite (e. g. current performance, operating
condition), doubling the sensor system.
The AIC212 module has its own integrated
working memory to record time series of signal
profiles for up to 50 kilo samples / second –
which is far below the controller cycle time. The
evaluation is carried out in the well established
M1 CPU modules in the form of CMS application
programs that can operate as required with static
processes, frequency or location analyses. The
measuring data is also provided as channel values
in the cycle of controller programs as directly
recorded online variables.
Item
Item no.
AIC212
00014151-00
AIC212
00017444-00
313
Condition monitoring
Alarm, service information
or external analysis
M1-CPU
AIC212
AIC212
Results
Analysis
Buffer
memory
History &
reference
Recording
...
...
Sensor signals
As an M1 standard module, the AIC212 allows
implementation of »stand-alone« condition monitoring
as well as use in the various remote or distributed
configurations of the Bachmann automation system.
The use of M1 CPUs for evaluation, logging and
alarming allows such a CMS to benefit from the wide
range of communication and service interfaces and
also reduces the training requirements for start-up
and maintenance personnel.
Instead restricting evaluations through a strictly
prescribed frame, the AIC212 system concept allows
a free design of the Condition Monitoring software
for the particular requirements of the respective
application. Regardless of the implementation
(C/C++, IEC 61131 or MATLAB® / Simulink®) the
recording time sequences of the CPU are available
in memory and enable consistent access via the
location and time specific software. (change to ...
consistent location-specific and time-specific access
through the software. Existing evaluation packages
can be ported to the M1 CPU system (VxWorks® / Intel
x86 compatible processor) since no special solutions
(DSPs, special operating systems) are required.
• 12 analog inputs (9 inputs with ICP® interface
for Piezo vibration sensors and 3 inputs with ±10 V)
• Position detection (incremental encoder input
24 V and A / B / N track or 2 counter inputs
with 24 V for initiators)
• All channels, including position measurement
(Rotary encoder signal) sampled synchronously
• Analog filter and digital filtering with
adjustable cut-off frequency
• Resolution > 17 bits
• Dynamics > 95 dB
• Sampling rate 50 kHz, adjustable
• Different trigger modes for the recording start
(position / location, IO bus sync, etc.)
• High-speed buffer memory directly
on the module
• Access to channel values also synchronous
with application (direct access and process
image for PLC programs)
• Embedding in M1 plant management system
or as autonmous CMS
• Use of any signals of other modules
or calculated variables for evaluation
• Signal base suitable for frequency analysis
with / without location reference
• Several AIC212 modules in one system
simultaneously
• Evaluations can be designed to individual
requirements
• Broad spectrum of usable implementation
technologies (C, C++, MATLAB®/Simulink®)
on the real-time operating system VxWorks®
• Synergy by using fieldbus
and service communication
• Local memory in evaluation CPU:
CF card, PC card
314
Condition monitoring
AIC212
Analog inputs
Quantity
Measuring range
9
3
AC-coupled ±6 V, ICP interface
Resolution
> 17 bits
Dynamic
> 95 dB
Scan rate*
up to 50 kHz per channel adjustable
Frequency range general
0.1 Hz – 20 kHz
Error (full scale) at +25 °C
Digital filter
±10 V
®
±0.1 %
adjustable depending on sampling frequency
Distortion attenuation / distortion
factor
THD+N (fSIN_In=1kHz, fSample=50kHz)
LevelIN_from_FullScale= 0 dB
LevelIN_from_FullScale= -20 dB
LevelIN_from_FullScale= -40 dB
Input impedance
Current source for ICP interface
Cross-talk control range
< -78 dB
< -68 dB
< -48 dB
200 kOhm
>1 MOhm
5 mA / channel
+8 .. +12 V
Error detection
±2 V
wire break
Interference voltage strength
-15 .. +36 V
Incremental and counter inputs
Interface
24 V initiators / proximity switch
with 10mA sink
incremental
either one incremental interface or two counter inputs
can be used for proximity switches
Number of channels
Display
2
1
yes, via green LED
no
Counter frequency
5 kHz
36 kHz
Measured value / resolution
32 bit
32 bit
A
A-, A+ / B-, B+ / N-, N+
Input signals
Filter frequency
programmable
---
Error detection
error pulse
phase error
-
1, 2, 4 edge signals & pulse
direction mode
Evaluation
Supply
Galvanic isolation from system
for external sensors: 24 V / 5 V short circuit proof
500 V
* Frequency bands/fsample:20 kHz / 48 kHz;10 kHz / 24 kHz; 5 kHz / 12 kHz; 2.5 kHz / 6 kHz
315
Condition monitoring
Continuation
Vibration sensor input module AIC212
AIC212
Operating conditions
Power supply
Power consumption module
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Rel. humidity operation
Storage temperature
Rel. humidity storage
24 V (18 V .. 34 V) with reverse polarity protection
approx. 9.5 W without encoder supply
Standard
coldclimate ( )
-30 .. +60 °C
5 .. 95 % without condensation
5 .. 95% with condensation
-40 .. +85 °C
5 .. 95 % with condensation
5 .. 95 % with condensation
Model variants
AIC212
measuring module 3x Input ±10 V, 9x Input ICP, 17 bits,
1x INC / SSI, 128 MB
AIC212
like AIC212, in coldclimate model ( )
316
Condition monitoring
Ω-Guard®
With the AZT-tested and GL-tested and certified
machine diagnostic system (Condition Monitoring
System: CMS) Ω-Guard® an intelligent monitoring
solution without mechanical moving components
(hard disks, fans) is available for use under harsh
ambient conditions.
The hardware and software architecture has
been based on a modular concept. Thus analog
and digital inputs and outputs can be flexibly
configured. Ω-Guard® in particular has extensive
self-test possibilities that enable a detailed
function check of the CMS. Script-oriented
software enables easy adaptation to different
monitoring tasks with due consideration of the
special requirements imposed on technical plant
management.
The following characteristics of this CMS
must be particularly highlighted:
• Modularity
• Future compatibility (inclusion many additional
measured values is possible)
• Extensive temperature range
• Robust relative to environmental influences
• Watchdog monitoring
• Web-based, operating system independent
WebLog« software
Item
Ω-Guard®
317
Item no.
on request
Condition monitoring
Ω-Guard®
Analog measurement channels
Number of channels
8/16
A/D resolution
16/24 bit
Sampling rate
max. 190 kHz / channel
parallel, synchronous measurement of all channels is possible
Measuring range
IEPE standard, current (4-20 mA), voltage (±10 V)
Error detection
cable break, short circuit,
defective IEPE supply
Sensor supply
IEPE
4 mA
External operating voltage
can be set via jumper
Speed input
Incremental encoder
ƒmax = +15 V (supply voltage)
Power supply
Multi-voltage power supply
230 V (±10 %), 50 Hz and
115 V (±10 %), 60 Hz and
Measuring module
+15 V DC, 1A
- 15 V DC, 0.5 A
Interference immunity
ESD
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic field
EN 61000-4-3
Burst
EN 61000-4-4
(all inputs: Multi-voltage power supply
speed, Ethernet)
Surge
EN 61000-4-5
(All inputs: Multi-voltage power supply, sensor,
speed, Ethernet)
Conducted HF
EN 61000-4-6
(All inputs: Multi-voltage power supply, sensor,
speed, Ethernet)
DIPS (line voltage fluctuations)
EN 61000-4-11
Operation with multi-voltage power supply
CPU unit
Interfaces
RS232, Ethernet
Communication
LAN, GRPS, modem
Housing / power supply
Type
wall-mount housing,
Alternative DIN rail mounting
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions
380 mm x 380 mm x 210 mm
Operating voltage
230 V (±10 %) / 50 Hz
(optional 115 V / 60 Hz)
Operating parameters
Operating temperature
-20 °C to +55 °C
Storage temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C
318
Condition monitoring
Remote service via WebLog
Web-based, operating-system independent
software »WebLog« for remote diagnostics
The success of a condition monitoring system
is closely linked to correct installation,
parameterization and commissioning, as well as
rapid and correct reaction to reported changes
of status. Our experts accordingly handle all
concerns on-site, even training and orientation of
customer personnel. Our modern teleservice for
distributed applications includes online monitoring
over a secure Internet connection and thus is
available worldwide. Currently we monitor far
more than a thousand Condition Monitoring
systems via Internet. In this regard the power
range of the systems extends from 250 kW to
5 MW. We developed the »WebLog portal for this.
It serves as an interface to the diagnostic system
and enables worldwide access to the status data
of the monitored plants. Alarm messages are
signaled to the users via a status window.
Simultaneously a trend analysis of the state of
the machine can be executed via the integrated
database. The »WebLog« software solution that
can be implemented universally is the foundation
for the worldwide telediagnostics and early error
detection for distributed machines and plants.
Communication and analyses are based on
progressive web-based and database-based
technologies. Through its scalability and
319
modularity »WebLog« permits secure adaptation
and fast configuration for solving all tasks,
extending to demanding tasks in the condition
monitoring area in various industries (particularly
wind energy, biogas, shipping industry, etc.)
Thus »WebLog« is the basis for use of many
Condition Monitoring systems that can be installed
immediately in the original equipment with the
»M1« controller by the OEM on the same bus
system, or that are available for retrofitting
of machines and plants.
• Password protected access
• On the start page all current
error messages are displayed
• Visualization of the detailed
diagnostic results for each measurement point
• Expert tools for fault diagnosis
Condition monitoring
OmegaExpert®
Mobile measurement system
Mobile diagnostics system for recording of
measurement data per offline measurement.
On the basis of this measurement data,
creation of manufacturer-independent vibration
assessments of the power train of wind turbines
are executed (as required when the guarantee
expires or to satisfy insurance requirements).
Item
OmegaExpert®
Item no.
on request
OmegaExpert®
Technical data
Analog inputs
16 IEPE inputs with 4 mA, IEPE sensor feed and
24 V DC sensor voltage
Scan rate per channel
max. 190 kHz
Resolution per channel
16 bit
320
Condition monitoring
μ-bridge sensor
We developed the »μ-bridge« sensor to capture
sound waves and flexural vibrations in machines
and plants (e.g. on components, solid bodies,
etc.). The structure-borne sound waves emitted
by machine parts are characteristic for the wear
status of a part.
For the μ-bridge sensor the force of the sound
wave is converted to a measurement voltage
without a detour through a spring mass damper
system. This even makes it possible to detect
structure-borne sound waves and flexural
vibrations at frequencies from 10 kHz to under
1 Hz with high resolution and bandwidth; this
means that the sensor is particularly well suited
for measurements on slowly rotating or vibrating
parts.
Item
μ-bridge
μ-bridge
Technical data
321
Operating mode
IEPE standard
Operating current
4 .. 10 mA
Output voltage (offset)
11 ± 0.5 V
Max. saturation degree
8V
Sensitivity
0.7 V/N
Signal-to-noise ratio
-83 dB
Carrier-to-interference ratio
-79 dB
Low limit frequency
high pass 1st order, ƒg = 1.6 Hz
High limit frequency
ƒg > 10 kHz
Item no.
on request
322
Condition Monitoring
Structural Vibration Monitor
SVM300 series
The SVM300 structural vibration monitor series is
used for analyzing oscillations, shocks and vibrations. It has an internal memory that enables gridindependent autonomous analysis for up to 150
days and is implemented in protection class IP67.
•
•
•
•
•
Measurement in 3 axes
Measurement range ± 2 g
Resolution: ≥0.5 mg
Internal memory (≤150 days)
Protection class IP67
Item
SVM300/E
323
Item no.
00020930-00
Condition Monitoring
SVM300 Series
Acceleration sensors
Acceleration axes
3 (x, y, z) available (z-axis optional)
Measuring range
max. ±2 g
Resolution
≥ 0.5 mg
Signal bandwidth (low-pass)
≤ 5 Hz
Sample rate
min. 25 samples/s
Memory
Internal memory
2 GB
Recording period
150 days (at 25 samples/s)
Real-time clock (RTC)
Deviation/year
≤ 60 minutes/year (battery buffered)
Diagnostics
2 status LEDs
Operation/fault and communication
Connections/interfaces
Ethernet (ETH)
10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 socket, push pull (variant 4)
Power supply (PWR)
+12 V (10 .. 34 V) with reverse polarity protection, push-pull (variant 4)
Housing/power supply
Degree of protection
IP 67
Dimensions
150 mm x 150 mm x 40 mm
Environmental condition
Operating temperature
-40 .. + t.b.d °C
Rel. humidity operation
5 .. 95% with condensation
Storage temperature
-40 .. +85°C
Rel. humidity storage
5 .. 95% with condensation
Model
SVM300/E
Structural vibration monitor with Ethernet connection and three acceleration axes
324
323
Safe. Qualified. Certified.
Approvals and certificates
Directives and certificates –
for worldwide implementation
Product certifications and approvals are essential prerequisites for global
acceptance of industrial products.
Whether national standards, climatic conditions, degrees of protection,
set-up, installation, operation or maintenance possibilities – in international
implementation the course must be set in the project coordination phase.
And it is precisely at this point that our strengths are brought to bear.
Approvals
GL
CE
UL
CSA
HALT
ISO9001 / 2000
CCC
DNV
LR
BV
ABS
Germanischer Lloyd
Declaration of Conformity
Underwriters Laboratories
Canadian Standards Association
Highly Accelerated Life Test
Quality management
China Compulsory Certification
DetNorske Veritas
Lloyds Register
Bureau Veritas
American Bureau of Shipping
324
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
00009928-10
00012245-10
ACR222/2
•
•
•
•
AI202/SI
•
•
•
00010693-20
AI204/1
•
•
00010693-10
AI204/2
•
•
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010693-00
AI204/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017447-00
AI204/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012245-00
AI204/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017772-00
AI208/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018843-00
AI208/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014151-00
AIC212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017444-00
AIC212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009097-00
AIO288
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014470-00
AIO288
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016157-00
AIO288
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009097-10
AIO288/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014470-10
AIO288/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010692-00
AO202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012246-10
AO202/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012246-00
AO204/SI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011244-00
AO208/I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017441-00
AO208/I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009540-00
A-PCC 200
00009754-00
BEM201
•
•
•
•
•
00012846-00
BEM211
•
•
•
•
•
00009755-10
BES202
•
•
•
•
•
00009755-00
BES202/N
•
•
•
•
•
00012847-00
BES212
•
•
•
•
•
00012848-00
BES212/N
•
•
•
•
•
00013502-00
BES222
•
•
•
•
•
00013503-00
BES222/N
•
•
•
•
00010507-00
BS201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009802-00
BS202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009313-00
BS203
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015947-00
BS203
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016785-00
BS203/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009752-00
BS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015948-00
BS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016786-00
BS204/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009206-00
BS205
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
325
GL
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00015949-00
BS205
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016787-00
BS205/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
***
•
00009792-00
BS206
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015950-00
BS206
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016788-00
BS206/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009207-00
BS207
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015951-00
BS207
•
•
•
•
***
•
•
***
•
•
00016789-00
BS207/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009793-00
BS208
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015952-00
BS208
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016790-00
BS208/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009634-00
BS209
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015953-00
BS209
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016791-00
BS209/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009794-00
BS210
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015954-00
BS210
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016792-00
BS210/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009795-00
BS211
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015955-00
BS211
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016793-00
BS211/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009796-00
BS212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015956-00
BS212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016794-00
BS212/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009797-00
BS213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015957-00
BS213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016795-00
BS213/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009798-00
BS214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015958-00
BS214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016796-00
BS214/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009799-00
BS215
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018623-00
BS215
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016797-00
BS215/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009800-00
BS216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018624-00
BS216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016798-00
BS216/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009698-00
CM202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016404-00
CM202
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010709-10
CNT204/H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016407-10
CNT204/H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010709-20
CNT204/R
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
*** on request
326
Continuation – standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00013178-00
CS200
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013179-00
CS200/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013597-00
DA3284-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017450-00
DA3284-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010281-00
DI212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009002-00
DI216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00008997-00
DI232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016411-00
DI232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012162-00
DI232/48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011516-00
DI232/np1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010285-00
DIO16-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017453-00
DIO16-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010615-00
DIO216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010892-00
DIO216/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016141-00
DIO216/4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013034-00
DIO232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011479-00
DIO248
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011478-00
DIO264
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009205-00
DIO264-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011471-00
DIO280
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016418-00
DIO280
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010129-00
DIO32-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010526-00
DIO48-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009884-00
DMS202
•
•
•
•
00012696-00
DNM201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009004-00
DO216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009003-00
DO232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016414-00
DO232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012176-00
DO232/48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014497-00
DOR206
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014497-10
DOR206/230
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010555-00
DPM200
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018032-00
DPM200
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00012671-00
EM203
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017321-00
EM213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017470-00
EM213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
** Certification in process
327
•
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00017192-00
FCS214/G
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017192-10
FCS214/F
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010495-00
FM211
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010496-00
FM212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016747-10
FM221
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018091-10
FM221
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016747-00
FM222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018091-00
FM222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010497-00
FS211
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010498-00
FS211/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010499-00
FS212
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010500-00
FS212/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016749-10
FS221/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018092-10
FS221/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016749-00
FS222/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018092-00
FS222/N
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017829-00
GMP232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00019063-00
GMP232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013737-00
ISI222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016421-00
ISI222
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014127-00
ISI222/8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014477-00
LM20
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009494-00
LM201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013176-00
ME203/CN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016336-00
ME203/CN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013191-00
ME203/CNW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013175-00
ME203/E
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015985-00
ME203/E
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013177-00
ME203/EN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00015985-00
ME203/EN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016370-00
MH212/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018652-00
MH212/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012711-xx
MPC240
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016338-44
MPC240
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013127-00
MPC240/W
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
328
Continuation – standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00012708-xx
MPC265
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012710-xx
MPC270
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016180-xx
MPC270
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014274-xx
MPC293
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014445-xx
MX207
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014444-xx
MX213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014712-xx
MX213
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016948-xx
MX213/W
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014443-xx
MX220
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
auf Anfrage
MX220
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012754-00
NT250/48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00013251-00
NT255
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016158-00
NT255
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-10
PCC201 / 8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-20
PCC201 / 16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-30
PCC201 / 32
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00012081-40
PCC201 / 64
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014046-00
PN23
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010708-00
PTAI216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017456-00
PTAI216
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00011056-00
PWM202
•
•
•
•
00009918-00
RS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016169-00
RS204
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009918-01
RS204/R
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009918-20
RS204/T
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00009542-00
S201
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
00014544-00
SDI208
•
•
•
•
00017459-00
SDI208
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014545-00
SDO204
•
•
•
•
00017462-00
SDO204
•
•
•
•
00011756-00
SEM201
•
•
•
•
•
00014273-00
SLC284
•
•
•
•
•
00017465-00
SLC284
•
•
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
•
00012672-00
SWI205/S
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
** Certification in process
329
•
•
•
Standards and approvals
M1 controller hardware
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00010851-00
TCO204-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00010850-00
TCO208-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00008673-00
TCO216-C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014008-00
TI214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014008-20
TI214/2
•
•
•
•
***
***
***
***
***
•
00009496-00
VP200
•
•
•
•
•
00009498-00
VP200/S
•
•
•
•
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
*** on request
330
Continuation – standards and approvals
HMI devices
331
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
00014221-00
00014336-00
CT205/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CT205/V/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00016898-00
IPC1410/BE1/CM
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016905-00
IPC1410/BE1/CD
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016899-00
IPC1412/BE1/CD
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016906-00
IPC1412/BE1/CM
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016900-00
IPC1415/BE1/CD
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016907-00
IPC1415/BE1/CM
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00016908-00
IPC1419/BE1/CD
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00014281-00
IPC312/BE1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00017227-10
IPC315/BE1
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00014569-00
OT115/R/BE1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00014570-00
OT115/R/BE2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00017593-00
OT115/R/BE2/CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018216-00
OT205
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018217-00
OT205/M
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018218-00
OT205/V
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018219-00
OT205/V/CC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018221-00
OT205/V/BE2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
00018300-00
OT1310/BE1/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00018305-00
OT1310/BE1/CC/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00018302-00
OT1312/BE1/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1312/BE1/CC/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00018303-00
OT1315/BE1/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00018304-00
OT1319/BE1/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1310/BE1/M/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1312/BE1/M/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1315/BE1/M/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1319/BE1/M/
AE1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
on request
OT1310/BE1/
GT1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00021833-00
OT1312/BE1/
GT1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
*
RoHS China (no RoHS Europe)
** Certification in process
Standards and approvals
HMI devices
Item no.
Module
CE
CCC
UL
cUL
GL
DNV
LR
ABS
BV
RoHS*
on request
OT1315/BE1/
GT1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00021831-00
OT1319/BE1/
GT1G0
•
•
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
•
00014314-00
WT310
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00014329-00
WT312
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
00014399-00
WT315
•
•
•
•
-
-
-
-
-
•
332
coldclimate
Coldclimate modules
Processor modules
Processor module
Processor module
Processor module
Processor module
Processor module
Processor module
Processor module
Safety modules
Safety Logic Controller
Safety digital input module
Safety digital output module
Digital input/output modules
Digital input/output module
Digital input/output module
Digital input/output module
Digital output module
Digital input module
Analog input/output module
Analog input/output module
Analog output module
Analog input module
Analog input module
Measurement module for Condition Mon.
Temperature recordung module
Temperature input module
Functional module
Positioning module
Counter module
Grid measurement module
Grid measurement module
Interface module
Industrie Ethernet master
Interface module
System networking
Media converter
Media converter
FASTBUS module
FASTBUS module
FASTBUS module
FASTBUS module
CANopen Master module
Profibus DP-Master module
Decentralized CAN modules
Analog and digital in/output module
Digital input/output module
Fieldbusses
PROFIBUS-DP-Master
Digital input/output module
333
Item designation
ME203/EN
ME203/CN
MPC240-128
MPC270-128
MX213/
MX220/
MH212/S
Item designation
SLC284
SDI208
SDO204
Item designation
DIO216/4
DIO280
DIO232
DO232
DI232
Item designation
AIO288
AO208/I
AI204/4
AI208/SI
AIC212
PTAI216
TI214
Item designation
ISI222
CNT204/H
Item designation
GMP232
Item designation
EM213
RS204
Item designation
FCS214/F
FCS214/G
FM221
FM222
FM221/N
FM222/N
CM202
DPM200
Item designation
DA3284-C
DIO16-C
Item designation
DPM200
DIO16-C
Item number
00015985-00
00016336-00
00016338-44
00016180-44
00014712-0x
00019210-xx
00018652-xx
Item number
00017465-00
00017459-00d
00017462-00
Item number
00016141-00
00016418-00
00019502-00
00016414-00
00016411-00
Item number
00016157-00
00017441-00
00017447-00
00018843-00
00017444-00
00017456-00
00018808-00
Item number
00016421-00
00016407-10
Item number
00019063-00
Item number
00017470-00
00016169-00
Item number
00019104-10
00019104-00
00018091-10
00018091-00
00018092-10
00018092-00
00016404-00
00018302-00
Item number
00017450-00
00017453-00
Item number
00018032-00
00017453-00
Specification
Coldclimate modules
System modules
Power supply
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Backplane
Item designation
NT255
BS203
BS204
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS208
BS209
BS210
BS211
BS212
BS213
BS214
BS215
BS216
Item number
00016158-00
00015947-00
00015948-00
00015949-00
00015950-00
00015951-00
00015952-00
00015953-00
00015954-00
00015955-00
00015956-00
00015957-00
00015958-00
00018623-00
00018624-00
Coldclimate Terminals
OT100 series
Operator Terminal
OT200 series
Operator Terminal
OT1300-Serie
Operator Terminal
Operator Terminal
Item designation
OT115/R/BE2/CC
Item designation
OT205/V/BE1/CC
Artikelbezeichnung
OT1310/BE1/CC/AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/CC/AE1G0
Item number
00017593-00
Item number
00018219-00
Artikelnummer
00018305-00
on request
334
335
Convenient. Precise. Enlightening.
CAE/CAD data –
the convenient solution.
High-quality automation components are good and important, however they no longer
suffice for successful machine building and process plant engineering projects.
Development and project planning also play a crucial role for automation. Consequently
the electrical and mechanical design of control cabinets is increasingly executed with
3D-supported programs that can ensure optimal placement of components and cable
routing.
The same applies at Bachmann electronic: With eCAD import functionality in the
SolutionCenter the turnaround time of automation projects can be significantly reduced.
We satisfy the new market requirements and support our customers with additional
components in the integrated engineering process.
336
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library for control cabinet
construction
Good automation components no longer suffice for
successful machine building and plant engineering
projects. Efficient development and project
planning is becoming ever more important.
Bachmann electronic meets the requirements
and supports its customers with two additional
components in the integrated engineering process.
The device data necessary for electrical design of
the Bachmann automation components is provided
as a library in the ePLAN data portal. Macros
for circuit diagram and control cabinet layout,
function templates for intelligent configuration of
controllers, item data for the spare parts catalog;
The data that is created and certified with ePLAN
can be loaded directly into the ECAD project and
immediately used for the design – a significant
contribution in time savings, as well as for uniform
structuring of the project.
With the new eCAD import functionality in the
SolutionCenter the time of automation projects
can be significantly reduced. While one team
plans parts lists, circuit diagrams and control
cabinet layouts, another team can create the
required software in parallel. Through the use of
symbolic variables in the software, to this point
in the project knowledge of the structure of the
hardware is not required. Only through automatic
import of the ECAD data into the SolutionCenter
will a link be established between symbolic
variables and the hardware used, and an operable
software module be generated.
Variants, extensions or corrections in ECAD
project planning are no problem – the software
module will simply be re-generated with the
changed and newly-imported ECAD data.
337
CAE/CAD data
ePLAN library
The ePLAN library contains device data, macros
and technical documentation of all automation
components: M1 hardware, visualization hardware
and S1 servo system.
• Direct transfer from the portal into the
electrical project planning
• Tested and assured quality through Certification
• Ongoing update and extension
• Support for the entire electrical project planning
– circuit diagrams, control cabinet layouts,
Overview drawings, PLC configurations and
spare part documentation
• Support for implementation of the library
• Use of design software ePLAN P8 and higher
ECAD import in the SolutionCenter
• Software is created with symbolic variables
• Linking of the symbolic variables with the
hardware used through import of the ECAD data
into the SolutionCenter
• An operable software module is generated
• Variants, extensions, or corrections in the ECAD
project planning can be easily integrated at any
time through subsequent import
338
CAE/CAD data
3D-CAD model library for control
cabinet design
Control cabinets are increasingly being designed
with 3D-assisted programs in order to guarantee
an optimal placement of the components and
the wiring. Bachmann electronic supports its
customers in this engineering process and makes
a library available for this purpose.
The 3D-CAD model library contains the versioned
3D models of the controller and terminal products.
The 3D models are created on a 1:1 scale. The
STEP format was chosen so that it can be further
processed by all major 3D drawing programs. The
models show the external details of the products
at full resolution so that a realistic appearance for
the 3D design is facilitated. Internal details are
largely masked out, which achieves a considerable
reduction of the data size.
Bachmann electronic provides this library without
charge to its customers for standard products.
Libraries can be created for customer-specific
products if needed.
3D-CAD model library
• Detailed display of the products in the STEP 3D
exchange format
• Data reduced to the required Data volume
• Labeling of the 3D models with the product
version number
339
Installation in the control cabinet / housing
M1 controller hardware
UL / CSA regulations and those of the EU Directive 73 / 23 EC (Low-voltage Directive)
specify that controllers be mounted in a cabinet, an enclosure or a closed operating area
in order to meet the requirements for electrical safety. When determining the spatial
requirements of an M1 controller, certain minimum distances between the mounting rack
and the adjacent fixtures must be considered
40 mm
RDY
62 mm
10 mm
10 mm
199 mm
56 mm
1
64 mm*
2
3
n
40 mm
n x 55 mm + 20 mm
*for cables an additional movement space of at least 30 mm must be provided. When using high covers for
the D-SUB connectors more space can also be required.
HMI systems
In order to protect against the potential danger of overheating, the visualization
equipment should be mounted in a cabinet or housing, with the minimum distances
specified below.
50 mm
50 mm
50 mm
10 mm
50 mm
Note: Every device series can have lower minimum distances upon request, depending on the
specific conditions.
340
Installation in the control cabinet / housing
Maximum ambient temperatures
The following illustrations give an overview of the maximum ambient temperatures for the individual device
series, with different mounting positions and types.Device Dimensions and ambient temperature
IPC300 series, IPC1400 series
Vertical
Horizontal
45 °C
40 °C
CT200 series, OT100, OT200, OT1300 series
Vertical
Interfaces
Bottom/top
45° angle
Horizontal
50 °C
50 °C
50 °C
45 °C
Vertical
CPU module bottom
45° angle
Horizontal
50 °C
45 °C
45 °C
45 °C
Vertical
CPU module bottom
45° angle
Horizontal
50 °C
45 °C
45 °C
45 °C
IPC300 series, WT300 series
IPC1400 series
341
Dimensions – HMI devices
Dimensions
Device
W x H x D (mm)
Display W x H (mm)
CT series
CT205
CT205M
CT205V
212 x 156 x 49
212 x 156 x 49
212 x 156 x 49
197 x 141
197 x 141
197 x 141
OT series
OT115/R/BE1
OT115/R/BE2
OT205/BE1
OT205/M/BE1
OT205/M/BE1
OT205/V/BE1
OT1310/BE1/AE1G0
OT1310/BE1/CC/AE1G0
OT1310/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1310/BE1/GT1G0
OT1312/BE1/AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/CC/AE1G0
OT1312/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1312/BE1/GT1G0
OT1315/BE1//AE1G0
OT1315/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1315/BE1/GT1G0
OT1319/BE1/AE1G0
OT1319/M/BE1/AE1G0
OT1319/BE1/GT1G0
170 x 128 x 50
170 x 160 x 50
212 x 156 x 49
212 x 156 x 49
212 x 156 x 49
270,5 x 175 x 49
310 x 234 x 54
310 x 234 x 54
310 x 234 x 54
310 x 234 x 68
341 x 253 x 54
341 x 253 x 54
341 x 253 x 54
310 x 234 x 68
406 x 308 x 62
406 x 308 x 62
310 x 234 x 76
471 x 375 x 62
471 x 375 x 62
310 x 234 x 76
143
143
197
197
197
197
290
290
290
290
321
321
321
321
387
387
387
452
452
452
WT series
WT310/BE1
WT312/BE1
WT315/BE1
307 x 233 x 94
307 x 256 x 97
405 x 308 x 97
290 x 214
321 x 233
387 x 289,5
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
105
105
141
141
141
141
214
214
214
214
233
233
233
233
289
289
289
356
356
356
Dimensions – industrial PCs
1)
2)
3)
Dimensions
Device
W x H x D (mm)
Display W x H (mm)
IPC series
IPC310/BE1
IPC312/BE1
IPC315/BE1
IPC1410/BE1
IPC1412/BE1
IPC1415/BE1
IPC1419/BE11)
307
337
405
314
337
405
470
290
321
387
290
321
387
452
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
233 x 94
256 x 97
308 x 97
240 x 110
256 1102)/1593)
308 x 1242)/1713)
374,6 x 1212)/1703)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
214
233
289,5
222
233
289,5
356
for 19” installation
without attachment / expansion units
with 2 attachments (1 attachment = 25 mm)
342
Dimensions – control system
Dimensions
Module
Processor modules
MPC2xx
ME203 / x
ME203 / xN
MX213
MH212/x
Safety modules
SLC284
SDI208
SDO204
Digital input/output module
DI2xx/xx
DO2xx/xx
DOR206/xx
DIO216 / xx
DIO232
DIO248
DIO264
DIO280/x
Analog input/output module
AI204 / x
AI20x / SI
AO202
AO208 / Ix
AO202 / SI
AO204 / SI
AIO288/x
PTAI216x
TI214/x
DMS202
AIC212x
Technology module
CNT204 / Hx
CNT204 / R
ISI222/x
ACR222 / 2
PWM202
Interface module
RS204 / x
EM213x
SWI205/S
Bus module
BEM211
BES212
BES222
BES202 / N
BES2x2/N
FCS214/x
Grid measurement module
GMP232
GSP274
343
W x H x D (mm)
Weight (g)
110 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
220 x 119 x 96
650
230
310
670
1870
110 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
360
210
230
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
200
240
220
210
210
370
390
385
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
110 x 119 x 61
210
210
200
230
200
210
240
220
210
235
360
55
55
55
55
55
61
61
61
61
61
200
225
235
265
220
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
55 x 119 x 61
200
340
240
55
55
55
55
55
55
195
205
205
290
290
290
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
61
61
61
61
61
61
110 x 119 x 61
165 x 119 x 75
600
640
CAE/CAD data
Dimensions
Module
W x H x D (mm)
Bus modules
FM211
55 x 119 x 70
FM222
55 x 119 x 70
FS221/N
55 x 119 x 70
FS222/N
55 x 119 x 70
CM202x
55 x 119 x 61
CS200/x
55 x 119 x 61
DPM200
55 x 119 x 61
DNM201
55 x 119 x 61
SEM201
55 x 119 x 72
Dezentralized CAN modules
DIO16-Cx
110 x 119 x 61
DIO32-C
164 x 119 x 61
DIO48-C
228 x 119 x 61
DIO264-C
137 x 119 x 61
DA3284-Cx
228 x 119 x 61
TCO2xx-C
137 x 119 x 61
Power supply modules / bus rails / accessories
NT250 / 48
55 x 119 x 61
NT255x
55 x 119 x 61
VP200/x
55 x 119 x 61
LM201
55 x 119 x 61
BS201
55 x 119 x 14
BS202
110 x 119 x 22
BS203x
165 x 119 x 22
BS204x
220 x 119 x 22
BS205x
275 x 119 x 22
BS206x
330 x 119 x 22
BS207x
385 x 119 x 22
BS208x
440 x 119 x 22
BS209x
495 x 119 x 22
BS210x
550 x 119 x 22
BS211x
605 x 119 x 22
BS212x
660 x 119 x 22
BS213x
715 x 119 x 22
BS214x
770 x 119 x 14
BS215x
825 x 119 x 22
BS216x
880 x 119 x 22
BS203/S
165 x 137 x 22
BS204/S
220 x 137 x 22
BS205/S
275 x 137 x 22
BS206/S
330 x 137 x 22
BS207/S
385 x 137 x 22
BS208/S
440 x 137 x 22
BS209/S
495 x 119 x 22
BS210/S
550 x 137 x 22
BS211/S
605 x 137 x 22
BS212/S
660 x 137 x 22
BS213/S
715 x 137 x 22
BS214/S
770 x 137 x 14
BS215/S
825 x 137 x 22
BS216/S
880 x 137 x 22
Weight (g)
320
400
350
425
200
300
200
205
200
485
695
750
250
850
250
300
300
260
115
260
150
260
365
440
515
620
690
740
880
960
1000
1100
1200
1310
1420
280
385
460
535
640
710
760
900
980
1020
1120
1220
1330
1440
344
345
Together. Competent. Efficient.
Training
Bachmann training:
profit from our knowledge.
Availability of qualified personnel is a crucial factor for assurance of product
quality. Consequently employees at all levels of an enterprise must be
offered advanced training on a regular basis. We are pleased to support you
in this regard: with our extensive Bachmann training offering.
Our offering
Our training offering extends from proven standard training courses to
training courses that are individually tailored to your requirements.
Our procedure
Our modularly structured training concept makes it possible to put
together a training program that meets the needs of your company.
Your result
Qualified employees and documentation that meets the requirements
of your training program.
We would be pleased to create a training program for your company!
Contact us: [email protected]
[i]
Note:
Additional information on this topic
is provided in our training catalog
»bachmann.training«.
346
The Bachmann world
Austria
Germany
Corporate Headquarters
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kreuzäckerweg 33
6800 Feldkirch, Austria
P +43 (0) 55 22 / 34 97-0
[email protected]
www.bachmann.info
Headquarters Germany
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Egermannstr. 7
53359 Rheinbach / Bonn, Germany
P +49 (0) 22 26 / 1 57 46-0
[email protected]
Certec EDV GmbH
Kasernenstr. 29
7000 Eistenstadt, Austria
P +43 (0) 26 82 / 757 99-0
[email protected]
www.certec.at
Bachmann Monitoring GmbH
Weimarische Straße 10
07407 Rudolstadt, Germany
P +49 (0) 36 72 / 31 86-0
[email protected]
Bachmann Monitoring Magdeburg
Nachtweide 82b
39124 Magdeburg, Germany
P +49 (0) 391 / 50 95 02-31
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Bayern
Langaeckerstrasse 16
73565 Spraitbach, Germany
P +49 (0) 170-789 07 25
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Bochum
Konrad-Zuse-Str. 3
44801 Bochum, Germany
P +49 (0) 234 / 93 25 98-0
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Hamburg
Winsener Str. 39
21423 Drage / Hamburg, Germany
P +49 (0) 41 77 / 71 11 38
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Hamm
Hoher Weg 48
59073 Hamm, Germany
P +49 (0) 23 81 / 9 56 84 20
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Hof
Osseckerstraße 174
95030 Hof, Germany
P +49 (0) 92 81 / 1 40 96-68
[email protected]
347
Bachmann Office Meinerzhagen
Volmestr. 1
58540 Meinerzhagen, Germany
P +49 (0) 23 54 / 7 08 69-0
[email protected]
China
Headquarters China
Bachmann electronic Technical
Services (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
巴合曼电子技术服务(上海)有限公司
Bachmann Office Rostock
Margaretenstrasse 36
18057 Rostock, Germany
P +49 (0) 381 / 490 64 32
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Stuttgart
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kirchardtsbrunnen 10
74906 Bad Rappenau, Germany
P +49 (0) 711 / 72 20 71 03
[email protected]
East Ocean Center, Room 14C,
Phase 2, 618 Yan‘an East Road,
Huangpu District, Shanghai 200001, PR
China
P +86 21 23 13 51 88
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Beijing
Anlian Building, Buildung 3, Room 1208
No.38 North Road Dongsan Huan
Beijing 100026, Caoyang District, PR
China
P +86 10 85 87 06 07
[email protected]
Denmark
Bachmann Office Silkeborg
Vejlsøvej 51
8600 Silkeborg, Denmark
P +45 70 20 28 34
[email protected]
Benelux
India
Bachmann electronic Industrial
Automation Private Limited, Pune
1/E, Classic Building, North Avenue
Kalyani Nagar
Pune 411006
P +91 (0) 20 40 04 61 92
[email protected]
Bachmann Office Veenendaal
Vendelier 65-69
3905 PD Veenendaal, Netherlands
P +31 (0) 85 210 0550
[email protected]
USA
Bachmann electronic Corp
34121 North Route. 45, Suite 203
Grayslake, IL 60030, USA
P +1 847 / 249 30 03
[email protected]
348
Impressum
Copyright © 2012
by Bachmann electronic GmbH
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kreuzäckerweg 33
6800 Feldkirch, Austria
P +43 (0) 55 22 / 34 97-0
[email protected]
www.bachmann.info
Publisher:
Bachmann electronic GmbH, Feldkirch
Product overviews, operating manuals, manuals,
and software are protected by copyright.
Copying, duplication, translation or conversion
to any electronic medium or machine readable
form in whole or in part is prohibited. All other
rights to the software are specified in the license
provisions. Citation of products that do not
come from Bachmann electronic GmbH, is for
information purposes only and does not constitute
misuse of trademarks. Bachmann electronic GmbH
assumes no guarantee relative to the selection,
performance or usability of these products.
Subject to technical change. All rights reserved.
Limitation of liability:
We have checked the content of the
document for agreement with the described
hardware / software. Nevertheless the possibility
of deviations cannot be excluded; we cannot
assume any liability for complete agreement.
The information in this document is checked on
a regular basis and necessary corrections will be
included in subsequent editions.
KA-SYSTEM / 05EN, 11/2012
KA-SYSTEM / 02DE, 11.2010,
00014152 / 0
Bachmann electronic GmbH
Kreuzäckerweg 33, 6800 Feldkirch, Austria
P +43 (0)55 22 / 34 97-0
www.bachmann.info
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement